2020 · 2020. 7. 31. · Bachelor of Marketing Management (NQF Level 7) 125 Bachelor in Human...

2020PROSPECTUSwww.ium.edu.na

CONTENTSVISION 8MISSION STATEMENT 9THE GOVERNING COUNCIL 9EXECUTIVE MANAGEMENT COMMITTEE 9CAMPUSES/CENTRES 10QUALIFICATIONS OFFERED 11MESSAGE FROM THE ACTING VICE-CHANCELLOR 13BRIEF HISTORICAL BACKGROUND 15

REGULATIONS 17GENERAL REGULATIONS (GR) 17ACADEMIC REGULATIONS (AR) 27LIBRARY RULES AND REGULATIONS 37

FACULTY OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION 39Certificate in Business Administration (NQF Level 5) 40Certificate in Finance Management (NQF Level 5) 44Diploma in Business Administration (NQF Level 6) 46Diploma in Finance Management (NQF Level 6) 51Postgraduate Diploma in Finance Management (NQF Level 8) 55Bachelor of Business Administration (NQF Level 7) 58Bachelor of Finance Management (NQF Level 7) 64Bachelor of Economics (NQF Level 7) 69Bachelor of Business Administration Honours (NQF Level 8) 76Bachelor of Finance Management Honours (NQF Level 8) 81Bachelor of Accounting Honours (Level 8) 84Bachelor of Economics Honours (NQF Level: 8) 90

FACULTY OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND LEADERSHIP 95Certificate in Human Resource Management (Level 5) 96Certificate in Marketing Management (Level 5) 100Diploma in Human Resource Management ( NQF Level 6) 104Diploma in Marketing Management (Level 6) 109Postgraduate Diploma in Public Policy and Management (Level 8) 113Bachelor in Human Resource Management (Level 7) 119Bachelor of Marketing Management (NQF Level 7) 125Bachelor in Human Resource Management Honours (Level 8) 132Bachelor of Marketing Management Honours (NQF Level 8) 136

FACULTY OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY 141

DEPARTMENT OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY (IT) 142Certificate in Business Information Systems (Level 5) 142 Diploma in Business Information Systems (Level 6) 147

Bachelor of Science in Business Information Systems (NQF Level 7) 153Bachelor of Science in Business Information Systems Honours (NQF Level 8) 160

DEPARTMENT OF SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT (SD) 165Bachelor of Science in Software Development (NQF Level: 7) 165Bachelor of Science in Software Development Honours (NQF Level: 8) 171

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION (E & C) 175 Bachelor of Science in Electronics and Engineering Honours (Level 8) (Specializations: Telecommunication, Instrumentation, Control, Computer Engineering, Electrical) 175

FACULTY OF TOURISM, HOSPITALITY, AND EVENTS MANAGEMENT 185Certificate in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management (Level 5) 186Diploma in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management (Level 6) 190Bachelor in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management (Level 7) 195Bachelor in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management Honours (Level 8) 202Postgraduate Diploma in Events Management (Level 8) 206

FACULTY OF HEALTH AND SOCIAL SCIENCES 211

DEPARTMENT OF NURSING AND MIDWIFERY 212Bachelor in Nursing Honours Degree – Bnur Hons (NQF Level: 8) 212Certificate in Pharmacist’s Assistant (NQF level 5) 220Postgraduate Diploma in Paediatric Nursing (NQF Level: 8) 224

DEPARTMENT OF HIV/AIDS MANAGEMENT 228Diploma in HIV/AIDS Management (Level 6) 228Bachelor of HIV/AIDS Management (NQF Level: 7) 232Bachelor of HIV/AIDS Management Honours (NQF Level: 8) 238

DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND WELLNESS STUDIES 241Certificate in Health and Wellness Studies (NQF Level: 5) 241Diploma in Health and Wellness Studies (NQF Level: 6) 244Bachelor of Health and Wellness Studies (NQF Level: 7) 248Bachelor of Health and Wellness Studies Honours (NQF Level: 8) 254

FACULTY OF EDUCATION 257 Diploma in Education - Pre and Junior Primary (NQF Level: 7) 258Bachelor of Education Honours (Pre and Junior Primary) (NQF Level: 8) 268Bachelor of Education Honours (Senior Primary) (NQF Level: 8) 277Bachelor of Education Honours (Secondary Education) (NQF Level: 8) 288Postgraduate Diploma in Education (NQF Level: 8) 301Postgraduate Diploma in Higher Education (NQF Level: 8) 307Bachelor in Education: Educational Leadership, Management and Policy honours degree 311

CENTRE FOR IMPROVED INSTITUTIONAL PERFORMANCE (CIIP) 319Centre For Institutional Improvement And Performance (CIIP) 320CERTIFICATE: Secretarial and Office Administration 321

CERTIFICATE: Bookkeeping 323DIPLOMA: Office Administration 324MDP: Management Development Programme [Only in Windhoek] 325Preparatory Course 327English Language Upgrade Course 329Professional Development and workshop courses 331

DISTANCE AND E-LEARNING CENTRE 333DISTANCE AND E-LEARNING CENTRE 334

SCHOOL OF POSTGRADUATE STUDIES 335Master of Business Administration (NQF Level: 9) 337Master in HIV and AIDS Management (NQF Level: 9) 345Master of Education – Educational Leadership, Management and Policy Education (NQF Level: 9) 347Master of Science in Information Technology (NQF Level: 9) 352Master of Science in Tourism and Hospitality Management (NQF Level: 9) 357Master in International Relations, Diplomacy and Management (NQF Level: 9) 363Master in Public Policy & Management ( NQF Level: 9) 369REGULATIONS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTER 374Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D) Degree in Business Administration (NQF Level 10) 378Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D) Degree in Information and Communication Technology (Level 10) 382Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D) in Education (NQF Level: 10) 386Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D) Degree in Tourism and Hospitality (NQF Level 10) 390REGULATIONS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY (PhD) 394

NOTE

That particular courses and/or programmes have been indicated in this Prospectus does not necessarily mean that they will be offered in the academic year 2020.

“We shall be a nation of great thinkers and achievers, a nation which will utilise its available resourses carefully and economically...”

Hon. Prof. David Richard Namwandi

(Founder & Chairman)

VISION

IUM’s vision is to encourage and develop an African cadre of men and women who can operate at international standards in business by:• providing access to high quality, value-based educational experiences to students,

while emphasizing multicultural diversity and international perspectives;• recruiting and training outstanding students, faculty and staff who will learn, work

and conduct world-class research and development engagements that address the challenges in Namibia and the rest of the world;

• creating interactive, effective learning environment in all its programmes.

MISSION STATEMENT

IUM’s mission is to:• Establish and sustain a higher seat of learning in Namibia that produces innovative

specialists, leaders, managers, and scholars for the public and private sectors for Namibia and other countries in the world; and

• Train dedicated knowledge workers who provide leadership, entrepreneurial management and supervision of business enterprises at national and international levels and contribute positively to the development of the companies and nations they serve with skill, expertise, and creativity.

CHANCELLORBishop Dr Shekutaamba Vänö-Väinö Nambala

THE GOVERNING COUNCILProf. David Richard Namwandi (Chairperson)Dr. Helen Nkandi-Shiimi (Deputy Chairperson)Prof. Kingo J Mchombu (Advisor: Founder & Governing Council)Prof. Oladele Arowolo (Acting Vice-Chancellor)Dr. Demus Makuwa (On Invitation)Mr. John NautaDr. Ben MulongeniMr. Peter ElindiDr. Lyndon JonesMr. Mikka Asino Dr. Cleophas KankondiCllr. György TrepperMs. Dutte N Shinyemba Ms. Martha NaandaMs. Lena BiwaMr. Lloyd Sikeba (SRC President)Mrs. Justine Kamati : Legal Advisor (Minutes)

EXECUTIVE MANAGEMENT COMMITTEEProf. Oladele Arowolo (Acting Vice-Chancellor and Pro Vice-Chancellor: Academic Affairs & Research)Prof. Earle S. Taylor (Deputy Vice-Chancellor)Dr. Demus Makuwa (Pro Vice-Chancellor: Administration & Management and Director: Quality Assurance & Management)Mr. Sebedeus !Naruseb (Director: Human Resources)Mr. Aquilinus T. Nashilundo (Registrar)Mr. Wilfred Muller (Director: Finance)Mr. Gerry W. Munyama (Director: Marketing, Communication, and Stakeholders Engagement)Ms. Petsy Neiss (Director: Examinations Management)Dr. Hendrina Udjombala (Director: CIIP, Student and Customer Liaison)Ms. Seno Namwandi (Director: Innovation & Intellectual Property)Dr. Paulus Sheetekela (ICT Services Manager)Mr. Aron J. Stephanus (Manager: Internal Audit)Mrs. Justine Kamati (Legal Advisor)

CAMPUSES/CENTRES

Dorado Park Campus (Main Campus)Dorado Park, Extension 1, 21–31 Hercules Street • Private Bag 14005, Bachbrecht,

Windhoek +264 61 433 6000 | +264 61 433 6152 | [email protected]

www.ium.edu.na

City Branch (Windhoek)59 Bahnhof Street • Private Bag 14005, Bachbrecht, Windhoek

+264 61 245 150 | +264 61 248 112 | [email protected]

Ongwediva Campus4380 Dr. Libertina Amadhila Street • P.O. Box 2775, Oshakati

+264 65 230 145/230 149 | +264 65 230 159 | [email protected]

Coastal Campus (Walvis Bay)Pelican Mall, Cnr: Sam Nujoma/Getrud Kandanga Road • P.O. Box 346, Walvis Bay +264 64 206 647 | +264 64 206 647 | [email protected]

Swakopmund Research & Consultancy CentreHaus Meeresruh Complex • P.O. Box 3303, Vineta, Swakopmund

+264 64 400 106 | +264 64 400 106 | [email protected]

Nkurenkuru CampusErf 678 Nkurenkuru • P.O. Box 6038, Nkurenkuru

+264 66 264957/264500 | [email protected]

Distance and E-Learning Centre59 Bahnhof Street • Private Bag 14005, Bachbrecht, Windhoek

+264 61 245 150 | +264 61 248 112 | [email protected]

Centre for Improved Institutional Performance (CIIP)Dorado Park, Extension 1, 21–31 Hercules Street • Private Bag 14005, Bachbrecht,

Windhoek +264 61 433 6000 | +264 61 433 6152 | [email protected]

11

QUALIFICATIONS OFFERED

QUALIFICATION TITLE NQF LEVEL

CERTIFICATES (8)1. Certificate in Business Administration 52. Certificate in Finance Management 53. Certificate in Human Resources Management 54. Certificate in Marketing Management 55. Certificate in Business Information Systems 56. Certificate in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management 5 7. Certificate in Health and Wellness Studies 58. Certificate in Pharmacist’s Assistant 5

DIPLOMAS (9)1. Diploma in Business Administration 62. Diploma in Finance Management 63. Diploma in Human Resources Management 6 4.Diploma in Marketing Management 65. Diploma in Business Information Systems 66. Diploma in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management 67. Diploma in HIV-AIDS Management 68. Diploma in Health and Wellness Studies 69. Diploma in Education (Pre and Junior Primary) 7

POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMAS (6)1. Postgraduate Diploma in Finance Management 82. Postgraduate Diploma in Events Management 83. Postgraduate Diploma in Education 84. Postgraduate Diploma in Higher Education 85. Postgraduate Diploma in Paediatric Nursing 86. Postgraduate Diploma in Public Policy and Management 8

BACHELOR DEGREES (10)1. Bachelor of Business Administration 72. Bachelor of Finance Management 73. Bachelor in Economics 74. Bachelor in Human Resource Management 7 5. Bachelor in Marketing Management 76. Bachelor of Science in Software Development 7 7. Bachelor of Science in Business Information Systems 7

12

8. Bachelor in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management 79. Bachelor of HIV-AIDS Management 710. Bachelor of Health and Wellness Studies 7

BACHELOR HONOURS DEGREES (17)1. Bachelor of Business Administration Honours 82. Bachelor of Finance Management Honours 83. Bachelor of Accounting Honours 84. Bachelor in Economics Honours 85. Bachelor in Human Resource Management Honours 8 6. Bachelors in Marketing Management Honours 87. Bachelor of Science in Software Development Honours 88. Bachelor of Science in Business Information Systems Honours 89. Bachelor of Science in Electronics Honours 810. Bachelor in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management Honours 811. Bachelor of Nursing Honours 812. Bachelor of HIV-AIDS Management Honours 813. Bachelor of Health and Wellness Studies Honours 814. Bachelor of Education Honours (Pre and Junior Primary) 815. Bachelor of Education Honours (Senior Primary) 816. Bachelor of Education Honours (Secondary Education) 817. Bachelor in Education Honours : Educational Leadership, Management and Policy 8 MASTERS DEGREES (10)1. Master of Business Administration (Marketing) 92. Master of Business Administration (Finance) 93. Master of Business Administration (Management) 94. Master of Business Administration (Human Resources) 95. Master in HIV/AIDS Management 96. Master of Education – Educational Leadership, Management, and Policy 97. Master of Science in Information Technology 98. Master of Science in Tourism and Hospitality Management 99. Master in International Relations, Diplomacy, and Management 910. Master in Public Policy and Management 9

DOCTORAL (PhD) DEGREES (4)1. PhD in Business Administration 102. PhD in Information and Communication Technology 103. PhD in Education 104. PhD in Tourism and Hospitality 10

13

MESSAGE FROM THE ACTING VICE-CHANCELLOR

I welcome all students to the new academic year 2020. We believe a lot of work has been done by the staff of the University which ensures that your stay at this young and vibrant institution will bring you success at the end of your studies. The university has its main campus at Dorado Park in Windhoek with additional teaching facilities located at the business centre of Windhoek. The university has other campuses at strategic locations throughout Namibia, including Coastal campus located at Walvis Bay, Ongwediva Campus at the north of Namibia, and Nkurenkuru Campus located in the Kavango region, near the border with the Republic of Angola and Zambia. You are welcome to study in anyone of these Campuses. The broad purpose of the International University of Management (IUM) is to educate and train professionals of the future who will go out into the world and create wealth and jobs for themselves and for others. The university is driven by a burning desire to foster innovation and entrepreneurship, and creation of new knowledge through research, publishing and community engagement. It is our prime goal to build the critical and creative thinking capacity of our students, academics, and other stakeholders. A unique feature of the curricula at IUM is the infusion of innovation and entrepreneurship as a compulsory course for all students to build a capacity to create jobs. Approach the academic staff of the Faculty of Business Administration if you are interested in entrepreneurship and would like to enrol in the courses offered. The university offers a wide range of academic and professional courses through various modes of delivery that include face-to-face learning, Video Conferencing, and Distance and E-Learning. The IUM comprises of the following Faculties and Centres: - Business Administration - Strategic Management and Leadership - Education - Health and Social Sciences - Information and Communication Technology - Tourism, Hospitality, and Events Management - School of Postgraduate Studies - Centre for Improved Institutional Performance (CIIP) - Distance and E-Learning CentreThe IUM is a member of several international organisations including: Southern Africa Research & Innovation Management Association (SARIMA); Association of African Business Schools (AABS); and Association of African Universities (AAU). The university has entered into cooperation agreements with many organisations in Namibia and beyond, including: the Bank of Namibia, Communications Regulatory Authority of Namibia (CRAN), the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP), National Commission on Research, Science, and Technology (NCRST), Namibia Ports Authority

14

(NAMPORT), the University of Namibia (UNAM), and various big hotels in Namibia for student internship purposes. Various hospitals in Windhoek for practical’s for the Nursing programmes. Internationally, IUM has cooperating partners among renowned universities both in Africa and beyond, including universities in Finland, Russia, China, Kenya, and the Mediterranean countries with the aim of benchmarking programmes against established international standards. Locally, IUM is accredited by the National Qualifications Authority (NQA) and works closely with Namibia’s National Council of Higher Education (NCHE). The efforts of IUM to contribute to the National Human Resources plan have led to the creation of a new Executive Development Programme department called the Centre for Improved Institutional Performance (CIIP) which offers career development programmes for those in management positions. Other programmes offered at CIIP target Information Technology, Office Administration, Waste Management, and many more. More programmes will be added in future and communicated via the media. The 2020 Prospectus gives you information of all our programmes and the rules and regulations of the university which govern student registration and academic progress. Please familiarise yourself with the content of the Prospectus because of its importance to managing your studies. When you are in doubt, the Deans of different Faculties and their teams are on standby to provide any additional information you may require; do not thus hesitate to contact them as they are there to help you. I wish you all blessings in your academic life at the International University of Management. Prof. Oladele Arowolo Acting Vice-Chancellor

15

BRIEF HISTORICAL BACKGROUND

The Roots and FocusThe International University of Management (IUM) has its roots in the Institute of Higher Education which was founded in 1994 by Honourable Dr David Richard Namwandi. He went on to serve a stint as Member of Parliament of the Republic of Namibia (2010 – 2015) during which period he also served as Deputy Minister of Education (2010 – 2013) and Minister of Education (2013 – 2015).

IUM is a sole Namibian initiative which started with one lecturer and one student, has now grown into an institution whose student population is currently more than 10000. The intellectual and vocational bases of the University are firmly rooted and focused in the areas of Management and ICT.

Since its humble beginnings, the university has gained recognition as a centre of excellence for the teaching of Management Science and ICT disciplines at all levels. While these disciplines remain the anchor, the University has since diversified its offerings at both undergraduate and postgraduate levels in order to address different economic and management needs in Namibia. In addition, the University has carried out numerous consultancies and research on behalf of both the private and public sectors in Namibia.

IUM was officially launched as the first private University in Namibia on 26 October 2002 by the then State President, H E Dr Shafiishuna Nujoma and its own Hi-Tech campus at Dorado Park in Windhoek was inaugurated on 26 April 2011 by the then State President, H E Dr Hifikepunye Pohamba.

Purpose of IUMThe purpose of the university is to educate and train young managers and entrepreneurs of the future; who will go out into the world and help to generate work and wealth in those sectors of society where there is most need, demand or opportunity.

IUM’s UniquenessThis University and the students who pass through it are different in a number of ways:• Our students are products of a social and an economic conscience inherent in the

heart of the university’s operations which focus, amongst others, on the choice and design of programmes.

• The University follows a path that respects the needs of the country and dedicates its efforts to the enhancement of the socio-economic wealth of its people.

• We are primarily aimed at the development of managers of the future and wealth creators in society.

• The University embraces the best theory not as an intellectual end in itself, but as the raw material of sound practice since the best principles and practice of management are based upon well tested theories.

16

• The University is significantly organized and resourced to make positive contributions to the development of our country and thus directs its efforts at today’s national needs and anticipates the challenges that have to be inevitably faced in the future.

• We are the first of the kind in Africa to establish a Faculty of HIV/AIDS. Given the magnitude of the HIV and AIDS pandemic in Africa, the importance of such a faculty cannot be overemphasized.

ResearchThe International University of Management has established itself as a teaching and research-oriented institution where both teaching and research excellence are valued and promoted in order to engender contributions to the advancement of knowledge to our professionals, students, and researchers and to the well-being of our stakeholders in a credible manner.

To actively promote research and establish a research culture at IUM, a comprehensive research agenda is formulated each academic year. Every faculty has a Research Committee and develops its research agenda based on submissions by all academic staff members. It is on this basis that IUM develops a comprehensive research agenda by integrating research interests indicated in each Faculty Research Agenda.

In order to achieve IUM’s research objectives, the following strategies are being implemented:• Pursuing excellence in the conduct of research through the application of scientific

research methods applicable to the broad field of the Social Sciences;• Conducting the whole range of research types (descriptive, analytical, basic and

applied) and employing suitable approaches (qualitative, quantitative, or mixed methods) relevant to the interests of the researcher(s);

• Reviewing topic-specific literature as a basis for expanding the knowledge base on substantive as well as methodological issues; and exploring the theoretical terrain for research design;

• Developing and implementing an overall IUM Research Agenda based on inputs from all the individual faculty research agendas;

• Adopting the best approach in addressing specific research issues, including the choice of methods of data collection, verification and consolidation; analytical and statistical techniques for data management and, application of IT, including computer packages;

• Collaborating with researchers outside IUM, both national and international, to enhance quality research and promote the image of the university; and

• Encouraging both staff and students to participate in research and knowledge sharing throughout all the phases of research – from problem conceptualization and research design to data collection, management and processing, and analysis using computer programmes and report preparation.

17

REGULATIONSGENERAL REGULATIONS (GR)

GR 1 : GENERAL

Subject to Faculty, Programme, Departmental, and Centre Special Regulations, the following regulations shall apply:GR 1.1: General Regulations shall take precedence over all Special Regulations unless Senate provides otherwise.GR 1.2: The Senate shall be the final authority for the interpretation of these regulations.GR 1.3 : The Senate has the right to amend, alter, cancel or replace any of these regulations.GR 1.4 : The Senate has the authority to exempt any student from any of the regulations.GR 1.5 : A student who has started a programme of study following one set of regulations shall not be affected by regulations subsequently adopted unless agreed to in writing by the student.GR 1.6 : There might, however, be cases which might warrant the non-application of the above regulation. In such cases, the Registrar shall immediately circulate a notice to that effect.

GR 2 : THE STRUCTURE OF DEGREE PROGRAMMES

Students opting to register for the IUM degree programmes will commence in year one (1) subject to being granted exemptions on application to the relevant faculty. The bulk of the first year subjects are aimed at ensuring that the student can understand and use the English Language effectively.

GR 3: THE CERTIFICATE AND DIPLOMA PROGRAMMES

The purpose of the above programmes is to:

GR 3.1 : Enable students wishing to register for degree programmes to attain relevant and required credits.GR 3.2: Provide useful, relevant, and comprehensive stand alone qualification(s) for students who wish to gain employment.

GR 4 : ADMISSION REQUIREMENTSGR 4.1 : Students shall be selected and admitted on merit without regard to religion or cultural identity and regardless of ethnic origin, colour, race, political opinion, or sex.GR 4.1.1: Subject to faculty, school, departmental, and centre special requirements for

18

all qualifications, Mature Age entry to undergraduate certificate, diploma, and degree programmes shall be on the grounds that candidates: a) Are 25 years old or over in the year in which admission is soughtb) Have at least 3 years’ experiencec) Have at least a pass at grade 10d) Provide a suitable reference relating to work experience

GR 4.2: Undergraduate ProgrammesGR 4.2.1: The normal entry requirement to undergraduate degree programmes shall be a Namibia Senior Secondary Certificate (Ordinary or Higher or a combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including English at Grade D) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale.

GR 4.2.2: Certificate in Health and Wellness GR 4.2.2.1 : The normal entry requirement shall be a Namibia Senior Secondary Certificate Higher (NSSCH) or Higher International General Certificate for Secondary Education (HIGCSE) in four subjects with grades 1- 4; with a minimum of 20 points or more.

ORA Grade 12 Namibia Senior Secondary Certificate Ordinary (NSSCO) level or International General Certificate for Secondary Education (IGCSE) with a minimum of E symbol in English Language totalling 20 points or more.

ORA minimum of 20 points from a combination of NSSCH/HIGCSE and NSSCO/IGCSE.

OREnter through a flexible learning path – mature age/prior learning with 3 years relevant experience in various fields in the world of work.

ORThe equivalent of any of the above as determined by the IUM Senate.

GR 4.2.3 : Certificate in Pharmacist`s AssistantAdmission/ entry requirements

A Grade 12 certificate with a minimum of 20 points; employed by a registered pharmacist in a pharmacy for a period of 2-3 years.

ORMature aged entry: 25 years of age, a Grade 10 certificate with a minimum of 18 points, and 4 years work experience in a pharmacy.

GR 4.2.4: Diploma in Health and Wellness The normal requirement for entry into this programme shall be possession of a Certificate in Health and Wellness Studies (Level 5) or other equivalent qualification.

19

GR 4.2.5: Bachelor in Health and Wellness GR4.2.5.1: The normal entry requirement to this programme shall be a Namibia Senior Secondary Certificate ( Ordinary or Higher or a combination of both ) or equivalent qualifications, provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including English at Grade D) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale.GR4.2.5.2 : Applicants should also meet the following requirements: Hold HIGCSE senior certificate in four subjects with 1- 4 symbols.

ORHold a Grade 12 senior certificate (IGCSE) with a minimum of D symbol in English Language totalling twenty five points or more.

OREnter through a flexible learning path – mature age/prior learning with five years relevant experience in various fields in the world of work.

ORHold a Diploma in Health and Wellness (Level 6) or equivalent.GR4.2.5.3 : In addition to these requirements, admission to the degree programme shall also be subject to a successful interview/aptitude test (as required) and availability of places.

GR 4.2.6: Bachelor in Health and Wellness Honours

To be admitted to this programme, applicants must hold a Bachelor in Health and Wellness Studies degree at (National Qualifications Framework) NQF Level 7 or equivalent.

GR 4.2.7: Bachelor in Nursing Honours GR 4.2.7.1: For the Bachelor in Nursing Honours programme, the entry requirement shall be a Namibia Senior Secondary Certificate (Ordinary or Higher or a combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects including Mathematics, Biology, and Physical Science and a minimum of a grade D in English normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale.GR 4.2.7.2: Mature Age entry for Bachelor in Nursing Honours applicants shall be considered if they are 25 years old and above and have at least 18-20 points at Namibia Senior Secondary Certificate (Ordinary or Higher or a combination of both) examination or equivalent examination(s) and 3-4 years’ experience in nursing and midwifery (Enrolled Nurse/Midwife) in a clinic or hospital with 18 points.GR 4.2.7.3: Shortlisted applicants may be interviewed.GR 4.2.7.4: Successful applicants must register as nursing students with the Nursing Council of Namibia.

20

GR 4.2.8: Bachelor in Education – Educational Leadership, Management and Policy Honours To be admitted to this programme, candidates must already have level 7 or 6 (NQA or equivalent) qualification with experience of at least three years in education or in a related organization as determined by Senate.

GR 4.2.10: Bachelor of Education Honours (Pre and Junior Primary)GR 4.2.10.1: The normal entry requirements to this programme shall be:Grade 12 or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including English with a minimum of a D grade) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale.

ORA recognised qualification at NQF level 6 or equivalent with a minimum of a D symbol in English at Grade 12.

ORMature age entry (As stipulated in GR 4.1.1).

GR 4.2.10.2: In addition, admission to this programme will be subject to a successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM Senate.GR 4.2.10.3 : Other requirements

English Language competenciesAll students should demonstrate English competency by passing English at NSSCO level or equivalent with a minimum of a D symbol. Namibian language competenciesAll students should demonstrate competency in a Namibian language by passing it at NSSCO level or equivalent with a minimum of D symbol. GR 4.2.11: Bachelor of Education Honours (Senior Primary) GR 4.2.11.1: The normal entry requirement to this qualification shall be a Namibian Senior Secondary Certificate (Ordinary or Higher or combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including English at D) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale.

ORMature age entry (As stipulated in GR 4.1.1).GR 4.2.11.2 : In addition, admission to this programme will be subject to a successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate.GR 4.2.11.3 : Other requirementsEnglish Language competencies All students should demonstrate English competency by passing English at NSSCO level with a minimum of a D symbol. However, students who intend to specialise in

21

English as a First Language – must have English as a First Language with a minimum a D symbol at NSSCO level or equivalent.English as a Second Language – must have English as Second Language with a minimum of a D symbol at NSSCO level or equivalent.Namibian language competencies Namibian language specialisation - a student must have obtained a minimum of D symbol at NSSCO in the specified Namibian language to be admitted. Science and Mathematics competencies Science and Mathematics – a student must have obtained a minimum D symbol in both Science and Mathematics at NSSCO to be admitted. Practical Teaching All students should acquire field experience in the second, third, and fourth years of study and submit a report. For the: • second year - this field experience amounts to 2 weeks of class observation a year;• third year - this period of teaching practice amounts to 4 weeks a year; and • fourth year - this period of teaching practice amounts to 12 weeks a year. Each and every one of these field experiences are examinable and are a requirement for graduation. Assessment is by means of observation of the student, student assessment by learners and staff, and by submission of a teaching portfolio. Furthermore, students will be encouraged to practise teaching in at least one (1) school in the rural setting during the 3 years of teaching practice and submit a report – which will be assessed.

GR 4.2.12: Bachelor of Education Honours (Secondary Education)GR 4.2.12.1 : The normal entry requirement to this qualification shall be a Namibian Senior Secondary Certificate (Ordinary or Higher or combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including English at D) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale. GR 4.2.12.2: Students may also enter through Mature age entry (As stipulated in GR 4.1.1)GR 4.2.12.3 : In addition, admission to this programme will be subject to a successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate.GR 4.2.12.4: Other requirements:Language competencies (Namibian, English /foreign)All students who intend to specialise in Namibian, English, or any Foreign language:• As their first language – must have the language as first language with a minimum

of a D symbol at NSSCO or equivalent.• As their second language – must have language as second language with a minimum

of a C symbol at NSSCO or equivalent.All other competenciesA student must have also obtained a minimum of a D symbol in each of the two school or related subjects he/she intends to specialise in.

22

GR 4.2.13: Diploma in Education (Pre and Junior Primary) GR 4.2.13.1: The entry requirements to this qualification shall be:Grade 12 or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including English with a minimum of a D grade) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 23 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale.

ORA recognised qualification at NQF level 6 or equivalent.OR Mature age entry (As stipulated in GR 4.1.1)

GR 4.2.13.2: In addition, admission to this programme will be subject to a successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate.

GR 4.2.13.3 : Other requirements:English Language competenciesAll students should demonstrate English competency by passing English at NSSCO or equivalent with a minimum of a D symbol in English.Namibian language competenciesAll students should demonstrate a Namibian language competency by passing it with a minimum of a D symbol at NSSCO or equivalent.

GR 4.3: Postgraduate ProgrammesGR 4.3.1: Postgraduate Diploma in Education Admission/entry requirements:• A candidate must hold a minimum of a recognised Bachelor degree at NQF Level

7or equivalent.• The undergraduate record must demonstrate that the candidate acquired the content

knowledge of two (2) school subjects during three consecutive years of studies at the university (please see checklist for subject combinations below).

• A candidate should have knowledge of research methods.

Postgraduate Diploma in EducationTwo Secondary School major subjects combination list1. Mathematics and Science Groupinga Mathematics and Computer Studies

b Mathematics and Agriculture

c Mathematics and Biology

d Mathematics and Physical Science

e Biology and Physical Science

f Computer Studies and Biology

g Computer Studies and Physical Science

23

a Mathematics and Computer Studies

h Biology and Agriculture

2. Humanities Grouping/ Social Sciencea Geography and History

3. Commerce Groupingb Accounting and Economics

c Accounting and Business Studies

e Accounting and Entrepreneurship

f Economics and Business Studies

e Office Practice and Business Studies

g Entrepreneurship and Business Studies

h Office Practice and Accounting

4. Information Technology Groupinga Geography and History

5. Language GroupingEnglish and another language as listed below:i. Afrikaansii. Khoekhoegowabiii. Oshikwanyamaiv. Oshindongav. Otjihererovi. Rukwangalivii. Rumanyoviii. Silozi

Note: The availability of a subject or subject grouping at any campus shall be subject to demand.

GR 4.3.2: Postgraduate Diploma in Higher Education To be admitted to this programme, a candidate must have a recognised Education Qualification on NQF Level 8 or equivalent.Admission/entry requirements:

24

• A candidate must hold a recognised minimum Qualification at NQF Level 7 with at least three years relevant work experience as a trainer at an NQA recognised tertiary institution or institution of higher learning or organization or equivalent.

GR 4. 3.3 : Postgraduate Diploma in Paediatric NursingAdmission/entry requirementsThe entry requirements to this qualification shall be:• Applicant must be in possession of a Bachelor Degree in Nursing (Level 7 or 8) or

a Diploma in Comprehensive Nursing and Midwifery Science (4 years) (Level 7.• Registered as a nurse and midwife with the Nursing Council of Namibia• Minimum of 2 years experience as a registered nurse and midwife• Recognition of prior learning (where applicable)

GR 4.3.4: Masters and Doctoral (PhD) programmesAdmission requirements for these programmes and related regulations are under each programme and under each set of programmes in the School of Postgraduate Studies section in this Prospectus.

GR 4.4: Stand Alone (Certificate and Diploma) ProgrammesThe normal entry requirement to Stand Alone (Certificate and Diploma) programmes shall be a Namibia Senior Secondary Certificate (Ordinary or Higher or a combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including English at Grade D) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 20 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale.

GR 4.5: Preparatory ProgrammeThe normal entry requirement to the university’s Preparatory programme shall be a Namibia Senior Secondary Certificate (Ordinary or Higher or a combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including English at Grade D) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 18 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale.

GR 4.6 : Special Regulation : BIS and Electronics ProgrammesGR 4.6.1: For Business Information Systems (BIS), Stand Alone, and Honours degree programmes, a D grade in Mathematics is required.GR 4.6.2: For the Electronics Honours degree programme, applicants must have a C grade in Mathematics and C grade in English. Admission is also subject to passing an aptitude test or an interview.

GR 4.7 : Use of Previous Programmes/Qualifications for Entry PurposesGR 4.7.1 : For it to be considered as a basis for entering the university to further undergraduate studies, any undergraduate programme of study or qualification gained

25

at the university or at another institution/university must have been gained in the previous three years.GR 4.7.2: Where there is evidence of practical experience directly linked to the past or proposed programme of study, older or previous studies can be considered for entry to the university.GR 4.8 : English in Practice Upgrade Course A (6 Months)GR 4.8.1 : Candidates who obtain a Grade E in English shall be admitted provisionally until they pass the university’s six-months Upgrade course in English in Practice.GR 4.8.2 : To pass this course, a candidate must obtain a mark of 50%.GR 4.8.3 : There shall be no supplementary examination for students who fail this course. Such students shall, however, have the opportunity to repeat the course once only.

GR 4.9 : English in Practice Upgrade Course B (One Year)GR 4.9.1 : Candidates who achieve good grades in the other NSSC subjects or equivalent and fail English shall be admitted provisionally until they pass the university’s two-semester/one year course in English in Practice Upgrade Course B.GR 4.9.2 : To pass this course, a candidate must obtain a mark of 50%.GR 4.9.3 : There shall be no supplementary examination for students who fail this course. Such students shall, however, have the opportunity to repeat the course once only.

GR 4.10 : Recognition of Prior Learning (RPL) The University will recognise prior formal learning or learning gained from work experience as representing part or the full equivalent of academic entry requirements to the University as follows:

GR 4.10.1 : Previous Formal Academic Study –formal learning, the results of which are evidenced by formal documentation from a recognised learning institution which was formally assessed and which may be registered under the NQF or its equivalent.

GR 4.10.1.1 : In the past five years the applicant must have completed the equivalent of full time study for one year (or its equivalent) and in doing that

Have completed and successfully gained a qualification at the same NQF level (or its equivalent) in a field related to the programme applied for

OR- Have successfully completed at least 70% of components of the last, full year of formal, full time study at the same NQF level or its equivalent in a field related to the programme applied for and where the applicant will no longer be pursing that qualificationOR- Is returning to study for the same qualification, at the same NQF level or equivalent as studies which were previously terminated, prior to completion of that year of study OR

26

- The value of formal prior learning can be approved by the University via an assessment process

GR 4.10.2. : Mature Age Entry (As stipulated in GR 4.1.1)GR 4.10.2.2: Except for persons who wish to apply for Diploma in Education (Pre and Junior Primary) and Education Honours programmes/qualifications (apart from B.Ed. – Educational Leadership, Management, and Policy) who will, in addition, be required to write a third paper titled Education Test, all candidates who meet the above conditions will be required to write a Mature Age entry examination in November in the following two papers :(a) English(b) NumeracyGR 4.10.2.3: No mature age applicant can be admitted to the university if he/she does not write and pass the Mature Age entry examination.

GR 4.10.3 : Previous Uncertified Study and Experience (recognition of learning from knowledge, skills, personal qualities acquired through life, work experience, studies which are not formally tested and other areas identified) which is not recognised by the results of formal academic study.

GR 4.10.3.1 : Assessment must be based upon acceptable documentary evidence of one or a combination of • Personal portfolios of experience, including evidence of employment and

responsibilities, references and/or records of non-academic study• Oral or written tests or examinations which are not linked to academic qualifications• Simulated practical demonstrations to enable assessment of skills• Interviews

GR 4.10.3.2 : The assessment must justify and provide evidence to confirm that the education, skills and experience gained result in the applicant being at an equal level to an applicant admitted based on specific minimum academic entry conditions set by the University. GR 4.10.4 : Formal or uncertified study or experience : the standard of which is confirmed by a formal assessment process carried out by the University when justified and subject to approval as decided by the University Senate.

27

ACADEMIC REGULATIONS (AR)

AR 1 : Class AttendanceAR 1.1: A student registered for a subject/course/module must attend all classes prescribed for that subject/course/module.AR 1.2: Students who enter or return to the university late shall not be entitled to special tuition.AR 1.3 : Students should attend at least 80% of the classes to qualify for examinations.AR 1.4 : Students who do not attend at least 80% of the classes shall be disqualified from writing examinations.AR 2: Duration of Various ProgrammesAny student beginning studies in the university in the first year of a programme must from the date of first registration complete(a) An integrated Bachelor Honours Degree: 4 years, but must be completed within 8 years of first registering for a stand- alone or bachelor honours degree programme. (b) A stand alone Bachelor Honours Degree: 1 year, but must be completed within 2 years of first registering for it.(c) Postgraduate Diploma: 1 year, but must be completed within 2 years of first registering for it.(d) A Bachelor Degree: 3 years, but must be completed within 6 years of first registering for a stand alone or bachelor degree programme. (e) A Certificate: 1 year, but must be completed within 2 years.(f) A Diploma: 2 years, but must be completed within 4 years. (g) A Master degree: 2 years, but must be completed within 4 years. (h) A Doctor of Philosophy degree: 3 years, but must be completed within 6 years.

AR 3: Annual RegistrationAR3.1: All students (Stand Alone, Undergraduate, Postgraduate) must register each year in January/February for semester 1 and in July for Semester 2.AR3.2: No research student, whether undergraduate or postgraduate, shall be supervised unless s/he is registered as stated in AR 3.1.AR 4: Provisional RegistrationAR 4.1: Provisional Registration shall apply to :(a) Non-Namibian students whose qualifications used to enter the university have not yet been evaluated by the Namibia Qualifications Authority (NQA).(b) Any continuing student who, by registration time, will not have known that he/she has passed 70% of the modules for their last year until after the announcement of supplementary examinations results.(c) Any student or applicant seeking exemptions but who does not yet have an exemptions letter.AR 4.2: Provisional registration shall remain valid until 30 April only.

28

AR 5: Registration – Students awaiting the results of Supplementary ExaminationsAR 5.1: Supplementary examinations students (awaiting results) who study year-long modules/courses must register to repeat the failed modules/courses, pay the relevant fees, attend classes, and submit CA work.AR 5.2: If they pass, they can drop the subjects being repeated and the payment(s) made for those modules/courses will reduce any outstanding balances.AR 5.3: If they fail, they must continue to repeat the modules/courses.AR 5.4: Students taking semester long modules/courses must register for the second semester modules/courses that they are to repeat in July.AR 5.5: Where a student will only know if he/she can progress after the results of the supplementary examinations, he/she can only be provisionally registered at the next level of study. If after the supplementary examinations the student has not passed enough modules/courses to progress, he/she must repeat the last year/level and complete the outstanding modules/courses for that year/level.

AR 6: Postponement/Cancellation of StudiesAR 6.1: Any student registered on a programme of study who postpones his/her studies must resume studies within three years of last registration. AR 6.2: Anyone resuming studies after a longer break than three years must have his/her application, including past marks, assessed by the Registrar’s Office before being registered.AR 6.3: Any student who does not notify the university in writing of the postponement or cancellation of his/her studies is liable to pay a re-registration fee if he/she returns to resume studies.AR 6.4 : Any student who wishes to cancel an individual module which they have registered to study must do so within 90 days of first registering for it. This will include any module registered for as an entry or progression requirement. The only exceptions will be where there has been an administrative error.

AR 7: PlagiarismAR 7.1 : Plagiarism is intellectual dishonesty or intellectual theft and is therefore criminal.AR 7.2 : Plagiarism is committed when a scholar or student appropriates or steals another person’s or student’s work, essay, assignment, or paper without permission or acknowledgement of the original source.AR 7.3 : Plagiarism is also committed when a student shares his/her work with a fellow student and knowingly allows a fellow student to submit such work as his/her own.In this case, both the student sharing his/her work and the student submitting the work as his/her own shall be guilty of plagiarism.AR 7.4 : Students at IUM sign an undertaking in an appropriate section of their Application Form/Contract that they will not engage in plagiarism.

29

AR 7.5: IUM considers plagiarism very seriously and students who plagiarise shall be disciplined in accordance with the university’s policy on plagiarism.

AR 8 : Progression from Year to YearAR 8.1 : Passing a course or module means obtaining a minimum final mark of 50% in a course or module.AR 8.2 : Normally, a student shall not proceed to a higher or subsequent year of study or level or course or module unless s/he has passed or has been exempted from the lower or previous year of study or course or module.AR 8.3 : A student must pass a minimum of 70% of the modules/courses of his/her last level of study before progressing to the next level.AR 8.4 : Students moving from a Bachelor (NQF level7) to a Bachelor Honours degree (NQF level 8) must have completed a Bachelor Degree NQF Level 7 in the same subject or an equivalent, evidenced by the degree certificate or a transcript confirming the degree awarded.

AR 9 Advanced Entry/ExemptionsAR 9.1 : Holders of academic qualifications or evidence of completed elements of formal academic studies obtained from other bona fide educational institutions may be granted exemptions on subjects sat for and passed.AR 9.2 : To qualify for exemptions, students shall complete IUM Exemption forms and submit their applications to the Office of the Registrar by the due date.AR 9.3 : The application for exemption must be supported by acceptable documentary evidence of the qualification(s) held or formal studies undertaken. Such evidence shall be in the form of certified copies of academic certificates and certified copies of academic transcripts showing qualifications held and grades obtained.Alternatively, as evidence of formal studies undertaken, certified academic records showing qualifications held, studies completed and grades or marks obtained shall be required.

AR 9.4 : Copies of the syllabi for the qualifications or subjects submitted as the basis for exemption and documentary evidence of their NQF level(s) involved or their equivalents shall also be required.AR 9.5 : The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within a period of five years.AR 9.6 : No exemption shall be obtained at Higher Diploma and at Degree final year levels.AR 9.7 : No exemption shall be granted for any subject previously failed.AR 9.8 : The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an NQA accredited institution or equivalent.AR 9.9 : Credits from other universities and/or institutions and IUM (when, for example, moving from one qualification to another) may be awarded up to fifty per cent of total credits for any qualification at IUM.

30

AR 9.10 : Subject to meeting all requirements, any student/applicant with an exemption letter can be fully registered. The letter must indicate subjects from which the student/applicant is exempted and does not thus have to study and must, in addition, show additional subjects that the student/applicant has to study.AR 9.11 : Any student/applicant seeking exemptions without an exemption letter must be provisionally registered and issued with a provisional registration letter only.AR 9.12 : Exemptions are awarded only at the time of application for a programme of study. They cannot be awarded retrospectively after joining the new programme of study.

AR 9.13 : Where the applicant has practical experience or has taken informal study, this can supplement prior academic achievements and may also be considered in assessment of the basis for exemption.

AR 9.14: Exemption from Internship For a student to be considered for exemption from Internship, he/she must meet the following minimum requirements:

a) Must have successfully completed an internship programme elsewhere; provided that i) the internship programme is relevant and related to the degree programme being pursuedii) the internship should have been undertaken within a period not exceeding 3 yearsiii)the applicant provides documentary evidence of the completed internship programme. Evidence must be in a form of a letter from the employer and written proof or evidence of the successful completion of the internship programmeOR

b) The applicant must be currently employed or recently have been employed; provided that he/she musti) be or has been employed in a position or performing duties relevant and related to the degree programme being pursuedii) provide a letter from the employer as proof of employment. This letter should state the period (i.e. dates) of employmentiii) have been employed for a period not less than 3 months at the time of seeking exemption

AR 10 : ASSESSMENT AR 10.1 : Evaluation/Assessment of candidates shall be based on Continuous Assessment (CA) and Formal Examinations (FE).AR 10.2 : For each module or course, there shall be three pieces of CA work during each semester.

31

AR 10.3 : Normally, CA work consists of either 2 Assignments and 1 Test or vice versa per semester.AR 10.4 : There shall be no changing or rounding up of CA marks.AR 10.5: A Continuous Assessment (CA) mark shall normally remain valid for one semester only.AR 10.6: Unless individual subject/discipline distinctions or requirements are approved by Senate, CA shall be 40% of the overall assessment of a course and FE shall account for 60% of the overall assessment of the course.AR 10.7 : Any student who does not furnish the relevant authority with sufficient proof for not completing required coursework (CA) by the stipulated date shall be awarded a zero for that piece of work.AR 10.8 : A student shall have a period of six months after a final mark is released to raise a query regarding that mark. After six months, no query or amendment to marks will be considered.

AR 10.9 : Students shall also be informed of these regulations by means of a Course Outline normally at the beginning of each course at the beginning of each semester.AR 10.10: Any academic queries or decisions concerning continuous assessment (CA) shall be referred to the Pro Vice-Chancellor : Academic & Research.AR 10.11: Any queries or decisions about the implementation of university policies and procedures involving continuous assessment (CA) work shall be referred to the Registrar.

AR 11 : MAKE-UP ASSIGNMENTS AND/OR TESTSAR 11.1 : To ensure sound academic standards, no make-up assignments and/or tests shall be administered.AR 11.2 : IUM considers the administration of make-up assignments and/or tests very seriously and anyone who contravenes this regulation shall be disciplined in accordance with the university’s policy on assignments and tests.

AR 12 : RESEARCH PROJECTSAR 12.1 : The submission of Research Projects is mandatory for all students in the 4th or final year of their undergraduate honours degree programmes.AR 12.2 : The management of Research Projects shall rest with the Dean of Faculty who shall be assisted in this regard by Heads of Department in his/her faculty.AR 12.3 : All Research Projects shall be supervised by academic staff in the programme in which the student is registered.AR 12.4 : Students shall not change supervisors in the course of the period in which they are registered for their programme.AR 12.5 : However, if obtaining conditions merit it, the change of supervisors shall be considered, provided students take up the matter with their Heads of Department and/or Deans, as the case may be.AR 13 : EXAMINATIONS AR 13.1 : There shall be Formal/Final Examinations (FE) at the end of each semester in

32

May and November each year.AR 13.2 : Examinations for the 6-month programmes in the Centre for the Improvement of Institutional Performance (CIIP) shall be held in May/ June and November each year.AR 13.3 : Examinations for the 12-month programmes in the Centre for the Improvement of Institutional Performance (CIIP) shall be held in November each year.AR 13.4 : Examinations for other courses/programmes offered by the Centre for Improved Institutional Performance (CIIP) shall be held as and when it is deemed fit to do so or as soon as the courses/programmes are completed.AR 13.5: A candidate may sit final examinations for a module/course for a maximum of two times. Second attempts must be completed within two years of first registering for that module/course.AR 13.6 : To pass a module, a candidate must obtain a composite mark of at least 50% in that module. This must include a minimum average continuous assessment mark of 50% and a minimum examination mark (subminimum) of 36% in that module.AR 13.7 : In addition, this must include a minimum continuous assessment mark of at least 50% and a minimum examination (subminimum ) of at least 36% in that module.

AR 14 : Practical Examinations in the Faculty of Information and Communication Technology (ICT)AR 14.1 : From the academic year 2019 until further notice, the ICT Faculty shall administer Practical Examinations.AR 14.2 : IUM assessments and examination regulations as stipulated in the Prospectus and other documents shall apply to all practical examinations in ICT.AR 14. 3 : Additional guidelines to practical examinations in ICT can be got from the Office of the Registrar or from the Office of the Dean : Faculty of ICT.

AR 15 : Eligibility for ExaminationsAR 15.1 : To be eligible to write examinations in a course or module, a candidate must obtain an average Continuous Assessment (CA) mark of at least 50% in that course or module.AR 15.2; A candidate who fails to achieve this mark shall repeat the course or module, shall meet the 80% class attendance requirement, and shall complete all required CA marks and requirements to pass a module.AR 15.3 : A candidate shall also be required to produce a university Clearance Card confirming that s/he has cleared all funds due to the university.AR 15.4 : A candidate shall be required to show a university examination admission slip confirming that s/he is academically eligible to sit the examination for which s/he is a candidate.

AR 16 : SUPPLEMENTARY EXAMINATIONSAR 16.1: For candidates who obtain a composite mark of 40 – 49%, a Supplementary Examination shall be administered.AR 16.2: Supplementary examinations shall normally be held within the first two weeks

33

prior to the beginning of each semester.AR 16.3:To pass a supplementary examination, a candidate must obtain a mark of at least 50% in the examination and a composite mark of 50%.AR 16.4: A candidate may sit supplementary examinations for a module/course for a maximum of two times. Second attempts must be completed within two years of first registering for that module/course.AR 16.5 : A candidate qualifying for a supplementary examination will be automatically registered to take this examination at the first opportunity after qualifying. If the candidate fails to take this first opportunity, the student will have failed the module and will have to repeat it.

AR 16.6 : SPECIAL EXAMINATIONS

AR 16.6.1 : Introduction The university will introduce special examinations for the first time in the academic year 2020.

AR 16.6.2 : Qualifying to write special examinationsa) Special examinations are strictly limited to final year students who have one subject only left from any year of study before they would graduate; provided that:i) they have attempted all available exams opportunitiesii) their previous exam results were not disqualified due to disciplinary issuesiii)they had qualified to write exams beforeb)Students found to violate the restriction stipulated in (a) would have their examination result disqualified. c) Passing the subject would then make the student eligible for graduation. d) Students seeking a special exam must complete a special exams application form and submit it to the Examinations Office. e) An applicant must pay the special examination fee as determined by the Financial Controller.f) Special exams shall only be administered once a year in July each year.

AR 16.6.3 : Passing a subject on Special Examination provisiona) To pass a special examination, a candidate must obtain a mark of at least 50% in the examination.b) All marks higher than 50% obtained in the special examination will be rounded down to 50%.c) CAs will not be considered for the special examination.d) A student who fails a special examination must repeat the subject.

AR 17 :POSTPONEMENT OF EXAMINATIONS

AR 17.1: A student may apply to postpone an examination in writing to the University’s Chief Examination Officer, along with evidence of unavoidable reasons outside his/her

34

control for missing the initial examination. Any student who misses the first opportunity to sit an examination will be automatically registered to sit the examination at the next opportunity immediately after it, subject to the approval of the Chief Examinations Officer.

AR 17.2 : Failure to request postponement of an examination and to sit it at next opportunity immediately after it shall mean that the module has been failed and must be repeated in full.

AR 18: CLASSIFICATION OF AWARDSAR 18.1 : Bachelor Honours degrees shall be classified as follows:

80 and above First Class Division 70 – 79 Upper Second Class Division 60 – 69 Lower Second Class Division 50 – 59 Pass

AR 18.2 : Bachelor degrees (without honours) shall be classified as Pass

AR 18.3 : Performance below 50% in Bachelor degree programmes shall be treated as follows: 40 – 49 Supplementary Fail 0 – 39 Fail

AR 18.4: All other undergraduate and postgraduate qualifications issued by the University shall not be classified and shall be only Pass or Fail.

AR 19 : DETERMINATION AND ANNOUNCEMENT OF RESULTSAR 19.1 : All results shall, on the recommendation of the relevant faculties, be determined by Senate and shall be announced by the Office of the Director: Examinations Management.

AR 20: POST - TRANSITION ARRANGEMENTS – 2020 GUIDELINES

AR 20.1 : In 2019, the university completed the 2-year Transitional Arrangements programme from the Old to the New Curriculum. No Further transitional opportunities shall be made in 2020 and beyond.

AR 20.2 : In 2020 and beyond, students with incomplete subjects in discontinued qualifications (Certificate, Higher Certificate, Higher Diploma or integrated Honours Degrees) will not have the opportunity to complete these outstanding subjects.

35

AR 20.3 Students with incomplete subjects in discontinued qualifications (Certificate, Higher Certificate, Higher Diploma or integrated Honours Degrees) must apply and register for new qualifications. Their applications will be assessed by the Recognition of Prior Learning committee to determine new subjects to complete, subjects to be exempted, and the year of study. Existing Exemption regulations shall apply.

Finance Regulations

FR 1 : Tuition Fees1.1 : All foreign students shall pay a 50% deposit of the total annual tuition fees upon registration.1.2 : Tuition fees paid instalmentally shall be paid on or before the 3rd of every month irrespective of the date of enrolment/commencement of classes.1.3 : There are two (2) semesters in an academic year. A semester’s tuition fees must be paid in eight (8) equal instalments beginning one month after enrolment/commencement of classes.1.4 : Students in arrears of up to one(1) month instalment will be suspended from classes until such fees owed have been paid in full.1.5 : Tuition fees shall be paid fully per course and not per duration of the course irrespective of the date of the start of classes.1.6 : No tuition fees shall be transferred from one student to another.1.7 : A penalty of 12.5% will be charged on late payments.1.8 : No transcripts shall be released to any student before clearing all outstanding fees.

FR 2 : Examination Fees2.1 : Where applicable, examination fees shall be paid separately from tuition fees.2.2 : In the case of external examinations administered by IUM, the following fees, determined from time to time, will be paid in advance :• fees payable to the examination body (if applicable)• invigilation • processing • postage/telephone/faxFR 3 : Other FeesThe following fees are payable separately from tuition fees : • registration• annual subscriptions• exemption

FR 4 : Refund Policy4.1 : The application/evaluation fee is not refundable.4.2 : A student may cancel enrolment within three (3) working days following enrolment and receive a refund of all transfer credit fees and all tuition fees for independent studies courses.

36

4.3 : Cancellation of studies is normally made by registered mail or by e-mail and the date of the postmark or e-mail will determine the effective date of cancellation.4:4 : Thereafter, the student may receive a 50% refund within thirty (30) days; 30% within sixty (60) days; and 10% within ninety (90) days of the cancellation of studies, provided that the programme/qualification registered for has not been completed. 4.5 : Refunds will normally be made within thirty (30) days of the receipt of the written request for cancellation.4.6 : Any disagreement in this regard may be filed with the Chairperson of the University’s Governing Council within thirty (30) days.

37

LIBRARY RULES AND REGULATIONS

For the library to provide the most conducive learning environment, the following rules and regulations shall apply:LR 1 : Silence must be observed in the library at all times.LR 2 : University identification cards must be shown at the entrance to the library. No person shall enter or leave the library except via authorized entrance and exit points.LR 3: Library users are expected to be responsible for their valuables. The library shall not be held liable for any loss. LR 4: Every student should use his/her own student card to borrow books and/or book a computer. Library computers must be used for academic purposes only. LR 5: Users are expected to check the condition of the book they intend to borrow to ensure that it is in a good condition before borrowing it. Only those books that are in good condition will be loaned out.LR 6: Stealing or attempting to steal library property is a punishable offence. LR 7: RestrictionsLR 7.1 : Phone calls shall not be made in the library and briefcases and bags shall not be allowed in the library. Mobile phones must be put on silent before entering the library and bags and briefcases must be left in the baggage area outside the library.LR 7.2: Music players shall not be allowed in the library.LR 7.3: Order and good conduct must be observed in the library. Placing feet on desks/chairs and sleeping in the library shall not be allowed.LR 7.4: Eating and drinking in the library is forbidden. No food or drink should be brought into the library. LR 7.5: Reserving sitting space or leaving personal books/ files on tables for long shall not allowed.LR 7.6: Writing, marking, defacing or damaging library materials/facilities is prohibited. Users who engage in any of these activities shall replace the damaged library property. LR 7.7 : Library books used in the library must be left on the tables and not re-shelved by users. LR 7.8: Littering the library is prohibited. Use the provided bins to dispose litter.LR 8 : Any user who wilfully damages library property will face disciplinary action by the University disciplinary committee.LR 9 : Overdue books, use of mobiles (LR 7. & LR 7.2), and indiscipline shall attract a fine. LR 10 : The Librarian has the discretion to suspend any student who accumulates overdue fines /loans until all payments have been settled in full.LR 11: Clearance: All students must clear with the library upon completion of their courses or when required by the university to do so.LR 11: Observance of official public holidays : All IUM libraries shall be closed on Sundays and Public Holidays.

38Operating Hours

Semester opening hoursLibrary Mon-Thur Fridays SaturdayDorado 08:00-21:30 08:00 – 21:30 09:00 – 16:00Windhoek City

08:00 – 19:00 08:00 – 17:00 09:00 – 16:00

Ongwediva

08:00 – 19:00 08:00- 17:00 09:00 – 16:00

Coastal 08:00 – 19:00 08:00 – 17:00 09:00 – 16:00Nkurenkuru

08:00 – 17:00 08:00 – 17:00 CLOSED

Recess hoursAll libraries

08:00 –17:00 (closed between 13:00 – 14:00)

CLOSED

ALL LIBRARIES ARE CLOSED ON SUNDAYS AND PUBLIC HOLIDAYS

39

FACULTY OF BUSINESS ADMINISTRATION

40

Certificate in Business Administration (NQF Level 5)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 30 -Level 5 credits: 90 -Minimum total credits required: 120 -

RationaleNamibia’s Fifth National Development Plan (NDP 5) underlines that there is need to achieve industrial development through Local Procurement. This will result in Namibia moving from a reactive, input-based economy to a proactive, high performing econo-my. The survival of such infant enterprises needs highly skilled entrepreneurs, hence the demand for qualified business administrators who have fundamental understand-ing of business concepts and practices and who can initiate and improve the efficiency and effectiveness of business enterprise.

PurposeThe certificate in business administration is designed to provide students with the skills and attitudes needed to start conceptualising ideas that contribute to existing organi-zations and which will enhance the pursuit of their own ventures. Students will gain an effective working knowledge of the analytical tools and management concepts used in modern business and a firm grounding in the practical management skills required in contemporary business activities.

Who is this Qualification for? This qualification is designed for students willing to take up business administration and management assignments in private and public organisations. It is structured to stretch and challenge the students to fulfil their true potential and to become defining players in the management field. This programme targets those individuals willing to be transformed into professional business administrators.

Admission /Entry RequirementsThe entry requirements to this qualification are:. Grade 12 or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including English minimum D) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 20 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale. . A recognised qualification at NQF level 4 Or. Mature Age Entry as stipulated in GR 4.1.1

41

Qualification DurationThe Certificate is conferred after one year of full-time or part-time study in one or more areas of business concentrations. The year of study will be divided into two semesters and students are expected to take six courses in each semester. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: •Explainhowdecisionmakingandthemanagementoforganisationsisaidedbyknowl-edge of theory and practice in four business sub-disciplines•Analyseorganisationsandapplycontemporarymanagementpracticescompatiblewithorganisational sustainability•Present theoretical concepts and complex ideas in bothwritten and verbal formatsappropriate for management audiences

Articulation Vertically, the Certificate in Business Administration grants admission to a Diploma in Business Administration. Interfaculty students can be considered for admission to any Diploma programme. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related business and management qualifications.

Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit trans-fer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses.The awarded credits are governed by the IUM Certificate programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the courses were equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the mate-rial is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equiv-alent to courses offered in Certificate qualification.Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits re-quired for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.

42

The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.The IUM reserves the right to disallow transfer credit for courses if the student’s subse-quent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examina-tions. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final Examinations The final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. Examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally.

Supplementary Examinations A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a sup-plementary examination. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits.

Award of the qualification Candidates will be eligible to be awarded the Certificate in Business Administration when they pass all the required courses as specified in the relevant qualification reg-ulations and when they fulfil any other additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

Teaching Methods/ Strategy Lectures, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, practical projects, tests and written assignments.

43

SEMESTER 1 (50 credits)

Course Title

Course Code Hours NQF Level Credits

Compulsory CoursesMicroeconomics MIE50US 100 5 10Mathematics MTH51US 100 5 10Applied English Language Skills AEL40US 100 4 10Introduction to Entrepreneurship IEN40US 100 4 10Principles of Marketing PMK50US 100 5 10


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesPrinciples of Management POM50US 100 5 10Basic IT Skills BIT41US 100 4 10Quantitative Methods 1 QM151US 100 5 10Management Organization MOR51US 100 5 10Business Ethics BNE50US 100 5 10Financial Accounting 1 FAC51US 100 5 10Human Capital Management HCD50US 100 5 10

44

Certificate in Finance Management (NQF Level 5)


RationaleThis qualification was designed in response to the national need for professional financial practitioners in the Human Resource Strategic Plan 2010 - 2025 (which highlights critical skills shortage.)

PurposeThe purpose of certificate in finance management qualification is to provide students with an academic and professional experience in general administration and finance to enhance competency and skills. This provides the entry level to career opportunities in accounting and finance. The qualification will greatly contribute to the finance and general sectors of the economy.

Admission RequirementsStudents will be admitted to this qualification if they hold a Namibian Secondary School Certificate (NSSCO/H) with a minimum of 20 points and passed five subjects with a minimum of D in English. Students may also enter through Mature Age Entry as stipulated in GR 4.1.1 Or Prior Learning.

Qualification DurationMinimum: 1 YearMaximum: 2 Years

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:•Explainthedifferentbranchesofaccountingandrecordingprocess•Describethecommunicationprocessinanorganisation•Recalltheinformationtechnologyapplicationsusedinbusiness•Calculateandusebasicmathematicalmodelstosolvebusinessquestions•Applymathematicsinbusinessandfinancetransactions•Preparemanagementreportandstatements,includingtrialbalance,bankreconciliation,VAT returns and other statutory financial remittances

ArticulationHolders of certificate in Finance Management (Level 5) will be able to articulate to IUM’s

45

Diploma in Finance Management or any other qualification at Level 6.

Credit TransferHolders of academic qualifications obtained from other bona fide educational institutions may be granted exemptions on the subjects sat for and passed. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within a period of five years. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an NQA accredited institution or equivalent. Credits from other universities and/or institutions may be awarded up to 50% of total credits for the qualification at IUM.

AssessmentBoth Formative and Summative assessment techniques are used. The assessment system comprises two components:•ContinuousAssessment(CA)40%ofthefinalgrade.•FormalExams(FE)60%offinalmark.

Teaching Methods/StrategiesA wide range of teaching methods will be employed by lecturers from traditional lectures through to small decision-making groups, as well as the use of training films and videos and advanced business simulations. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the subjects. Each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning.

YEAR 1 (100 credits)


Course Title


Applied English Language Skills AEL40US 100 4 10Mathematics MTH51US 100 4 10Microeconomics MIE50US 100 5 10Principles of Marketing PMK50US 100 5 10

46


Course Title


Financial Accounting I FAC51US 100 5 10Cost Accounting CAC50US 100 5 10Basic IT skills BIT41US 100 4 10Quantitative Methods I QM151US 100 5 10Human Capital Management HCD50US 100 5 10Introduction to Entrepreneurship IEN40US 100 4 10

Diploma in Business Administration (NQF Level 6)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 5 credits: 30 -Level 6 credits: 160 -Level 7 credits: 10 -Minimum total credits required: 200 -

RationaleReducing poverty and inequalities is always the Namibian government’s priority as summarized in the comprehensive Cabinet approved Vision 2030 and Harambee Prosperity Plan. One of the key outcomes for the successful implementation of Vision 2030 includes, a spirit of entrepreneurship resulting in increased youth enterprise development. The survival of such infant enterprises needs highly skilled entrepreneurs, hence the demand for qualified business administrators who have fundamental understanding of business concepts and practices and who can initiate, improve efficiency and effectiveness of business enterprise.

PurposeThe purpose of the Diploma in Business Administration is to enable students to gain a clear understanding of various business disciplines (Accounting, Finance, Marketing, Human Resource Management and Management Science). The students studying the International University of Management Diploma in Business Administration are expected to acquire the critical entrepreneurial, leadership, team, and communications skills and explore their ability to work with and through other people.

47

Who is this Qualification for? This qualification is designed for students willing to take up business administration and management assignments in both private and public organisations. It is structured to stretch and challenge the students to fulfill their true potential and to become defining players in the management field. The qualification targets those individuals willing to be transformed into professional business administrators. Furthermore, a key concern of the qualification is to impart contemporary management skills required for successful business.

Admission /Entry RequirementsThe entry requirements to this qualification are:•ACertificateofAdministrationinBusinessAdministration•ArecognisedqualificationatNQFlevel5orequivalent•MatureAgeEntryasstipulatedinGR4.1.1

Meeting these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the qualification. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate.

Qualification DurationThe Diploma is conferred after two years of full-time or part-time study in one or more areas of business concentrations. Each year of study will be divided into two semesters and students are expected to take five courses in each semester. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the QualificationThis qualification is able to: •Equipgraduateswithpropermanagerial skills for effectivemanagementof variousorganizations.• Enable graduates to effectively manage resources at their disposal according tocontemporary economic business management and technological trends.•Enablegraduatestocarryoutresearchwithaviewtofindsolutionstocontemporaryproblems affecting business management.•Equipstudentswithskillsforcareersinthepublicandprivatesector.•Preparestudentsforfurtherstudiesinthebusinessfield.

Articulation Vertically, the Diploma in Business Administration grants admission to a degree in Business Administration. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any degree. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related business and management qualifications.

48

Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.To be awarded these credits, IUM will assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses.The awarded credits are governed by the IUM Diploma programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the courses were equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibian Qualification Authority requirements.Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credits earned are equivalent to courses offered in the Diploma qualification.Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final Examinations The final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. Examiners may, in addition to written examinations, test any candidate orally.

49

Supplementary Examinations A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits. Awarding of the qualification Candidates will be eligible to be awarded the Diploma in Business Administration when they have passed all the required courses as specified in the relevant qualification regulations and have fulfilled any other additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

Teaching Methods/ Strategies The teaching and learning processes will take place through face to face, lecturing, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, practical projects, tests and written assignments.



Course Title


Intermediate Entrepreneurship And Innovation

IEI60US 100 6 10

Financial Accounting II FA260US 100 6 10Marketing Management MMA51US 100 6 10Organizational Behaviour OBE61US 100 6 10Macroeconomics MRC60US 100 6 10Total Credits 50

50

SEMESTER 2 (50 credits)Course Title


Quantitative Methods II QM261US 100 6 10Management Accounting MAC61US 100 6 10Operations Management OPM60US 100 6 10Business Law BLA61US 100 6 10Professional Communication PRC60US 100 6 10Total Credits 50



Course Title Compulsory Courses


Change Management CHM60US 100 6 10Management Control System MCS60US 100 6 10Critical Thinking Skills CTS51US 100 5 10Services Marketing SVM70US 100 7 10Total Credits 40




Project Management PRM61US 100 6 10Product Management PMA60US 100 6 10Communication Skills GCS41US 100 5 10Cost Accounting CAC50US 100 6 10Human Asset Management HAM60US 100 6 10Management Information System MIS60US 100 6 10Total Credits 60

51

Diploma in Finance Management (NQF Level 6)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 20 -Level 6 credits: 150 20Minimum total credits required: 170 10

RationaleThis qualification was designed to bridge aspiring finance personnel intending to articulate with other accounting and finance professional qualifications in response to the national need for professional financial practitioners in line with the Human Resource Strategic Plan 2025.The plan highlights the critical skills shortage of qualified accountants and Chartered Accountants due to the number of emerging Small Medium Enterprises (SMEs) businesses.

PurposeThe primary purpose of the Diploma in Finance Management Level 6 qualification is to develop knowledge and skills in administration and finance management. It provides in-depth knowledge and practical approach for aspiring finance technicians.

ArticulationHolders of other qualifications can also register for this qualification. The qualification leads to a degree and any other higher degree qualifications in Finance.

Admission RequirementsAdmission to this qualification is restricted to IUM certificate in Finance management NQF level 5 holder and/or any equivalent qualifications from other accredited institutions.

Qualification Duration

•Minimum:2Years.•Maximum:4Years.

Outcomes of the QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:•Analysesystemsinbusinessorganisationsandmakenecessaryimprovementstomeetthe desired outputs•Compareandcontrastcostingmethodsandinvestmentappraisaltechniques•Demonstratecritical thinkingskills inthecontextoffinance,businessanddecisionmaking.•Calculateandformulatemathematicalmodelstosolvebusinessproblemsandfinancialmodels

52

• Describe and communicate various business reports including financial and nonfinancial reports •Preparebooksofaccountsuptotrialbalanceandkeyfinancialreports•Discusscommunicationprocessinbusiness

Credit transferHolders of academic qualifications obtained from other bona fide educational institutions may be granted exemptions on the subjects sat for and passed. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within a period of five years. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an NQA accredited institution or equivalent. Credits from other universities and/or institutions may be awarded up to 50% of total credits for the qualification at IUM.


Teaching methods/strategiesA wide range of teaching methods will be employed by lecturers from traditional lectures through to small decision-making groups, as well as the use of training films and videos and advanced business simulations. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the subjects. Each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process. Programmed reading and reading guides will support these endeavours.

53



Course Title


Business Accounting BAC60US 100 6 10Principles of Management POM60US 100 5 10Macroeconomics MRC60US 100 6 10Organisational Behaviour OBE61US 100 6 10


Course Title


Financial Reporting FNR60US 100 6 10Communication Skills GCS41US 100 4 10Finance Management FMA70US 100 6 10Quantitative Methods II QM261US 100 6 10Business law BLA61US 100 6 10Project Management PRM61US 100 6 10

YEAR 2 (80 credits)


Course Title


Performance Management PFM60US 100 6 10Financial Accounting II FA260US 100 6 10Marketing Management MMA51US 100 6 10Intermediate entrepreneurship and innovation

IEI60US 100 6 10

54


Course Title


Management Accounting MAC61US 100 6 10Professional communication PRC60US 100 6 10Operations Management OPM60US 100 6 10Management Information System MIS60US 100 6 10

55

Postgraduate Diploma in Finance Management (NQF Level 8)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 7 credits: 100 40Minimum total credits required: 100 20

RationaleThis qualification was designed in response to the national need for professional financial practitioners in the Human Resource Strategic Plan 2025 which highlights the critical skills shortage of qualified Accountants and Chartered Accountants due to emerging Small Medium Enterprises (SMEs) businesses. Holders of other qualifications can also register for this qualification. The course contains a range of new courses which are requisite for accounting and finance students. Courses include Auditing, Taxation, Project Management and Contemporary Finance Management. These courses lay a foundation for further studies at Masters degree level

PurposeThe purpose of the qualification is to develop knowledge and skills in accounting and finance. Successful completion of this qualification will equip students with requisite tools and expertise to meet the ever-growing demand for quality financial services, as well as cope with the dynamic business environment. The graduates will possess both academic and soft skills that will enable them to contribute immensely to the economy of Namibia.

Admission RequirementsAdmission to this qualification is restricted to categories 1 and 2 criteria for the Post Graduate Diploma in Finance Management (PGDFM).

Category 1: IUM applicantsMust have completed higher diploma plus two years relevant work experience and/or bachelor honours degree in Finance Management and Business Administration.

Category 2: Non IUM applicantsRelevant undergraduate degree and/or equivalent at NQF level 7 or 8 and/or determined by the IUM Senate.

Target GroupsThis qualification targets students who want to become:•FinanceManagers,OfficersandChiefFinancialOfficers,•Financialanalysts,controllersand/ordirectors•FinancialAdvisors,

56

•CharteredAccountants,•Financeeducators.

Qualification Duration•Minimum:1Year.•Maximum:2Years. Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: •Prepareandanalysefinancialstatementsandreports• Develop turnaround financial strategies, sound financial models and sustainableprojects• Demonstrate and apply skills and knowledge acquired to advise organisations intaxation, internal control, and project execution matters•PrepareBoardpapersandstrategicbusinessplans

ArticulationHolders of Bachelor in Finance Management will be able to articulate to Master in Finance Management or any other qualification at level 9.



Teaching methods/strategiesA wide range of teaching methods will be employed by lecturers from traditional lectures through to small decision-making groups, as well as the use of training films and videos and advanced business simulations. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the subjects. Each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning.

57



Course Title


Auditing and Assurance I AA180PS 100 8 10Taxation and Tax Planning I TT180PS 100 8 10Contemporary Finance Management I

FM180PS 100 8 10

Financial Reporting FRP80PS 100 8 10Electives Courses (Choose 1)Corporate Governance I CG180PS 100 8 10Strategic Project Management I PM180PS 100 8 10Total Credits 60


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesAuditing and Assurance II AA280PS 100 8 10Taxation and Tax Planning II TT280PS 100 8 10Contemporary Finance Management II

FM280PS 100 8 10

Research Methodology and Project RMP80PS 300 8 30Electives Courses (Choose 1)Corporate Governance I I CG280PS 100 8 10Strategic Project Management I I PM280PS 100 8 10Total Credits 80Total Year 1 Hours & Credits 1200 120

58

Bachelor of Business Administration (NQF Level 7)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 30Level 5 credits: 100Level 6 credits: 120Level 7 credits: 100 20Minimum total credits required: 360 10

RationaleReducing poverty and inequalities is the Namibian government’s priority as summarized in the comprehensive Cabinet approved Vision 2030 and Harambee Prosperity Plan. The survival of such infant enterprises needs highly skilled entrepreneurs, hence the demand for qualified business administrators who have fundamental understanding of business concepts and practices and who can initiate, improve efficiency and effectiveness of business enterprise.

PurposeThe Bachelor Degree in Business Administration is designed to make a positive and practical contribution to the industry and commerce in Namibia and beyond as it equips students with an understanding of the business and management environments. The students studying at the International University of Management Degree in Business Administration are expected to acquire the critical entrepreneurial, leadership, team, and communications skills and explore their ability to work with and through other people. Admission /Entry Requirements One has to satisfy the minimum admission requirements for entry to degree studies at this University as prescribed under the entry requirements in the IUM General Academic Regulations.1) Grade 12 or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including English with minimum of a D normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale. 2) A recognised qualification at NQF level 6 or equivalent3) Mature Age Entry as stipulated in GR 4.1.1

Meeting these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate.

Qualification DurationThe Bachelor Degree in Business Administration is conferred after three years of full-

59

time or part-time study in one or more areas of business concentrations. Each year of study will be divided into two semesters and students are expected to take six courses in each semester. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: •Demonstrateacriticalawarenessandunderstandingofthemainfunctionalareasofbusiness administration and the management process within a variety of institutional and organisational contexts •Demonstrate competence at applyingprinciples, practices andmethodsofmodernmanagement in business enterprises. • Analyse and evaluate management/marketing/human resources/banking/financescenarios and develop meaningful suggestions and advice to strategic management.• Organise and co-ordinate resources and opportunities by applying the relevanttheoretical aspects and reflect on their application.

Articulation Vertically, the Degree in Business Administration grants admission to the Bachelor Honours Degree in Business Administration. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Honours Degree qualification. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related business and management qualifications.

Who is this Qualification for? This qualification is designed for students willing to take up business administration and management assignments in both private and public organisations. It is structured to stretch and challenge the students to fulfill their true potential and to become defining players in the management field. This qualification targets those individuals willing to be transformed into professional business administrators. Furthermore, a key concern of the qualification is to impart contemporary management skills required for successful business.

Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses.The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of

60

higher learning; the courses were equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in a degree qualification.Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.



Supplementary Examinations A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits.

Awarding of the Qualification Candidates will be eligible to be awarded the Bachelor Degree in Business Administration when they have passed all the required courses and have fulfilled any other additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

61

Teaching Methods/Strategy The teaching and learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, practical projects, tests and written assignments.



Course Title


Applied English Language Skills AEL40US 100 4 10Mathematics MTH51US 100 5 10Introduction to Entrepreneurship IEN40US 100 4 10Microeconomics MIE50US 100 5 10Principles of Management POM50US 100 5 10Total Credits 60




Communication Skills GCS41US 100 5 10Basic IT Skills BIT41US 100 4 10Cost Accounting CAC50US 100 5 10Quantitative Methods 1 QM151US 100 5 10Financial Accounting 1 FAC51US 100 5 10Human Capital Management HCD50US 100 5 10Principles of Marketing PMK50US 100 5 10Total Credits 70Total Year 1 Hours & Credits 1200 120

62





Intermediate Entrepreneurship and Innovation

IEI60US 100 6 10

Organizational Behavior OBE61US 100 6 10Critical Thinking Skills CTS51US 100 5 10Marketing Management MMA51US 100 6 10Macroeconomics MRC60US 100 6 10Financial Accounting II FA260US 100 6 10Total Credits 60


Course Title


Quantitative Methods II QM261US 100 6 10Professional Communication PRC60US 100 6 10Operations Management OPM60US 100 6 10Management Accounting MAC61US 100 6 10Management Information Systems MIS61US 100 6 10Business Law BLA61US 100 6 10Total Credits 60Total Year 2 Hours & Credits 1200 120

63





Strategic Human Resource SHU70US 100 7 10Corporate Finance CFN71US 100 7 10Strategic Management SMN70US 100 7 10Total Quality Management TQM70US 100 7 10Managerial Economics MAE70US 100 7 10Research Methodology RME71US 100 7 10Total Credits 60


Course Title


Business Logistics & Supplies Chain Management

BLS70US 100 7 10

Business Leadership Dynamics BLD70US 100 7 10International Business Management IBM70US 100 7 10Internship / Case Analysis INC70US 100 7 10Financial Management FMA70US 100 6 10

Electives Courses (Choose 1)Labour and International Relations LIR71US 100 7 10Strategic Entrepreneurship SEN70US 100 7 10Total Year 3 Hours & Credits 1200 120Total Hours & Credits 370

64

Bachelor of Finance Management (NQF Level 7)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 40 -Level 5 credits: 80 -Level 6 credits: 110 20Level 7 credits: 110 40Minimum total credits required: 330 40

RationaleThis qualification was designed in response to the national need for professional financial practitioners in Human Resource Strategic Plan 2025 which highlights the critical skills shortage of qualified Accountants and Chartered Accountants due to emerging Small Medium Enterprises (SMEs) businesses. Holders of other qualifications can also register for this qualification.

PurposeThe primary purpose of the built on Bachelor of Finance Management honours qualification is to develop knowledge and skills and provide a technically focused education in finance management that inculcates graduates with requisite knowledge, a-practical hands on approach, competency and proficiency that will contribute immensely to the economy of Namibia.

Admission RequirementsTo be registered for this qualification, candidates must at least have 25 points in five subjects; attained at grade 12 or equivalent.D in English is required and other conditions may apply. Admission can also be gained through Mature Age Entry as stipulated in GR 4.1.1

Qualification Duration•Minimum:3Years•Maximum:4Years

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:•Explain and apply the theory andpractice of financemanagement in theworld ofbusiness.•ApplyknowledgerelevanttotheAccountingandfinanceprofessiontoaddressbusinesstransactions and financial strategies.•Prepare and analysefinancial statements of businesses, non-profit and governmententities, including small medium enterprises.

65

• Demonstrate good understanding of current trends in accounting and financemanagement, information systems and development, auditing, taxation and financial strategies.•Developandapplyskillsandknowledgeacquiredtoaddressfinancing,investmentanddividend decisions.

ArticulationHolders of Bachelor in Finance Management will be able to articulate to Bachelor in Finance Management honours qualification.



Teaching methods/strategiesA wide range of teaching methods will be employed by lecturers from traditional lectures through to small decision-making groups, as well as the use of training films and videos and advanced business simulations. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the subjects. Each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. Programmed reading and reading guides will support these endeavours.



Course Title


Applied English Language Skills AEL40US 100 4 10

66

Mathematics MTH51US 100 4 10Microeconomics MIE50US 100 5 10Principles of Marketing PMK50US 100 5 10Introduction to entrepreneurship IEN40US 100 4 10


Course Title


Financial Accounting I FAC51US 100 5 10Basic IT skills BIT41US 100 4 10Cost Accounting CAC50US 100 5 10Quantitative Methods 1 QM151US 100 5 10Principles of Management POM50US 100 5 10Human Capital Management HCD50US 100 5 10Communication Skills GCS41US 100 5 10

67



Course Title


Performance Management PFM60US 100 6 10Financial Accounting II FA260US 100 6 10Macroeconomics MRC60US 100 6 10Organisation Behaviour OBE61US 100 6 10Marketing Management MMA51US 100 6 10Intermediate entrepreneurship and innovation

IEI60US 100 6 10


Course Title


Business Law BLA61US 100 6 10Professional Communication PRC60US 100 6 10Management Accounting MAC61US 100 6 10Quantitative Methods II QM261US 100 6 10Finance Management FMA70US 100 6 10Operations Management OPM60US 100 6 10

68



Course Title


Strategic entrepreneurship SEN70US 100 7 10Corporate Finance CFN71US 100 7 10Auditing I AU170US 100 7 10Taxation I TX170US 100 7 10Research Methodology RME71US 100 7 10Internship IN170US 100 7 10

Electives Courses (Choose one)Strategic Human Resources SHU70US 100 7 10Managerial Economics MAE70US 100 7 10


Course Title


Auditing II AU270US 100 7 10Taxation II TX270US 100 7 10Business Logistics & Supplies Chain Management

BLS70US 100 7 10

Electives Courses (Choose one)Strategic Management SMN70US 100 7 10Sales Management SMA60US 100 7 10Management Information Systems MIS60US 100 6 10

69

Bachelor of Economics (NQF Level 7)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 30 -Level 5 credits: 50 -Level 6 credits: 130 -Level 7 credits: 150 20Minimum total credits required: 360 10

RationaleThe International University of Management (IUM)’s faculty of Business Administration has in response to the National Human Resources Plan (2010 – 2025) designed this qualification in order to contribute towards the development of qualified and skilled workers “- building blocks towards a knowledge-based economy and Vision 2030”.

Purpose The Bachelor of Economics is designed to educate students about how the government, businesses, households, and individuals allocate their scarce resources among competing ends, develop conceptual models of behaviour to predict responses to changes in policy and market conditions as well as the use of statistics to investigate these changes. The study of economics also provides valuable knowledge for making decisions in everyday life. It stresses analytical and quantitative skills, clear and logical thinking necessary for today’s workplace. Employers seek to employ students with skills in the financial and economic sectors. This qualification therefore lays a foundation for higher qualifications in business and finance. The overall purpose of this qualification is to ensure graduates are equipped with numerical and analytical, computer and problem solving skills to enable them function effectively in all related sectors - investment to banking, finance, research, teaching or the public sector.

Who is this qualification for?This qualification is intended for students willing to take up work in research firms and government think tanks where they study and analyse a variety of economic issues both in the government and private sectors. It is structured to stretch and challenge the students to fulfil their potentials and become defining players as economic analysts. This qualification targets individuals willing to be transformed into economic analysts and decision makers as well as to impart statistical and mathematical skills of data collection, interpretation and prediction – skills much needed in today’s world of business.

Admission / Entry RequirementsThe entry requirements to this qualification shall be a Namibian Senior Secondary Certificate (Ordinary or Higher or combination of both) or equivalent qualification (s) provided that:

70

i. The candidate has passed five subjects (including a C in Mathematics and D in English) normally in not more than three examinations with a minimum of 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale. ii. Applicants with less than a “C” in Mathematics at the Ordinary level but obtained a minimum of 26 points would be considered for admission subject to availability.iii. A recognised qualification at NQF level or equivalent

Qualification DurationThe study period for the qualification is three years full-time or part time study. The study period comprises of two (2) semesters per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester two (2) runs from July to December.

Outcomes for the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:• Identify and apply the micro model of market demand and supply to predict changes

in price and output.• Explain and analyse fundamental concepts and applications in international trade,

international finance, economic development, public finance, monetary economics, and mathematical economics.

• Identify and apply the macroeconomic models to explain the changes in output, employment, inflation, and growth.

• Describe and analyse the function of key economic institutions.• Analyse price indices, employment and unemployment. GDP and human

development statistics; organize and manipulate the data in spread sheets and statistical programmes and interpret statistical results.

• Apply the use of empirical evidence to evaluate the validity of an economic argument, use statistical methodology, interpret statistical results and conduct appropriate statistical analysis of data.

Credit SystemsReference is made to the internationally acceptable formula: one (1) credit equates ten (10) notional hours (learning).The general guideline for teaching and learning time per course is based on the 10 hours per credit approach.

Articulation PossibilitiesVertically, the Bachelor of Economics grants admission to the Bachelor of Economics Honours. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any related qualification. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related business and management qualifications.

Credit transferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces

71

the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibian Qualification Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.

The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to disallow transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

Assessment a) Course work/Continuous assessmentContinuous assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities such as tests, assignments, research and presentations (group and/or individual) undertaken by the student during the study period.Students must score at least 50% in each course/course work to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.b) Final ExaminationsThe final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. Examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally. In order to pass the final examination, a student must obtain at least 37%, which is a sub-minimum.

c) Supplementary ExaminationsA student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination.

72A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 70% of the courses or credits.A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project within three months after the publication of results.d) Awarding of the QualificationCandidates will be eligible to receive the award of Bachelor of Economics when they have passed all the required courses specified in these qualification regulations and have fulfilled any other requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

Teaching Methods and StrategyCourse delivery will be carried out through a number of methods including lectures, tutorials, practical projects, case studies, tests, assignments as well as presentations. Students must have access to a computer for the Statistical courses. The teaching methods adopted for this qualification would be facilitated by the use of technology (statistical software packages) in order to ensure that students are informed about global trends. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for the student to research and apply theory to real economic situations. Recommended reading materials will support this process.

Quality AssuranceCommitment is made to ensure that the course remains relevant, current and provides students with a high quality teaching and learning experience. Earnest effort is made to ensure that meeting the course quality assurance requirements is a continuous process through incorporating regular monitoring, review, benchmarking, and improvement. An external evaluator will periodically evaluate the qualification in terms of course content, teaching methods, course requirements, and assessments. Quality shall also be assured through:• Accreditation and registration on the National Qualifications Framework (NQF) by

the Namibia qualifications Authority (NQA).• Engagement with relevant stakeholder stakeholders from the industry.• Benchmarking and regular review of policies, curricula, delivery strategies and

assessments.• Regular monitoring of lecture activities and staff development.• Students will be asked to complete evaluation sheets for each course studied.• A dual performance evaluation system where lecturers and students appraise each

other.• Moderation (both internal and external) of continuous assessments and final

examinations.Qualification StructureThe IUM Bachelor of Economics is structured as follows:

73



Course Title

Course Code Hours NQF Level

Credits

Principles of Micro Economics PMR50US 100 5 10Mathematics for Economists I MO150US 100 5 10Applied English Language Skills AEL40US 100 4 10Financial Accounting I FAC51US 100 5 10Introduction to Entrepreneurship IEN40US 100 4 10Total Credits 50


Course Title


Principles of Macro Economics PME50US 100 5 30Basic IT Skills BIT41US 100 4 10Mathematics for Economists II MO260US 100 6 10Principles of Marketing PMK50US 100 5 10Professional Communication PRC60US 100 6 10Total Credits 40Total Year 1 Credits 100

74



Course Title


Credits

Intermediate Microeconomics 100 6 10Statistics for Economists I 100 6 10Money and Banking 100 6 10Investment and Portfolio Analysis 100 6 10Financial Accounting II FA260US 100 6 10Intermediate Entrepreneurship and Innovation

IEI60US 100 6 10

Total Credits 60


Course Title


Intermediate Macroeconomics 100 6 10Namibian Economy and Regional Integration

100 6 10

Statistics for Economists II 100 7 10Financial Economics 100 6 10Total Credits 40Total Year 1 Credits 100

75



Course Title


Credits

Microeconomic Analysis 100 7 10Development Economics 100 7 10Econometrics I 200 6 20International Trade and Policy 100 7 10Research Methodology RME71US 100 7 20Strategic Entrepreneurship SEN70US 100 7 10Total 80


Course Title


Macroeconomic Analysis 100 7 10Monetary Economics 100 7 10Public Finance 100 7 10Internship 200 7 10Econometrics II 200 7 20Regional and International Trade Finance

100 7 20

Elective Courses (Choose 1) 10Managerial Economics 100 7 10Agricultural Economics 100 7 10Total Year 1 Credits 160

76

Bachelor of Business Administration Honours (NQF Level 8)


RationaleReducing poverty and inequalities is the Namibian government’s priority as summarized in the comprehensive Cabinet approved Vision 2030 and Harambee Prosperity Plan (2016/17 – 2019/20). One of the key outcomes for the successful implementation of Vision 2030 includes a spirit of entrepreneurship resulting in increased youth enterprise development.

PurposeThe Bachelor Honours Degree in Business Administration is a one-year qualification designed to equip students with knowledge, skills and competencies needed to manage and supervise businesses industries and organisation in Namibia and beyond. The aim of this qualification is to train and equip graduates with management, supervisory and leadership skills on how to manage small and large enterprises. It is intended for students who graduate with a first degree (under graduate degree) and intend to further their knowledge and studies in the field of Business Administration as well as people in employment who aspire to increase their relevance and marketability in areas of business and management.The qualification is designed to provide graduate students with exceptional diverse skills (advance communication, higher critical thinking, in-depth numeracy, creativity and innovativeness, entrepreneurial, leadership, administrative and management, accounting, human resource management, marketing and advance professional presentation skills). These skills are needed in uncertain and volatile business economic environments.This qualification will grant a suitable bridge for entry into the Master’s Degree in Business Administration and further training.

Who is this Qualification for? This qualification is designed for students willing to take up business administration and management assignments in both private and public organisations at advanced level. It is structured to stretch and challenge the students to fulfill their true potential and to become defining players in the management field. This qualification targets individuals willing to be transformed into professional business administrators/ managers. Furthermore, a key concern of the qualification is to impart the contemporary management skills required for successful business.

Admission /Entry Requirements

77

The minimum entry requirement is an appropriate Bachelor’s Degree in Business Administration or equivalent qualification at NQF level 7. IUM bachelor students in the final year can also apply for admission to Bachelor Honours degree provided that they pass 80%/90%/100% of their modules/courses in their final year of the Bachelor degree.

Qualification DurationThe Bachelor Honours Degree in Business Administration is conferred after one year of full-time or part-time study in one or more areas of business concentrations. Each year of study will be divided into two semesters and students are expected to take six courses in the first semester and five in the second semester. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole Qualification Holders of this qualification are able to: • Apply conceptual skills and knowledge of management, marketing, human

resources management, banking and finance in solving business-related problems. • Demonstrate awareness of the main functional areas of business administration and

global issues in business. • Demonstrate the ability to apply conceptual and analytical frameworks within

different organisational management conditions.• Organise and co-ordinate resources and opportunities by applying the relevant

theoretical aspects and reflect on the application.• Demonstrate critical appreciation, comprehension and understanding of the roles

business managers undertake in the modern business world.

Articulation Possibilities Vertically, the Bachelor Honours Degree in Business Administration grants admission to the Masters Degree in Business Administration. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Masters Degree qualification. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new Honours in the related business and management qualifications. Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses.The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of

78

higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.



Business Administration Research Project

Research Project Taken in the last year of study, the Business Administration research project is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated to a student by the faculty in order to generate knowledge necessary to complete all the requirements for the award of the qualification. Each student must independently complete a 10 000 – 15 000 word research project. The research should be original on a topic related to Business Administration. The research should have a clear defined problem statement, a review of the existing literature on the chosen topic, original evidence offered to support research project, consideration of alternative rival hypothesis, and a conclusion with recommendations.

79

Upon completion of writing the research project, the student will be required to present their research findings before a faculty selected project panel.

Supplementary Examinations A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project within three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits.

Award of the Qualification Candidates will be eligible to be awarded the Bachelor Honours Degree in Business Administration when they have passed all the required courses and successfully completed the Business Research project as specified in the relevant qualification regulations and have fulfilled any other additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

Teaching Methods/ Strategy The teaching and learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, practical projects, tests and written assignments.

80



Course Title


Credits

Investment Analysis and Portfolio Management

IAM80US 100 8 10

Research Proposal RPP80US 100 8 10Corporate Governance and Management CGM80US 100 8 10Game Theories for Managers GTH80US 100 8 10Strategic Marketing I SM181US 100 8 10

Elective Courses (Choose One)Auditing and Assurance New ASS80US 100 8 10Applied Entrepreneurship Management AEN80US 100 8 10


Course Title


Research Project RPJ80US 100 8 30International Trade (new) ITD80US 100 8 10Negotiation and Conflict Management (New)

NCF80US 100 8 10

Strategic Marketing II SM281US 100 8 10Elective Courses (Choose One)

Strategic Management Accounting SAC80US 100 8 10Organizational Development & Change Management (New)

ODC80US 100 8 10

81

Bachelor of Finance Management Honours (NQF Level 8)


RationaleThis qualification was designed in response to the national need for professional financial practitioners in the Human Resource Strategic Plan 2025 which highlights the critical skills shortage of qualified personnel in accounting and finance who may want to pursue further academic and professional qualifications as Accountants and Chartered Accountants. Holders of other related qualifications can also register for this qualification.

PurposeThe primary purpose of the Bachelor of Finance Management Honours qualification is to develop knowledge and skills, and provide a technically focused education in accounting and finance management that develops graduates with key knowledge and skills. The research component ensures that graduates will not only have practical hands on approach, competency and proficiency, but also discover new trends and developments in the accounting profession.

Admission RequirementsTo be registered for this qualification, candidates must at least have a Bachelor degree in finance Management at NQF Level 7 or equivalent.

Qualification DurationMinimum: 1 Years.Maximum: 2 Years.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:Explain and apply the theory and practice of finance management in the world of business.Apply knowledge relevant to the Accounting and finance profession to address business transactions and financial strategies.Prepare and analyse financial statements of businesses, non-profit and government entities, including small medium enterprises.Demonstrate good understanding of current trends in accounting and finance management, information systems and development, auditing, taxation and financial strategies.Develop and apply skills and knowledge acquired to address financing, investment and dividend decisions.

82

ArticulationIUM courses articulate from qualification to qualification. The IUM will decide if and how course work from qualifications from other institutions will articulate with IUM courses. Appeals may be submitted to Senate. The holders of this qualification will articulate to a Masters degree in Finance or any qualification at NQF Level 9.


AssessmentBoth Formative and Summative assessment techniques are used.The assessment system comprises two components:•ContinuousAssessment(CA)40%ofthefinalgrade.•FormalExams(FE)60%offinalmark.

Teaching methods/strategiesA wide range of teaching methods will be employed by lecturers from traditional lectures through to small decision-making groups, as well as the use of training films and videos and advanced business simulations. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the subjects. Each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. Programmed reading and reading guides will support these endeavours.

83

YEAR 1

SEMESTER 1

Course Title


Credits

Financial Strategies FNS80US 100 8 10Public Finance PUF80US 100 8 10Accounting Information Systems AIS80US 100 8 10Auditing & Assurance I ASS80US 100 8 10Corporate governance and management CGM80US 100 8 10

Electives Courses (Choose 1)Investment analysis and portfolio management

IAM80US 100 8 10

Strategic project management SPM80US 100 8 10Strategic innovation management AEN80US 100 8 10

SEMESTER 2

Course Title


Research Project RPJ80US 100 8 30Accounting Theory and Practice ATP80US 100 8 10Contemporary Financial Management

COF80US 100 8 10

Elective Courses (Choose One)International Finance Management IFM80US 100 8 10Strategic Management Accounting SAC80US 100 8 10Taxation and Tax Planning I TT180US 100 8 10

84

Bachelor of Accounting Honours (Level 8)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 40 -Level 5 credits: 60 -Level 6 credits: 100 30Level 7 credits: 110 20Level 8 credits: 120 60Minimum total credits required: 430 50

RationaleThis qualification was designed and developed in response to the national need for professional financial practitioners as indicated in the Human Resource Strategic Plan 2025 which highlights the critical skills shortage of qualified Accountants and Chartered Accountants due to the number of emerging Small Medium Enterprises (SMEs) businesses. Holders of other related qualifications can also register for this qualification.

PurposeThe primary purpose of the integrated Bachelor of Accounting Honours Level 8 qualification is to develop knowledge and skills and provide a technically focused education in accounting that inculcates graduates with requisite knowledge, a-practical hands on approach, competency and proficiency that will enable graduates to contribute immensely to the economy of Namibia.Admission RequirementsTo be registered for this qualification, candidates must at least have 25 points in five subjects; attained at grade 12 or equivalent. D in English is required and other conditions may apply. Admission can also be gained through Mature Age Entry as stipulated in GR 4.1.1

Qualification DurationMinimum: 4 Years.Maximum: 6 Years.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:• Explain and apply the theory and practice of Accounting;• Apply knowledge of relevant professional standards (to include but not limited to

Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) and International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS);

• Prepare and interpret financial statements for business, non-profit and government entities;

• Demonstrate an understanding of current technologies related to accounting

85

information development, audit, and analysis and financial strategies;• Demonstrate and apply skills and knowledge acquired to advise organisations in

taxation, internal control, and project execution matters;• Review and carry out audit work.

ArticulationHolders of Bachelor in Accounting Honours Level 8 will be able to articulate to Postgraduate studies qualifications at NQF level 9.


AssessmentBoth Formative and Summative assessment techniques are used.

The assessment system comprises two components:•ContinuousAssessment(CA)40%ofthefinalgrade.•FormalExams(FE)60%offinalmark.

Teaching Methods/StrategiesA wide range of teaching methods will be employed by lecturers from traditional lectures through to small decision-making groups, as well as the use of training films and videos and advanced business simulations. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the subjects. Each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. Programmed reading and reading guides will support these endeavours.

86



Course Title


Applied English Language Skills AEL40US 100 4 10Mathematics for finance MFF40US 100 4 10Economics I EC151US 100 5 10Principles of Marketing PMK50US 100 5 10


Course Title


Financial Accounting I FAC51US 100 5 10Basic Information Technology Skills BIT41US 100 4 10Cost Accounting CAC50US 100 5 10Quantitative Methods I QM151US 100 5 10Introduction to Entrepreneurship IEN40US 100 4 10Human Capital Management HCD50US 100 5 10



Course Title


Management Accounting I MAC61US 100 6 10Financial Accounting II FA260US 100 6 10Economics II 100 6 10Organisation Behaviour OBE61US 100 6 10Intermediate entrepreneurship and innovation

IEI60US 100 6 10

Elective Courses(Choose 2 from the 3 electives in year 2)Project Management PRM61US 100 6 10

87


Course Title


Business Law BLA61US 100 6 10Professional Communication PRC60US 100 6 10Management Accounting II MAC61US 100 6 10

Quantitative Methods II QM261US 100 6 10Finance Reporting 100 6 10

Electives Courses(Choose 2)Management Information Systems MIS61US 100 6 10Operations Management OPM60US 100 6 10



Course Title


Strategic entrepreneurship SEN70US 100 7 10Corporate Finance CFN71US 100 7 10Auditing I AU170US 100 7 10Taxation I TX170US 100 7 10Research Methodology RME71US 100 7 10Managerial Economics MAE70US 100 7 10Elective Courses(Choose 1 from the 2 electives in year 3)Strategic Human Resource Manage-ment

SHU70US 100 7 10

88


Course Title


Internship IN170US 100 7 10Auditing II AU270US 100 7 10Sales Management SMA60US 100 7 10

Taxation II TX270US 100 7 10Strategic Management SMN70US 100 7 10

Electives CoursesBusiness Logistics & Supplies Chain Management

BLS70US 100 7 10

YEAR 4 (140 credits)SEMESTER 1 (70 credits)

Course Title


Investment analysis and portfolio management

IAM80US 100 8 10

Corporate Governance I 100 8 10Auditing and Assurance I 100 8 10Taxation and Tax Planning I TT180US 100 8 10Financial Reporting & Analysis 100 8 10

Electives Courses (Choose 2)Accounting Information Systems AIS80US 100 8 10Public Finance PUF80US 100 8 10Applied entrepreneurship Management

AEN80US 100 8 10

89


Course Title


Auditing and Assurance II 100 8 10Corporate Governance II 100 8 10Accounting Theory and Practice ATP80US 100 8 10

Contemporary Finance Management I

COF80US 100 8 10

Research Project RPJ80US 300 8 30Electives Courses (Choose 1)

International Finance Management IFM80US 100 8 10Strategic Management Accounting SAC80US 100 8 10Financial Strategies FNS80US 100 8 10

90

Bachelor of Economics Honours (NQF Level: 8)


RationaleThe international University of Management (IUM)’s faculty of Business Administration has in response to the National Human Resources Plan (2010 – 2025) designed this qualification in order to contribute towards the development of human resources and meeting the needs of a knowledge-based economy towards the Vision 2030.

Purpose

Economics is a versatile multifaceted subject which includes global dimensions that are of increasing importance in today’s diverse society. The importance of a practical knowledge of economics is crucial in understanding today’s local, national, and global issues and therefore the need to create professionals capable of critical thinking and independent analysis. The design and introduction of this course by the IUM is very significant as the subject matter is applicable in a wide range of fields, including: business, finance, administration, local and national government as well as building human resources who can contribute to policy formulation, forecasting, predictions, and understanding the workings of the economy. This qualification incorporates new content relevant to the ever changing economic climate such as teaching econometrics using software, data analysis and interpretation as well as a research project which will strengthen the qualification. A key concern of the qualification is the importance of the ability of the student to develop skills of abstraction and logical deduction, understand government policy and make predictions. The curriculum therefore responds to changing needs such as understanding the interaction of the individuals, firm and government, and opportunity cost when faced with uncertainty taking into account the quest for economic growth and development.In preparing students to function effectively in the rapidly changing economic world, this qualification provides a solid foundation. The design of this qualification therefore incorporates Applied Econometrics, Environmental Economics, Corporate Finance and Transport Economics to improve the quality of the economic decision makers in the economy.

Who is this qualification for?This qualification is intended for students willing to apply the theoretical concepts learnt at the bachelor degree and advance their analytical skills, take up work in research firms and government think tanks where they study and analyse a variety of economic issues both in the government and private sectors. It is structured to stretch and challenge the students to fulfil their potential and to become defining players as economic

91

analysts. This programme targets individuals willing to be transformed into economic analysts and decision makers as well as to impart econometric skills of data collection, interpretation and prediction – skills much needed in today’s world of business.


The minimum entry requirement is an appropriate Bachelor of Economics or equivalent qualification at NQF Level 7.

Qualification DurationThe Bachelor of Economics Honours is conferred after one year of full-time or part-time study. Each year of study will be divided into two (2) semesters. Semester one (1) runs from January to June while Semester two (2) runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole Qualification

Holders of this qualification are able to: • Apply econometric techniques to solve economic problems.• Analyse issues and challenges facing an organisation, examining the need to plan

manage and measure change.• Apply and explain economic theory to solve transportation problems and discuss

current transportation problems and possible solutions.• Evaluate and explain the linkages between Mathematics and Economics.• Appraise pollution efforts towards environmental sustainability. • Examine the basic analytical tools employed in modern labour economics.• Describe and discuss the structure of the Namibian transport sector.• Analyse and examine the concepts and techniques of corporate finance as well as

the appraisal techniques used in capital budgeting.• Analyse economic models of firm behaviour to analyse questions in business

strategy, competition policy and regulation; and evaluate the competition policy in SADC and SACU as well as the Namibian regulatory policy.

• Discuss and analyse the models of firm behaviour and industrial organization.

Credit SystemsReference is made to the internationally acceptable formula: one (1) credit equates ten (10) notional hours (learning).The general guideline for teaching and learning time per course is based on the 10 hours per credit approach.

Articulation Possibilities Vertically, the Bachelor Honours Degree in Economics grants admission to the Master Degree in Economics. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Master Degree programme. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or newly related business and management qualifications

92

Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibian Qualification Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.

Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to disallow transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course/coursework to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.


93

b) Research Project The research project is meant to engage students in research under the supervision of a designated departmental staff member. The student must independently complete a 10, 000 – 15, 000 word research project. The research should be original with a clearly defined problem statement, a review of the existing literature on the chosen topic, original evidence offered to support the research project, consideration of alternative rival hypothesis, and a conclusion with recommendations. Upon completion of writing the research project, the student will be required to present his/her research findings before a faculty selected project panel.

c) Supplementary Examinations Student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40 - 49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits.

d) Awarding of the qualification Candidates will be eligible to be awarded the Bachelor Honours Degree in Business Administration when they have passed all the required courses and successfully completed the Research project as specified in the relevant qualification regulations and have fulfilled any other additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

Teaching Methods/ Strategy The teaching and learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, practical laboratory sessions, tests and written assignments. Quality AssuranceCommitment is made to ensure that the courses remain current, providing students with a high quality teaching and learning experience. Earnest effort is made to ensure that course quality assurance requirements are met through incorporating regular monitoring, review, benchmarking, and improvement. An external evaluator will periodically evaluate the qualification in terms of course content, teaching methods, course resources, and assessments.

Quality shall also be assured through: • Accreditation and registration on the National Qualifications Framework (NQF) by

the Namibia Qualifications Authority (NQA).• Engagement with relevant stakeholders from the industry

94

• Benchmarking and regular review of policies, curricula, delivery strategies and assessments.

• Regular monitoring of lecture activities and staff development. • Students will be asked to complete evaluation sheets for each course studied.• A dual performance evaluation system where lecturers and students appraise each • other. • Moderation (both internal and external) of continuous assessments and final

examinations conducted by holders of qualification of an NQF level higher than NQF level 8.

Qualification StructureSEMESTER 1 (50 credits)

Course Title


Compulsory CoursesEconomic Modelling and Forecasting EFM80US 200 8 20Environmental Economics EEC80US 100 8 10Dynamic Quantitative Analysis DQA80US 100 8 10Industrial Economics IEC80US 100 8 10Total credits


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesCorporate Finance CFN80US 100 8 10Labour Economics LAE80US 100 8 10Research Project XMH80US 100 8 30Compulsory credits Electives (Choose 2)Finance Management FMA80US 100 8 10Organizational Development & Change Management

ODC80US 100 8 10

Transport and Logistics Economics TRE80US 100 8 10Total credits available 30Total credits required 20Total Credits 120

95

FACULTY OF STRATEGIC MANAGEMENT AND LEADERSHIP

96

Certificate in Human Resource Management (Level 5)


Rationale

The Government of the Republic of Namibia (GRN) adopted a long-term plan, namely, Vision 2030. This national economic blue print serves as a basis for planning Namibia’s future. Vision 2030 envisages Namibia transitioning into an industrialised and globally competitive country of equal opportunity, realising its maximum growth potential in a sustainable manner, with improved quality of life for everyone. In order to achieve this goal, Namibia needs to develop human capital as well as institutional capacity to train people needed to meet the envisaged demand of the Namibian human capital development. Developing human capital especially in human resource is not a sole responsibility of government. The corporate world, both private and public, has a social responsibility of complementing government efforts in the development of the requisite human resource skills toward a knowledge driven society.

The Certificate in Human Resource Management is designed to teach the students the real life human resource tools required for employment and wealth creation in Namibia. This certificate is designed to meet the challenges Namibia faces with regard to the lack of qualified human resource practitioners in the public and private sectors especially in the small and medium sectors.

Purpose Certificate in Human Resource Management (Level 5) is designed for people who are currently working and also those who are unemployed with interest in developing their human resource expertise.

Admission /Entry RequirementsThe entry requirements to this certificate in Human Resource shall be a Namibian Senior Secondary Certificate (Ordinary or Higher or combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including English at D) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 20-24 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale. Students may enter through Mature Age Entry as stipulated in GR 4.1.1

97

Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate

Qualification Duration Fulltime/part-time mode- Minimum: 1 year; Maximum 2 yearsThe qualification comprises of two semesters per academic year: Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcome for the whole Qualification Upon the completion of this qualification student will be able to:• Apply the skills, knowledge, and understanding of human resource functions in

private and public sector organisational environments• Synthesize human resource planning, competency-based training, recruitment,

selection, placement, and orientation of employees in the organisational setups• Demonstrate the importance of training and career development; labour relations;

management of performance appraisal, total rewards programmes; and the development of personnel policies and procedures.

• Explore and analyse management and organisation theory, organisational behaviour and

• Development approaches, labour relations theory and practice, and interpersonal skill development and how these could be blended in the vision and mission statements of the organisations in order for them to be able to compete in certain and uncertain environments.

Articulation Certificate in Human resource management grants admission to Diploma in Human Resource Management. Furthermore, students may also, where applicable, endeavour to take up challenges in existing human resource professional qualifications offered by the University.Vertically, the certificate in Human Resource Management grants admission to a Diploma in Human Resource Management. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission in Marketing and Business Administration programmes.

Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules

98

covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years. Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the courses were equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in the certificate qualification.Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to disallow transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

Assessment Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.


Supplementary Examinations A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits.

99

Teaching Methods/StrategiesThe teaching and learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, practical projects, tests and written assignments.



Course Title


Compulsory CoursesMathematics MTH51US 100 5 10Applied English Language Skills AEL40US 100 4 10

Principles of Management POM50US 100 5 10Foundation of Human Resource Management

FHR50US 100 5 10

Introduction to Entrepreneurship IEN40US 100 4 10Micro Economics MIE50US 100 5 10Total NQF Level 5 Credits 60


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesPrinciples of Marketing PMK50US 100 5 10Basis IT Skills BIT41US 100 4 10

Human Capital Development HCD50US 100 5 10Labour Relations I LR151US 100 5 10Business Ethics BNE50US 100 5 10Relationship Marketing RMK50US 100 5 10Total NQF Level 5 Credits 500 60Total Year 1 Hours & Credits 1200 120

100

Certificate in Marketing Management (Level 5)


Rationale Certificate in Marketing Management (Level 5) is designed for people who are currently working and unemployed who are interested in developing their marketing expertise. Students will gain significant level of knowledge and/or expertise of marketing goods or services in various industries. This qualification is designed to impart marketing skills which are useful for successful marketing careers, creation of thriving business relationship in the interactive task of market research, analysis of consumer behaviour, and selling and promotion of services. The qualification is designed to teach the students the real life marketing tools required for employment and wealth creation in Namibia.

PurposeThe purpose of this qualification is to provide graduate marketing managers with a forum (both written and oral) for presenting and defending their own marketing decisions and for critically examining and discussing the recommendations of others.

Admission/Entry Requirements To be admitted to study for this qualification, one shall have satisfied the minimum conditions for entry to degree studies at this University as prescribed under the entry requirements in the IUM General Academic Regulations. This includes a minimum of 20 points from a Namibia Senior Secondary Certificate (Ordinary or Higher or a combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including English at Grade D minimum) normally in not more than three examination sittings.

Mature Age Entry as stipulated in GR 4.1.1

Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate.

Qualification Duration Any student beginning studies in the university in the first year of a programme must from the date of the first registration complete this qualification within 1 year.

101

Outcome for the whole qualification Holders of this qualification are able to: • State key marketing concepts, theories and techniques for analyzing a variety of

marketing organizations.• Outline the dynamic nature of the environment in which marketing decisions are

taken and appreciate the implications for marketing strategy determination and implementation.

• Identify the relevance of marketing concepts, and theories in evaluating the impacts of environmental changes on marketing planning, strategies and practices.

Outline and identify the marketing research process.Articulation Possibilities Certificate in Marketing Management (Level 5) grants admissions to Diploma in Marketing Management (Level 6) or any other related qualification at NQF Level 6. Students may also where applicable, move into other existing marketing professional qualifications. Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.

Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

102

Assessment Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.



Candidates will be eligible to be awarded the Certificate in Marketing Management (Level 5) when they have passed all the required courses and successfully completed the education research project as specified in the relevant qualification regulations and have fulfilled any other additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

Modes of Teaching and Learning The teaching and learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, practical projects, tests and written assignments.

103



Course Title


Compulsory CoursesPrinciples of Marketing PMK50US 100 5 10Applied English Language Skills AEL40US 100 4 10

Principles of Management POM50US 100 5 10Mathematics MTH51US 100 5 10Introduction to Entrepreneurship IEN40US 100 4 10Micro Economics MIE50US 100 5 10Total NQF Level 5 Credits 600 60


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesQuantitative Method I QM151US 100 5 10Financial Accounting I FAC51US 100 5 10

Basis IT Skills BIT41US 100 5 10

Relationship Marketing RMK50US 100 5 10Critical Thinking Skills CTS51US 100 5 10Human Capital Management HCM50US 100 5 10Total NQF Level 5 Credits 600 50Total Year 1 Hours & Credits 1200 120

104

Diploma in Human Resource Management ( NQF Level 6)


Rationale The Government of the Republic of Namibia (GRN) adopted a long-term plan, namely, Vision 2030. This national economic blue print serves as a basis for planning Namibia’s future. Vision 2030 envisages Namibia transitioning into an industrialised and globally competitive country of equal opportunity realising its maximum growth potential in a sustainable manner, with improved quality of life for everyone. In order to achieve this goal, Namibia needs to develop human capital as well as institutional capacity to train people needed to meet the envisaged demand of the Namibian human capital development. Developing human capital especially in human resource is not a sole responsibility of government. The corporate world, both private and public, has a social responsibility of complementing government efforts in the development of the requisite human resource skills toward a knowledge driven society.

Purpose The Diploma in Human Resource Management is designed to teach the students the real life human resource tools required for employment and wealth creation in Namibia. The programme exposes students to the twenty-first century skills, knowledge, and understanding of human resource functions in private and public-sector organizational environments.

Admission RequirementsThe entry requirements to this undergraduate diploma in Human Resource shall beI. A Certificate in Human Resources Management at NQF level 5II. A recognised qualification at NQF level 5 or equivalent qualification Students may enter through Mature Age Entry as stipulated in GR 4.1.1

Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee an acceptance into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate

Qualification DurationFulltime/Part-time mode - Minimum: 2 Years; Maximum: 4 Years. The qualification comprises of semesters, per academic year. There are two (2) semesters. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

105

Outcomes for the whole qualification The holders of this qualification are able to:• Apply the skills, knowledge, and understanding of human resource functions in

private and public-sector organizational environments• Prepare students to synthesize human resource planning; competency-based

training, recruitment, selection, placement, and orientation of employees in the organizational setups

• Demonstrate the importance of training and career development; labour relations; management of performance appraisal, total rewards programs; and the development of personnel policies and procedures.

• Explore and analyze management and organization theory, organizational behaviour and development approaches, labour relations theory and practice, and interpersonal skill development and how these could be blended in the vision and mission statements of the organizations in order for them to be able to compete in certain and uncertain environments.

Articulation PossibilitiesVertically, the Diploma in Human Resource Management grants admission to Bachelor Degree in Human Resource Management. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission in marketing and Business Administration qualification programmes.Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related business and management qualifications.

Credit TransferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.

To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years. Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.

106

Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.




Teaching Methods/Strategies The teaching and learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, practical projects, tests and written assignments.

107

YEAR 1


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesHuman Resource Development HRD60US 100 6 10Macroeconomics MRC60US 100 6 10


IEI60US 100 6 10

Organizational Behaviour OBE61US 100 6 10Managing People MAP61US 100 6 10

l

108

YEAR 2


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesHuman Asset Management HAM60US 100 6 10Labour Relations and Acts LRA60US 100 6 10

Marketing Management MMA51US 100 6 10Personnel Management I PS160US 100 5 10


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesProfessional Communication PRC60US 100 6 10

Competency-based Training and Development

CTD60US 100 6 10

Management Organisation MOR51US 100 5 10Human Resources Management II HMM60US 100 6 10Total 1000 180

109

Diploma in Marketing Management (Level 6)


Rationale The Diploma in Marketing Management (Level 6) qualification is designed to produce aspiring marketing cadres for Namibia and beyond. The Namibian Nation requires well trained people to market brand Namibia and its tourist attractions. The course is to contribute towards effective marketing in both private and public organisations and at the personal level.

Purpose The Diploma in Marketing Management (Level 6) qualification is designed to produce aspiring marketing cadres for Namibia and beyond.

Admission/Entry RequirementsTo be admitted to study for this qualification, one shall have a Certificate in Marketing Management (Level 5) from IUM or any equivalent qualification at NQF level 5 from recognised Institution.

Qualification Duration Any student beginning studies in the university in the first year of a programme must from the date of the first registration complete this qualification within 2 yearsThe qualification comprises of semesters, per academic year. There are two (2) semesters. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes for the whole qualification Holders of this qualification are able to: • State key marketing concepts, theories and techniques for analyzing a variety of

marketing organizations.• Outline the dynamic nature of the environment in which marketing decisions are


• Identify the relevance of marketing concepts, and theories in evaluating the impacts of environmental changes on marketing planning, strategies and practices.

• Outline and identify the marketing research process.

Articulation Diploma in Marketing Management (Level 6) grants admissions to Bachelor Degree in

110

Marketing Management Level 7. Students may also, where applicable, move into other existing marketing professional qualifications.


Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.

Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average. Assessment Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course/coursework to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final Examinations The final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations

111

will be of three hours duration. Examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally.





Course Title


Organizational Behavior OBE61US 100 6 10Financial Accounting II FA260US 100 6 10

Macro Economics MRC60US 100 6 10

Marketing Management MMA51US 100 6 10Intermediate Entrepreneurship and Innovation

IEI60US 100 6 10


Course Title


Sales Management SMA60US 100 6 10Human Asset Management HAM60US 100 6 10

Quantitative Methods II QM261US 100 6 10E-Marketing EMK60US 100 6 10Business Law BLA61US 100 6 10Total NQF Level 8 CreditsTotal Year 2 Hours & Credits 120 100

112



Course Title


Services Marketing SVM70US 100 7 10Personnel Management I PS160US 100 6 10Events Planning EVP60US 100 6 10

Advertising and Promotional Services

APS70US 100 7 10

Management Control System MCS60US 100 7 10Project Management PRM61US 100 6 10


Course Title


Marketing Research MRE70US 100 7 10Management Information Systems ( MIS)

MIS60US 100 7 10

Personnel Management II PS260US 100 6 10

Change Management CHM60US 100 6 10Small Business Management SBM60US 100 6 10Total NQF Level 8 Credits 500 50Total Year 2 Hours & Credits 1200 110

113

Postgraduate Diploma in Public Policy and Management (Level 8)


Rationale The influence of public policy and management is so pervasive in our society that it affects societal access to the basic needs, education, medical care, and rights and obligations. It determines the issues of governance, rule of law, accountability, and discharge of public duties as well as influencing the pace of technological advances and the extent of poverty.

This programme exposes students to the concepts and tools used in management as well as in evaluating public policy options and outcomes and preparing students for entry-level positions in organisations concerned with such tools and analysis. The focus is chiefly on domestic issues such as health, education, environmental, regulatory, and science and technology policy, applicable anywhere in the world.

The programme offers skills necessary to assess the performance of alternative approaches to policy making and implementation, evaluate management effectiveness, understand the political constraints faced by policy makers and managers, and appreciate the conflicts in fundamental human values that often animate policy and managerial debate.

The emphasis is on the training and development of professionals that would tackle “iniquitous challenges and issues” the challenging issues that define the public agenda and the training of talented individuals who would devote their efforts to finding solutions; makes this programme both unique and attractive.

The graduates of this qualification will be equipped with the necessary tools to tackle very challenging problems such as expanding services to meet the needs of changing populations, implementing information technologies that better connect citizens to their governments, and improving responses to man-made and natural disasters. Furthermore, they will be able to meet the employment demand that is required of professionals that would provide leadership, financial management, and policy analysis, among others.

In short, this qualification equips the student with the necessary tools to be able to examine a wide variety of issues facing society today especially in the area of public policy and management, and developing the necessary skills and knowledge to address them.

114

Purpose

The Postgraduate Diploma in Public Policy and Management aims at strengthening the public policy and managerial skills of future leaders, senior managers and professionals from both the public and private sectors. This programme provides committed policy professionals with the theoretical foundation and practical tools they need to make a difference.

Furthermore, the qualification is aimed at enabling participants to synthesise and critique theories and practices of public policy and management in the light of current research and professional experience. The integration of theory and practice is central to the programme. The Postgraduate Diploma in Public Policy and Management is solidly anchored on the following:o A work-based practical approach to facilitate integration of work-based experience with theories of public policy and managemento Reflective practice including use of an electronic portfolio to facilitate self-assessment of public policy and management skillso A constructivist approach to good governance that emphasises integration of skills, attitudes, knowledge and experience across different sectors of society, and collaboration of the citizenry

Admission/Entry RequirementsTo be admitted to the Postgraduate Diploma in Public Policy and Management programme, candidates must hold a Bachelor’s degree at NQF level 7 or equivalent qualification from any recognized institution.

A candidate without a Bachelor’s Degree, but who holds a qualification from a recognized institution of higher learning deemed to be equivalent to a bachelor’s degree may also be considered for admission; provided that he/she has accumulated at least three (3) years working experience at management level.Qualification DurationThe Postgraduate Diploma in Public Policy & Management is a one-year full-time post graduate study qualification leading to NQF Level 8 qualification.

The study period for the qualification is:

Fulltime mode - Minimum: 1 Year; Maximum: 2 Years

Contact hours will only be given over weekends and some public holidays.

The programme comprises two (2) semesters per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June and Semester 2, from July to December.

115

Outcomes of the whole qualification

Holders of this qualification are able to:

• Integrate and advance understanding of concepts, theories, contemporary trends and developments in public policy, administration, and management;

• Reflect on and synthesise complex information and issues, and apply relevant theories to the analysis of problems and challenges in public administration, public policy, and public management;

• Develop appropriate critical research and evaluative skills, and the capacity to clearly articulate the implications of their findings for the theory and practice of public administration, public policy, and/or public management;

• Transmit knowledge, skills and ideas to specialist and non-specialist audiences;• Express learning skills to allow students to continue to study in a manner that may

be largely self-directed and autonomous.

Credit SystemReference is made to the internationally acceptable formula: one (1) credit equates ten (10) notional hours (learning). A postgraduate diploma at IUM student will attract one hundred and fifty (150) credits. Successful completion of this level will qualify the student to register for the Master’s degree in Public Policy and Management. Students cannot gain admission to a Master’s degree if they do not pass all the courses in the postgraduate diploma programme.

Articulation PossibilitiesThe Postgraduate Diploma in Public Policy and Management qualification grants admission to a Master’s degree programme in Public Policy and Management or any other related Master’s qualifications or any qualification at NQF level 9.

Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.

To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses.

The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied and passed within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of

116

higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibian Qualification Authority requirements.

Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is out-dated more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting.

Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.

Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.

Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.

The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.

The IUM reserves the right to disallow transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course/coursework to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.(a) Final Examinations

The final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. Examiners may, in addition to written examinations, test any candidate orally.

(b) Supplementary Examinations

A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination.

117

A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.

Teaching Methodology/Strategies

Courses will be delivered using blended learning modalities, including lectures, online tutorials, advanced business simulations, video and audio conferencing technologies. Candidates must have access to a computer and the Internet. The teaching methods adapted for this qualification are student-centred learning methods. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the courses. Each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process.

Learning StandardsClass contributions and presentations by the students will be encouraged and the extent to which these contributions and presentations conform to the student learning of the first year will be an important facet in the success of the student.

Individual assignments will be set by the lecturer every two weeks and should be equivalent to the standard of examinations. These will normally take the form of an e-mailed or duplicated hand-out that should be returned with the finished assignment. There will also be tests given. The student will be expected to carry these out without help. It is in the student’s interest to carry out these assignments and tests with integrity. They will be marked anonymously against a given marking scheme. In this way, assessment will become part of the student’s learning.

The lecturer will use these results to monitor student progress and to make decisions as to whether the student is ready to sit examinations when the time comes. Students may not sit examinations unless the lecturer judges that he or she has a good chance of succeeding.

Quality AssuranceCommitment is made to ensure that the courses under this qualification remain relevant, current and provide students with a high quality teaching and learning experience. An earnest effort is made to ensure meeting the course quality assurance requirements is a continuous process through incorporating regular monitoring, review, benchmarking, and improvement. An external evaluator will periodically evaluate the qualification in terms of Course Outline, teaching methods, course resources and assessments. In detail, quality is assured through:

118• Accreditation and registration on the National Qualifications Framework (NQF) by

the Namibia Qualifications Authority (NQA) and in concurrence with the National Council on Higher Education (NCHE)

• Engagement with relevant stakeholders from the industry• Benchmarking and regular review of policies, curricula, delivery strategies, and

assessments• Regular monitoring of lecture activities and staff development• Students will be asked to complete evaluation sheets for each course studied• A dual performance evaluation system where lecturers and students appraise each

other• Moderation (both internal and external) of continuous assessments and final

examinations

Qualification Structure : Postgraduate Diploma in Public Policy and Management (Level 8)



Course Title


Introduction to Public Policy 120 8 12Public Leadership and Management 120 8 12Bureaucracy, Politics, & Policy 120 8 12

Governance and Public Policy 120 8 12Research Project 340 8 34Electives (Choose one)Economics of Public Policy 100 8 10Critical Policy Issues 100 8 10


Course Title Course Code

Hours NQF Level Credits

Methods for Public Policy Management 120 8 10Planning Theory and Analysis 120 8 10Economic Development Policy and Planning 120 8 10

Law & Public Policy 120 8 10Electives (Choose one)Entrepreneurship and Economic Development 100 8 10Policy Analysis in Public Administration 100 8 10Total Year 2 Hours & Credits 1700 170

119

Bachelor in Human Resource Management (Level 7)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 30 -Level 5 90 -Level 6 credits: 140 -Level 7 credits: 110 -Minimum total credits required: 370 -

Rationale The Bachelor Degree in Human Resource Management is designed to teach real life human resource tools required for employment and wealth creation in Namibia. This is in response to the challenges for a National Human Resource Plan in Namibia.

Purpose This qualification is designed to instill skills which are useful for successful human resource careers, creation of vibrant organisational relationships and serving industries in providing the necessary skills. The programme exposes students to the twenty-first century skills, knowledge, and understanding of human resource functions in private and public-sector organizational environments.

Admission RequirementsThe entry requirements to the Bachelor degree in Human Resource shall be I. A Namibian Senior Secondary Certificate (Ordinary or Higher or combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including English at D) normally in not more than three examination settings with a minimum of 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale. II. A student will also be admitted if s/he possesses a recognised diploma at NQF level 6 or equivalent qualification.III. Mature Age Entry as stipulated in GR 4.1.1Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate.

Qualification Duration Fulltime/Part-time mode - Minimum: 3 Years; Maximum: 6 Years. The qualification comprises of semesters. There are two semesters per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December. Outcomes for the whole qualification Upon the completion of this qualification students will be able to:•Applytheskills,knowledge,andunderstandingofhumanresourcefunctionsinprivateand public-sector organizational environments

120

• Synthesize human resource planning; competency-based training, recruitment, selection, placement, and orientation of employees in the organizational setups

• Demonstrate mastery of the principles, concepts and role and theories underlying the management of human resources.

• Plan for the current and future human resource needs of the organisation and organise gap analysis exercise.

• Evaluate necessary tools that foster rational, strategic decision-making in the organizational environment.

• Demonstrate understanding of employee termination and disciplinary procedures.• Redesign job processes for purpose of job enrichment and efficient execution Articulation Bachelor Degree in Human Resource Management gives students admission to a Bachelor Honours Degree in Human Resource Management level 8. Furthermore, students may also, where applicable, endeavour to take up challenges in existing human resource professional qualifications offered by the University (e.g., Honours Degree in Human Resource Management).

Vertically, the Bachelor Degree in Human Resource Management grants admission to Bachelor Honours Degree in Human Resource Management. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission in marketing and Business Administration programmes.



The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.

Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is

121

equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.


The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.

The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period.

Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course. Final Examinations The final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. Examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally.

Supplementary Examinations A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination.

A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits. Human Resource Management Research Project Taken in the last year of study, the human resource management research project is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated to a student by the faculty in order to generate knowledge necessary to complete all the requirements for the award of the qualification.

Each student must independently complete a 10 000 – 15 000 word research project.

122

The research should be original on a topic related to teaching and learning. The research should have a clear defined problem statement, a review of the existing literature on the chosen topic, original evidence offered to support research project, consideration of alternative rival hypothesis, and a conclusion with recommendations.




Course Title


Mathematics MTH51US 100 5 10Basic IT Skills BIT41US 100 4 10

Microeconomics MIE50US 100 5 10Applied English Language Skills AEL40US 100 4 10Introduction to entrepreneurship IEN40US 100 4 10Foundation of Human Resource Management

FHR50US 100 5 10

Principles of Management POM50US 100 5 10


Course Title


Principles of Marketing PMK50US 100 5 10Human Capital Development HCD50US 100 5 10

Management Information Systems MIS60US 100 6 10Business Ethics BNE50US 100 5 10Labour Relations LR151US 100 5 10Relationship Marketing RMK50US 100 5 10Management Organisation MOR51US 100 5 10Total 140

123

YEAR 2(110 credits)


Course Title


Human Resource Development HRD60US 100 6 10Macroeconomics MRC60US 100 6 10


NAP61US 100 6 10

Marketing Management MMA51US 100 6 10Managing People MAP61US 100 6 10Organizational Behaviour OBE61US 100 6 10


Course Title


Business Law BLA61US 100 6 10Human Asset Management HAM60US 100 6 10

Competency- based Training Development

CTD60US 100 6 10

Labour Relations II LR261US 100 6 10Professional Communication PRC60US 100 6 10Total

124

YEAR 3(120 credits)


Course Title


Talent Management and Workforce Development

TMW70US 100 7 10

Strategic Human Resource SHU70US 100 7 10

Project Management PRM61US 100 6 10Labour Relations III LR360US 100 7 10Research Methodology RME71US 100 7 20Strategic Entrepreneurship SEN70US 100 7 10


Course Title


Employee Health and Safety EHS70US 100 7 10Labour Economics LAE70US 100 7 10

Internship IN170US 100 7 30Total 370

125

Bachelor of Marketing Management (NQF Level 7)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 30 -Level 5 credits 90 -Level 6 credits: 120 -Level 7 credits: 140 -Minimum total credits required: 380 -

Rationale

Bachelor of Marketing Management Level 7 is designed to make a positive contribution to Marketing management in Namibia and the world. It aims to produce effective marketing cadres for the Namibia nation and beyond.

Purpose

Bachelor of Marketing Management Level 7 will produce people who will make practical contributions to the industry and commerce in Namibia and beyond.


To be admitted to study for this qualification, one shall have satisfied the minimum conditions for entry to degree studies at this University as prescribed under the entry requirements in the IUM General Academic Regulations. This includes a minimum of 25 points from a Namibia Senior Secondary Certificate (Ordinary or Higher or a combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including English at Grade D minimum) normally in not more than three examination sittings.

i. A recognised qualification at NQF level 6 or equivalent ii. Or Mature Age Entry as stipulated in GR 4.1.1

Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests.

Qualification Duration Any student beginning studies in the university in the first year of a programme must from the date of the first registration complete this qualification within a minimum of 3 years and maximum 5 years after which failure to obtain this qualification the studies will be discontinued.

126

The qualification comprises of semesters, per academic year. There are six (6) semesters. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes for the whole qualification

Holders of this qualification are able to: • Apply key marketing concepts, theories and techniques for analyzing a variety of

marketing organizations.• Report the dynamic nature of the environment in which marketing decisions are


• Construct and use marketing concepts, and theories in evaluating the impacts of environmental changes on marketing planning, strategies and practices.

• Produce international marketing strategies for various organizations.

Credit SystemReference is made to the internationally acceptable formula: one (1) credit equates ten (10) notional hours (learning).The general guideline for teaching and learning time per course.

Articulation Bachelor of Marketing Management at NQF Level 7 grants admissions to the Bachelor of Marketing Management Honours or any other related qualification at NQF Level 8 to students who are to be gainfully employed or become consultants. Students may also, where applicable, move into other existing marketing professional qualifications.


Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not

127

transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

Assessment Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period.

Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.


Marketing Research Project Taken in the last year of study, the marketing research project is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated to a student by the faculty in order to generate knowledge necessary to complete all the requirements for the award of the qualification. Each student must independently complete a 10 000 – 15 000 word research project. The research should be original on a topic related to teaching and learning. The research should have a clearly defined problem statement, a review of the existing literature on the chosen topic, original evidence offered to support research project, consideration of alternative rival hypothesis, and a conclusion with recommendations. Upon completion of writing the research project, the students will be required to present their research findings before a faculty selected project panel.

Supplementary Examinations A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the

128

publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits.

Practical Assessment All students should acquire field experience in the Third year of study and submit a report - this field experience amounts to 30 credits.

Award of the qualification Candidates will be eligible to be awarded the Bachelor in Marketing Management when they have passed all the required courses and successfully completed the education research project as specified in the relevant qualification regulations and have fulfilled any other additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.


129



Course Title


Applied English Language Skills AEL40US 100 4 10Principles of Management POM50US 100 5 10

Mathematics MTH51US 100 5 10Introduction to Entrepreneurship IEN40US 100 4 10Micro Economics MIE50US 100 5 10Financial Accounting I FAC51US 100 5 10Total NQF Level 4 Credits 60




Communication Skills GCS41US 100 5 10Basic IT Skills BIT41US 100 4 10

Cost Accounting CAC60US 100 5 10

Quantitative Methods I QM51US 100 5 10Principles of Marketing PMK50US 100 5 10Human Capital Management HCM50US 100 5 10Total NQF Level 5 Credits 60Total Year 1 Hours & Credits 1200 120

130

YEAR 2(120 credits)





IEI60US 100 6 10

Organizational Behavior OBE61US 100 6 10

Critical Thinking Skills CTS51US 100 6 10Marketing Management MMA51US 100 6 10Macroeconomics MRC60US 100 6 10Financial Accounting II FA260US 100 6 10Total NQF Level 6 Credits 60




Quantitative Methods II QM261US 100 6 10Professional Communication PRC60US 100 6 10

Operations Management OPM60US 100 6 10Management Accounting MAC61US 100 6 10Management Information System MIS60US 100 6 10Business Law BLA61US 100 6 10Total NQF Level 6 Credits 60Total Year 2 Hours & Credits 1200 120

131

YEAR 3(140 credits)


Course Title


Strategic Entrepreneurship SEN70US 100 7 10Managerial Economics MAE70US 100 7 10

Strategic Management SMN70US 100 7 10International Marketing INM70US 100 7 10Total Quality Management TQM70US 100 7 10Research Methodology RME71US 100 7 20Total NQF Level 7 Credits 60


Course Title


Business Logistics and Supplies Chain Management

BLS70US 100 7 10

Business Leadership Dynamics BLD70US 100 7 10

Competency-based Training and Development

CTD60US 100 7 10

Marketing Research Project MRP70US 100 7 10Internship IN370US 100 7 30Total Credits 1200 120

132

Bachelor in Human Resource Management Honours (Level 8)


Rationale The Bachelor Honours Degree in Human Resource Management is designed to equip students with real life human resource tools required for employment and wealth creation in Namibia.

Purpose The programme exposes students to the twenty-first century skills, knowledge, and understanding of human resource functions in private and public-sector organizational environments.

Admission RequirementsThe entry requirements for the Bachelor in Human Resource management Honours shall be a recognized Bachelor qualification at NQF level 7 or equivalent.

Qualification Duration Fulltime/Part-time mode - Minimum: 1 Year; Maximum: 2 Years. The qualification comprises of two semester per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes for the whole qualification Upon the completion of this course students are able to:• Demonstrate knowledge, skills, and understanding of human resource principles

and concepts.• Apply human resource management knowledge and skills learnt in class and

practical in human resource functional area both in private and public- sector organisational environments.

• Project human resource needs in the organisation.• Engage in human resource recruitment and selection processes.• Display skills to induct and orient new employees into the organisation.• Apply the skills to carry out gap analysis in the work place.• Plan, organise and coordinate staff development and competency training

programmes.• Demonstrate the understanding of employee termination and disciplinary

procedures.• Organise and coordinate performance appraisals. • Redesign job processes for purpose of job enrichment and efficient execution• Develop reward and personnel policies, systems and procedures.

133

• Explore and analyse management and organisation theory, organisational behaviour and development approaches, labour relations theory and practice, and interpersonal skill development and how these could be blended in the vision and mission statements of the organisations in order for them to be able to compete in certain and uncertain environments.

Articulation Bachelor Honours Degree in Human Resource Management gives students admission to a Masters Degree in Human Resource Management level 9. Furthermore, students may also, where applicable, endeavour to take up challenges in existing human resource professional qualifications offered by the University (e.g., Master’s Degree in Human Resource Management).

Vertically, the Bachelor Honours Degree in Human Resource Management grants admission to Masters Degree in Human Resource Management. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission in marketing and Business Administration programmes.





Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting.



134



The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period.




A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits.

Human Resource Management Research Project Taken in the last year of study, the human resource management research project is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated to a student by the faculty in order to generate knowledge necessary to complete all the requirements for the award of the qualification. Each student must independently complete a 10 000 – 15 000 word research project. The research should be original on a topic related to Human Resources Management. The research should have a clearly defined problem statement, a review of the existing

135

literature on the chosen topic, original evidence offered to support research project, consideration of alternative rival hypothesis, and a conclusion with recommendations.




Course Title


Compulsory CoursesCorporate Governance and Management

CGM80US 100 8 10

Labour Relations IV LRS80US 100 8 10Ethics in Business Environment EBE80US 100 8 10Information Systems in Human Resource and Policies

ISM80US 100 8 10

Elective (Select one)Leadership Dynamics LDY80US 100 8 10Applied Entrepreneurship Management

AEN80US 100 8 10


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesStrategic Human Resources: Case Analysis

HCA80US 100 8 10

Employee Performance Management

EPM80US 100 8 10

Workers’ Rights and Democracy WRD80US 100 8 10Research Project XHR80US 100 8 10

Elective (Select one)Negotiation and Conflict Management

NCF80US 100 8 10

Comparative Employment Systems CES80US 100 8 10Total 140

136

Bachelor of Marketing Management Honours (NQF Level 8)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 8 credits: 130 -Minimum total credits required: 130 -

Rationale Bachelor of Marketing Management Honours Level 8 contributes towards developing of candidates into marketing experts that meet the needs and challenges of our fast growing local and global markets. This qualification is designed to impart marketing skills which are useful for successful marketing careers, creation of thriving business relationships in the interactive task of market research, analysis of consumer behaviour, selling and promotion of services.

Purpose The Bachelor of Marketing Management Honours Level 8 is designed to provide the graduate marketing manager with a forum (both written and oral) for presenting and defending their own marketing decisions and for critically examining and discussing the recommendations of others.

Admission /Entry RequirementsTo be admitted to study for this qualification, one shall have satisfied the minimum conditions for entry to Bachelor Honours degree studies at this University as prescribed under the entry requirements in the IUM General Academic Regulations. This requires a Bachelor in Marketing Management at NQF Level 7 or any related qualification at NQF level 7 or equivalent from a recognized institution.

Qualification Duration The study period for the qualification is: •Fulltime/Part-timemode-Minimum:1Year;Maximum:2Years.•DistanceMode-Minimum:2Years;Maximum:3Years.

The qualification comprises of semesters per academic year. There are two (2) semesters. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes for the whole qualification Holders of this qualification are able to: •Outlinetheessentialsofcustomerserviceincludingananalysisofthemanypublics.•Explaintheprocessinvolvedinrecruiting,selecting,training,motivating,compensatingsales people.•Discusssalesterritoryandforcemanagement.•Discussthevariousintegratedcommunicationtoolsandapplythemtorealbusiness

137

environments.•Identifyandinterpretkeyconceptsandtermsrelatedtoe-marketing.•Illustratethebenefitsandlimitationsofe-marketingtoolsinbusiness.•Listtheadvantagesanddisadvantagesoftheuseofsocialmediaandtoolsine-marketingtools.•Evaluatetherelationshipbetweenmarketresearchanddecisionmaking.• Identify and construct the processes used in formulating and conducting marketresearch projects.•Discussandanalysethekeyconceptsofcustomerserviceandaccountsmanagement.•Explaintheroleofcustomerrelationshipmanagementsystems.•Applyanddemonstrateknowledgeofthekeyelementsofstrategicmarketing.•Produceastrategicmarketingplan.•Illustratethenewproductdevelopmentprocess.•Applythetheorydiffusionofinnovation.•Analysethedeterminantsofconsumerbuyingbehaviourandexaminetheconsumerbuying process.•Examinethepurposeofretailmarketingandcomparevariousformsofretailmarketing.

Articulation Bachelor of Marketing Management Honours Level 8 grants admissions to Masters in Business Administration (Marketing specialisation) or any related qualification at NQF Level 9. Students may also where applicable, move into other existing marketing professional qualifications.


Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the courses were equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.

138

Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

Assessment Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period.


Final Examinations: The final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. Examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally.

Marketing Research Project: Taken in the last year of study, the marketing research project is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated to a student by the faculty in order to generate knowledge necessary to complete all the requirements for the award of the qualification.

Each student must independently complete a 10 000 – 15 000 word research project. The research should be original on a topic related to Marketing Management. The research should have a clearly defined problem statement, a review of the existing literature on the chosen topic, original evidence offered to support research project, consideration of alternative rival hypothesis, and a conclusion with recommendations. Upon completion of writing the research project, the student would be required to present their research findings before a faculty selected project panel.

Supplementary ExaminationsA student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than

139

30% of the courses or credits. Practical Teaching: All students should acquire field experience in the Third year of study and submit a report - this field experience amounts to 40 credits.




Course Title


Compulsory CoursesMarketing Communication MKC80US 100 8 10

Applied Entrepreneurship Management

AEN80US 100 8 10

Product Development PCT80US 100 8 10Strategic Marketing I SM181US 100 8 10Game Theory for Managers CTH80US 100 8 10Corporate Governance and Management

CGM80US 100 8 10

Total NQF Level 8 Credits 60

140


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesConsumer Behaviour CBE81US 100 8 10

Retail Marketing RTM80US 100 8 10Strategic Marketing II SM281US 100 8 10Research Project XMR80US 100 8 10Negotiation and Conflict Management

NCF80US 100 8 10

Total NQF Level 8 Credits 70Total Year 1 Hours & Credits 1100 130

141

FACULTY OF INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY

142

DEPARTMENT OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY (IT)Certificate in Business Information Systems (Level 5)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 30 -Level 5 Credits 80 -Minimum total credits required: 110 -

RationaleThe Certificate in Business Information Systems Qualification is designed in response to the information technology challenges affecting Namibia and the region. Namibia suffers a shortage of well-trained computer specialists and as the Information Technology (IT) industry continues with its rapid growth, so does that shortage become greater. The growth requires certain skills and competences in information technology. The qualification is motivated by the increasingly critical role of information systems within organizations which has created a demand for graduates who are knowledgeable about both information systems and business.

Purpose Information is the currency of the future. Our community desperately needs people who understand the business world, and who at the same time excel in applying information technology to produce desirable outcomes. This qualification will equip the students with the essential tools and proven techniques – including business as well as IT skills specialising in the development of software that can help solve specific problems technically to spearhead major developmental initiatives and create cultures of innovation and engagement. The course is designed to give students a competitive advantage in pursuing a career in business or IT based on the blending of technological and business competencies. This course will helps students to understand development concepts and professional issues relevant to business information systems. The main purpose of this course is to bring an integration of Information Systems in the Business Environment with management issues.

Admission Requirements The entry requirements to Business Information Systems shall be:i) Hold a Higher International General Certificate of Secondary Education (HIGCSE) senior certificate in five subjects with 1 – 4 symbolsii) Hold a grade 12 senior certificate International General Certificate of Secondary Education (IGCSE) with a minimum of E grade in English, a D grade in Mathematics, (A candidate with an E grade in Mathematics may be admitted with approval from the faculty Dean/HoDs), and a D grade in any three other subjects. All should total twenty points or more.

143

iii) Or Mature Age Entry as stipulated in GR 4.1.1Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate. iv) The equivalent of any of the above as determined by University Senate.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the programme is:Minimum: 1Year and a Maximum: 2 Years.The programme comprises a minimum of two (2) semesters, i.e. two (2) semesters per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: a) Demonstrate an understanding of information systems and computer Technologies;b) Analyse Information Technology systems in terms of architecture, Function, operation, and business value;c) Demonstrate responsible, resourceful, and ethical behaviour as demanded byindustry.

Award of the qualificationThis qualification will be awarded to people credited with 110 credits. All 110 credits are from compulsory subjects.

Candidates will be eligible for the appropriate qualification when they have passed all the required courses specified in the relevant programme regulations and have fulfilled any additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

ArticulationIUM courses articulate from qualification to qualification as per the statement in course contents.

Vertical articulation, certificate in Business information systems grants admission a Diploma in Business Information Systems. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Diploma in related field. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing new related diploma with approval by DEANS and HODs. With other institutions, the IUM will decide if and how course work from qualifications from other institutions will articulate with IUM courses. Appeals may be submitted to Senate.

144

Credit transferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.


The awarded credits are governed by the IUM Certificate program rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credits will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the courses were equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.

Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is out-dated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting.






AssessmentSpecial assessment arrangements are based on the following:Tests, assignments, group work and practical and written examinations will be used to assess the students. Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments

145

(group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Both Formative and Summative assessment techniques are used.Formative assessment techniques are used to monitor student learning during the learning process. The feedback gathered is used to identify areas where students are struggling so that instructors can adjust their teaching and students can adjust their studying.

Summative assessment techniques are used to evaluate student learning. These assessments are appreciated at the end of a course to measure the extent to which students have achieved the desired learning outcomes. The major components of this technique are:•Exams.Thisincludesfinalexams,andtestsattheendofcourseunits.•Papers,projects,andpresentations.Thesegivestudentsthechancetogodeeperwiththe material to put the knowledge they have acquired to use or create something new from it. •Portfolios.Thesegivestudentsachancetospellouttheconceptsortechniquesusedwith each course, the themes addressed, and hurdles faced so as to bring a sense of completion to the learning process.

Coursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period.


Final ExaminationsThe final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. Examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally.

Supplementary ExaminationsA student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination.

A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A

146

student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.

Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprises of the full and part time learning mode. Contact hours for the full and part time learning mode are face-to- face encounters on weekly basis.

The following are the methods of delivery:•FlippedClassroom•DesignThinking(CaseMethod)•Self-learning•SocialMedia•OnlineLearningTools

Certificate (110credits)


Course Title


Applied English Language Skills AEL40US 4 4 10

Computer Systems and Architecture CAR50US 4 5 10Principles of Computer Programming

CPR50US 4 5 10

Basic IT Skills BIT41US 4 4 10Mathematics MTH51US 4 5 10


Course Title


Communication Skills GCS41US 4 5 10

Systems Analysis SYA51US 4 5 10PC Maintenance PCM50US 4 5 10Programming with C++ PCP50US 4 4 10Introduction to Entrepreneurship IEN40US 4 5 10Financial Accounting FAC51US 4 5 10

147

Diploma in Business Information Systems (Level 6)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 5credits: 30Level 6 credits: 184 -Level 7 Credits 10 -Level 8 credits: 10Minimum total credits required: 234 -

RationaleWith a global and regional shortage of skilled people in information and communications technology, this qualification was designed in response to strong industry demand. The course aims to give a thorough understanding of information technology tools and specialist knowledge in management, marketing or accounting. It offers the opportunity to develop a mixture of skills in the two complementary areas of information systems and business.

Purpose Information is the currency of the future. Our community desperately needs people who understand the business world, and who at the same time excel in applying information technology to produce desirable outcomes. This qualification will equip students with the essential tools and proven techniques – including business as well as IT skills specialising in the development of software that can help solve specific problems technically to spearhead major developmental initiatives and create cultures of innovation and engagement. The course will provide students with broad business-oriented knowledge and indispensable IT-oriented skills.

Admission RequirementsThe entry requirements to the Diploma in Business Information Systems shall be:I) Hold an IUM Certificate in Business Information Systems; or, related certificate qualification at level 5 from other recognised institution II) The equivalent of the above as determined by University Senate.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the programme is:Minimum: 2 Year Maximum: 4 Years.The programme comprises a minimum of two (2) semesters in the academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: • Pursue careers in areas such as computer support systems, internet-related

technology, and business systems; and use information systems to support key business functions;

148

• Demonstrate an understanding of theory and methods of object-oriented modelling and the fundamentals of object-oriented development process models;

• Apply business intelligence techniques to analyses data in order to understand and improve business performance and Design and create usable and attractive dynamic websites;

• Apply presentations, writing, speaking and organizational skills in Information Technology (IT) business professional environment;

• Demonstrate understanding, entrepreneurship and innovation skills by applying models and theories of entrepreneurship in real life IT business environment;

• Demonstrate an understanding of information systems in relations to financial accounting theories within the prescribed international and local legal framework;

• Explain basic concepts and ethical dimensions of research method and theories associated with project management.

• Understand and explain human resources concepts and expertise used in organization today;

• Demonstrate an understanding of mathematical and statistical theories and terminologies and their application in real life situations


ArticulationIUM courses articulate from qualification to qualification as per the statement in course contents. Vertical articulation: Diploma in Business information systems grants admission to Bachelors in Business Information Systems. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Bachelors in related field. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing new related Bachelors with approval by Deans and HoDs With other institutions, the IUM will decide if and how course work from qualifications from other institutions will articulate with IUM courses. Appeals may be submitted to Senate




149

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the courses were equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.





The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.

The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average. AssessmentSpecial assessment arrangements are based on the following:Tests, assignments, group works and practical and written examinations will be used to assess the students. Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.Both Formative and Summative assessment techniques are used.

Formative assessment techniques are used to monitor student learning during the learning process. The feedback gathered is used to identify areas where students are struggling so that instructors can adjust their teaching and students can adjust their studying.

150

Summative assessment techniques are used to evaluate student learning. These assessments are appreciated at the end of a course to measure the extent to which students have achieved the desired learning outcomes. The major components of this technique are:•Exams.Thisincludesfinalexams,andtestsattheendofcourseunits.•Papers,projects,andpresentations.Thesegivestudentsthechancetogodeeperwiththe material to put the knowledge they have acquired to use or create something new from it. •Portfolios.Thesegivestudentsachancetospellouttheconceptsortechniquesusedwith each course, the themes addressed, and hurdles faced so as to bring a sense of completion to the learning process.






Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprises of the part time and full time learning mode. Contact hours for learning mode are face-to- face encounters on weekly basis

The following are the methods of delivery:a) Flipped Classroomb) Design Thinking (Case Method)

151

c) Self-learningd) Social Mediae) Online Learning Tools



Course Title


Compulsory CoursesIntermediate Entrepreneurship and Innovation

IEI60US 4 6 10

Critical Thinking Skills CTS51US 4 5 10Object Oriented Programming with Java

JAV61US 4 6 10

Systems Design SDE60US 4 6 10Fundamentals of Databases FDA60US 4 6 10

Financial Accounting II FA260US 4 6 10

SEMESTER 2 (60 credits)Course Title


Compulsory CoursesData Communication and Computer Networking

DNW60US 4 6 10

Advanced Databases Design ADD70US 4 7 10Web Development WDE60US 4 6 10Operating Systems OPS51US 4 5 10Quantitative Methods I QM261US 4 5 10

152



Course Title


Compulsory CoursesProfessional Development PRD60US 4 6 10

Introductory Engineering Calculus ICC70US 4 6 10Data Structures DST60U 4 6 15


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesProfessional Communication PRC60US 4 6 10

Management Information Systems MIS60USProject Management for ICT PMI80US 4 6 10Research Methodology RME71USDigital Marketing DMK60U 4 6 10Quantitative Methods II QM261US 4 6 10Mini Project BIP70US 6 6 20

153

Bachelor of Science in Business Information Systems (NQF Level 7)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 40 -Level 5 80 -Level 6 124 -Level 7 110 -Level 8 10Minimum total credits required: 364 -

RationaleThe Government of the Republic of Namibia (GRN) adopted a long-term perspective plan namely Vision 2030. This national economic blue print serves as a basis for planning Namibia’s future. Vision 2030 envisages Namibia transitioning into an industrialised and globally competitive country of equal opportunity, realising its maximum growth potential in a sustainable manner, with improved quality of life for everyone. In order to achieve this goal, Namibia needs to develop human capital as well as institutional capacity to train people needed to meet the envisaged demand of the Namibian technological-based economy. Developing human capital especially in information technology is not a sole responsibility of government. The corporate world, both private and public, has a social responsibility of complementing government efforts in the development of the requisite information technology skills toward a knowledge driven society. The IUM Vision (to encourage and develop an African cadre of men and women who can operate at international standards in business) dovetails perfectly into Vision 2030 on the development of IT skilled human capital.

PurposeNamibia suffers a shortage of well-trained computer specialists and as the IT industry continues with its rapid growth so does that shortage become greater. The IUM Business Information Systems Bachelor degree was designed in response to strong industry demand. This course aims to give Students a thorough understanding of information technology tool and specialist knowledge in management, marketing or accounting. It offers the opportunity to develop a mixture of skills in the two complementary areas of information systems and business/management.This degree is designed to make a positive and practical contribution to hardware and software design and to improve the management of performance and problem solving. It is concerned with the education and training of young information systems managers who can help to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of management in the private and public sectors.

154

Admission RequirementsThe entry requirements to the Bachelor in Business Information Systems shall be:

i. Higher International General Certificate of Secondary Education (HIGCSE) senior certificate in five subjects with 1 - 4 symbolsii. Grade 12 senior certificates or International General Certificate of Secondary Education (IGCSE) with a minimum of D grade in English, a D grade in Mathematics, (A candidate with an E grade in Mathematics may be admitted with approval from the faculty Dean/HoDs), and a C grade in any three other subjects. All should total twenty five points or more.

iii. Mature Age Entry as stipulated in GR 4.1.1Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate.

iv. The equivalent of any of the above as determined by University Senate.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the qualification is:Fulltime/Part-time mode - Minimum: 3 Years; Maximum: 5 Years.The qualification comprises of semesters. There are two (2) semesters per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.


Holders of this qualification are able to:• Demonstrate a critical awareness and understanding of the main functional areas in

Information Technology and the Business environment as a whole.• Identify and troubleshoot problems related to computer software and hardware.• Analyse existing systems in business, identify problems in the current systems

and be in a position to solve such problems by developing new systems or adding functionalities to the existing ones.

• Efficiently and effectively manage businesses in the private and public sectors.• Demonstrate how to deal with the challenges of developing, implementing,

maintaining and managing information systems.• Recognize and understand, from a local and global standpoint the problems

associated with business information systems management• Identify problems and develop a range of short term mid-term and long term

solutions.


155

Candidates will be eligible for the appropriate qualification when they have passed all the required courses specified in the relevant programme regulations and have fulfilled any additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

ArticulationIUM courses articulate from qualification to qualification as per the statement in course contents. The IUM will decide if and how course work from qualifications from other institutions will articulate with IUM courses. Appeals may be submitted to Senate.

Vertically, Bachelor of Business Information Systems grants admissions to Honours in Business Information Systems. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to a Bachelors Degree.

Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related Information Technology field with approval of the faculty Deans and HoD to any related Bachelor Degree.Credit transfer

Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.


The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree program rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.


Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting.



Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits

156

required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.


The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.Assessment

Special assessment arrangements are based on the following:.

Tests, assignments, group work and practical and written examinations will be used to assess the students. Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Both Formative and Summative assessment techniques are used.

Formative assessment techniques are used to monitor student learning during the learning process. The feedback gathered is used to identify areas where students are struggling so that instructors can adjust their teaching and students can adjust their studying.

Summative assessment techniques are used to evaluate student learning. These assessments are appreciated at the end of a course to measure the extent to which students have achieved the desired learning outcomes. The major components of this technique are:• Exams. This includes final exams, and tests at the end of course units. • Papers, projects, and presentations. These give students the chance to go deeper with

the material to put the knowledge they have acquired to use or create something new from it.

• Portfolios. These give students a chance to spell out the concepts or techniques used with each course, the themes addressed, and hurdles faced so as to bring a sense of completion to the learning process.

Coursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the

157

activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course /course coursework to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final Examinations

The final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. Examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally.



Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprises of the part time and full time learning mode. Contact hours for learning mode are face-to- face encounters on weekly basis


158Qualification Structure YEAR 1 (120 credits)


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesApplied English Language Skills AEL40US 100 4 10

Basic IT Skills BIT41US 100 4 10Introduction to entrepreneurship IEN40US 100 4 10Financial Accounting for ICT FAC51US 100 5 10Computer Systems and Architecture CAR50US 100 5 10Principles of Computer Programming

CPR50US 100 5 10


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesCommunication Skills DNW60US 100 5 10

Systems Analysis SYA51US 100 5 10Programming with C++ PCP50US 100 5 10Discrete Mathematics DMT50US 100 5 10Operating Systems OPS51US 100 5 10Data Communication and Computer Networking

DNW60US 100 5 20

YEAR 2 (120 credits)SEMESTER 1 (64 credits)

Course Title


Compulsory CoursesBusiness Statistics BUS50US 100 5 10

Introductory Engineering Calculus IEI60US 100 6 10Systems Design SDE60US 100 6 14Object oriented Programming with Java

JAV61US 100 6 10

159

Fundamentals of Databases FDA60US 100 6 10Introductory Engineering Calculus ICC70US 100 6 10


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesProject Management for ICT PMI80US 100 8 10

Web Development WDE60US 100 6 10Advanced database Design ADD60US 100 7 10Management Information Systems MIS60US 100 6 10Professional Communication PRC60US 100 6 10Research Methodology RMI70US 100 7 20



Course Title


Compulsory CoursesStrategic Entrepreneurship SEN70US 100 7 10

Visual Programming with VB.Net VBN70US 100 7 14Advanced web Development AWD70US 100 7 14Business Process Reengineering BPR70US 100 7 14Business and IT Law BIL70US 100 7 14Business Intelligence BIN70US 100 7 14

SEMESTER 2 (30credits)

Course Title


Compulsory CoursesInternship IN370US 7 30

Mini Project BIP70US 7 30

160

Bachelor of Science in Business Information Systems Honours (NQF Level 8)


Rationale

The Government of the Republic of Namibia (GRN) adopted a long-term perspective plan namely Vision 2030. This national economic blue print serves as a basis for planning Namibia’s future. Vision 2030 envisages Namibia transitioning into an industrialised and globally competitive country of equal opportunity, realising its maximum growth potential in a sustainable manner, with improved quality of life for everyone. In order to achieve this goal, Namibia needs to develop human capital as well as institutional capacity to train people needed to meet the envisaged demand of the Namibian technological-based economy. Developing human capital especially in information technology is not a sole responsibility of government. The corporate world, both private and public, has a social responsibility of complementing government efforts in the development of the requisite information technology skills toward a knowledge driven society.

Purpose

Namibia suffers a shortage of well-trained computer specialists and as the IT industry continues with its rapid growth so does that shortage become greater. The IUM Business Information Systems Bachelor Honours degree was designed in response to the information technology challenges affecting Namibia and the region. Namibia is a fast growing technologically-based economy. The growth requires certain skills and competences in information technology. By the time the graduates have successfully completed this degree qualification, their acquired knowledge of computer systems and management will enable them to analyse, design and implement information systems solutions in a wide range of real world managerial problems. They will be able to recognize the multidisciplinary nature of information systems, be familiar with information system architecture and be able to evaluate information system effectiveness in a business enterprise.

Admission Requirements

The entry requirements to the Bachelor of Science in Business Information Systems shall be:

i. Bachelor Degree in Business Information Systems or its equivalentii. Higher International General Certificate of Secondary Education (HIGCSE) senior

161

certificate in five subjects with 1 - 4 symbolsiii. Grade 12 senior certificates or International General Certificate of Secondary Education (IGCSE) with a minimum of D grade in English, a D grade in Mathematics, (A candidate with an E grade in Mathematics may be admitted with approval from the faculty Dean/HoDs), and a C grade in any three other subjects. All should total twenty five points or more.iv. The equivalent of any of the above as determined by University Senate.v. Mature Age Entry as stipulated in GR 4.1.1Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM senate.

vi. The equivalent of any of the above as determined by University Senate


The study period for the qualification is:Fulltime/Part-time mode - Minimum: 1 Year; Maximum: 2 Years.The qualification comprises of semesters, per academic year. There are two (2) semesters. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.Outcomes of the whole Qualification

Holders of this qualification are able to:•DemonstrateacriticalawarenessandunderstandingofthemainfunctionalareasinInformation Technology and the Business environment as a whole.•Identifyandtroubleshootproblemsrelatedtocomputersoftwareandhardware.•Analyseexistingsystemsinbusiness,identifyproblemsinthecurrentsystemsandbein a position to solve such problems by developing new systems or adding functionalities to the existing ones.•Efficientlyandeffectivelymanagebusinessesintheprivateandpublicsectors.

Award of the qualification

This qualification will be awarded to people credited with 120 credits. 96 credits are from compulsory subjects and 24 from elective subjects. Candidates will be eligible for the appropriate qualification when they have passed all the required courses specified in the relevant programme regulations and have fulfilled any additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.ArticulationIUM courses articulate from qualification to qualification as per the statement in course contents. The IUM will decide if and how course work from qualifications from other institutions will articulate with IUM courses. Appeals may be submitted to Senate.Vertically, Bachelor Honours of Business Information Systems grants admissions to a

162

related Honours degree. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to Bachelor Honours Degree. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related Information Technology field with approval of the faculty Deans and HoD to any related Bachelor Honours Degree




Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the courses were equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.







163

AssessmentSpecial assessment arrangements are based on the following:Tests, assignments, group works and practical and written examinations will be used to assess the students. Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Both Formative and Summative assessment techniques are used.Formative assessment techniques are used to monitor student learning during the learning process. The feedback gathered is used to identify areas where students are struggling so that instructors can adjust their teaching and students can adjust their studying. Summative assessment techniques are used to evaluate student learning. These assessments are appreciated at the end of a course to measure the extent to which students have achieved the desired learning outcomes. The major components of this technique are:•Exams.Thisincludesfinalexams,andtestsattheendofcourseunits.•Papers,projects,andpresentations.Thesegivestudentsthechancetogodeeperwiththe material to put the knowledge they have acquired to use or create something new from it. •Portfolios.Thesegivestudentsachancetospellouttheconceptsortechniquesusedwith each course, the themes addressed, and hurdles faced so as to bring a sense of completion to the learning process.

Coursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final ExaminationsThe final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. Examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally.Supplementary ExaminationsA student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination.

A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one

164

opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.

Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprises of the part time and full time learning mode. Contact hours for learning mode are face-to- face encounters on a weekly basis. The following are the methods of delivery:•FlippedClassroom•DesignThinking(CaseMethod)•Self-learning•SocialMedia•OnlineLearningTools



Course Title


Compulsory CoursesApplied entrepreneurship management

AEN80US 100 8 10

Mobile Applications development MPD80US 100 8 14Expert Systems EXS80US 100 8 14Advanced Computer Systems and Architecture

ACA80US 100 8 14


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesEnterprise Resource Planning Systems

ERP80US 100 8 14

E-commerce ECM80US 100 8 14Computer Auditing CPA80US 100 8 14Research Project XBI80US 100 8 30Year Courses (30 credits)

165

DEPARTMENT OF SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT (SD) Bachelor of Science in Software Development (NQF Level: 7)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 30 -Level 5 credits: 90 -Level 6 credits: 104 -Level 7 credits: 130 -Level 8 credits: 10 -Minimum total credits required: 364 -

RationaleThe Bachelor of Science in Software Development is being introduced to eradicate the shortage of software developers in Namibia and the whole of Africa. The qualification is developed in line with the NQF requirements and addresses the need for programming expertise in the IT industry.

PurposeThe software development programme was designed in response to the information technology challenges affecting Namibia and the region. Namibia is a fast growing technologically-based economy. The growth requires certain skills and competences in information technology.

This qualification will equip the students with the essential tools and proven techniques – including business as well as IT skills specialising in the development of software that can help solve specific problems technically – to spearhead major developmental initiatives and create cultures of innovation and engagement.

The Software Development Qualification addresses the shortage of software developers nationally and regionally. With the availability of such expertise in Namibia, outsourcing of computer software from other countries will be eliminated. Stakeholders confirmed the need and relevance of this qualification.

Admission Requirements To be admitted for this qualification, one shall have satisfied the minimum conditions for entry to degree studies at this University as prescribed under the entry requirements in the IUM General Academic Regulations. This includes a minimum of 25 points from a Namibia Senior Secondary Certificate (Ordinary or Higher or a combination of both) or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including English at Grade D minimum) normally in not more than three examination sittings.

166

Qualification DurationThe study period for the programme is:Minimum: 3 Years.Maximum: 5 Years.The programme comprises a minimum of eight (8) semesters, i.e. two (2) semesters per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: a. Demonstrate a broad understanding of software development, information systems and computer technologies.b. Analyse complex Information Technology systems in terms of architecture, function, operation, and business value.c. Design and implement enterprise scale projects.d. Utilize analytic skills to solve complex problems, developing and presenting solutions, in an ever-changing environment.e. Demonstrate responsible, resourceful, and ethical behaviour as in the workplace.

ArticulationIUM courses articulate from qualification to qualification as per the statement in Course Outlines. The IUM will decide if and how course work from qualifications from other institutions will articulate with IUM courses. Appeals may be submitted to Senate.





Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and

167

passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting.

Credits earned at an accredited college may not be transferred unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.


Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

AssessmentCoursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the tests, assignments, projects, group work, activity presentations and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.


Supplementary ExaminationsA student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.

Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprises of the part time and distance learning mode. Contact hours for distance learning mode are face-to- face encounters

168on monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays such as Easter break.The following are the methods of delivery:•Face-to-face•FlippedClassroom•DesignThinking(CaseMethod)•Self-learning•SocialMedia•OnlineLearningTools

YEAR 1 ( 120 credits)

SEMESTER 1 ( 60 credits)

Course Title


Compulsory CoursesApplied English Language Skills AEL40US 4 4 10

Financial Accounting for ICT FAC51US 4 5 10Computer Systems and Architecture CAR50US 4 5 10Principles of Computer Program-ming

CPR50US 4 5 10

Basic IT Skills BIT41US 4 4 10Introduction to Entrepreneurship IEN40US 4 4 10


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesCommunication Skills GCS41US 100 5 10

Data Communication and Comput-er Networking

DNW60US 100 6 10

Systems Analysis SYA51US 4 5 10Programming with C++ PCP50US 4 5 10Discrete Mathematics DMT50US 4 5 10Operating Systems OPS51US 4 5 10

169



Course Title


Compulsory CoursesData Structures DST70U 4 7 14

Introductory Engineering Calculus ICC70US 4 6 10Systems Design SDE60US 4 6 14Object oriented Programming with Java

JAV61US 4 6 10

Fundamentals of Databases FDA60US 4 6 10Business Statistics BUS50US 4 6 10

YEAR 2


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesProject Management for ICT PMI80US 4 8 10

Web Development WDE60US 4 6 10Advanced database Design ADD60US 4 7 10Management Information Systems MIS60US 4 6 10Research Methodology RME71US 4 7 20Professional Communication PRC60US 4 6 10

170



Course Title


Compulsory CoursesAdvanced Web Development AWD70US 4 7 14

Human Computer Interaction HCI70US 4 7 14Mobile Application Development MAD70US 4 7 14Visual Programming with VB.net VBN70US 4 7 14Intermediate Entrepreneurship and Innovation

IEI60US 4 6 10

Critical thinking skills CTS51US 4 5 10


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesInternship IN370US 7 30

Mini Project BIP70US 7 30

171

Bachelor of Science in Software Development Honours (NQF Level: 8)


Rationale

The Bachelor of Science in Software Development Honours is designed to eradicate the shortage of software developers in Namibia and the whole of Africa. The qualification is developed in line with the NQF requirements while addressing the need for programming expertise in the IT industry.

Purpose

The software development programme was designed in response to the information technology challenges affecting Namibia and the region. Namibia is a fast growing technologically-based economy. The growth requires certain skills and competences in information technology.

This qualification equips the students with the essential tools and proven techniques – including business as well as IT skills specialising in the development of software that can help solve specific problems technically – to spearhead major developmental initiatives and create cultures of innovation and engagement.

Admission Requirements

To be registered for this qualification – Bachelor in Software Development Honours, candidates must hold a Bachelor in Software Development at NQF Level 7 or any equivalent qualification from a recognized institution.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the programme is:Minimum: 1 YearMaximum: 2 Years.Contact hours will be given during and after normal working hours i.e. after 17h00 Monday-Friday or during weekends and public holidays. Faculty of IT will advise.The programme comprises a minimum of eight (8) semesters, i.e. two (2) semesters per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.


172

Holders of this qualification are able to: •Demonstrateabroadunderstandingofsoftwareengineering,i n f o r m a t i o n systems and computer technologies.•AnalysecomplexInformationTechnologysystemsintermsofarchitecture,function,operation, and business value.•Designandimplemententerprisescaleprojects.•Utilizeanalyticskillstosolvecomplexproblems,developingandpresentingsolutions,in an ever-changing environment.•Demonstrateresponsible,resourceful,andethicalbehaviourintheworkplace.

Articulation

IUM courses articulate from qualification to qualification as per the statement in course contents. Once accomplished, the Bachelor in Software Development Honours allows students to do their Master of Information Technology or any other qualification at NQF Level 9.

Credit transfer

Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.







173


The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgement of the IUM on this question shall be final.


AssessmentCoursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities, assignments, tests, projects, group works and presentations and other evaluations undertaken by the student during study period.





Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprises of the part time and distance learning mode. Contact hours for distance learning mode are face-to- face encounters

174

on a monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays such as Easter break.

The following are the methods of delivery:•Face-to-face•FlippedClassroom•DesignThinking(CaseMethod)•Self-learning•SocialMedia•OnlineLearningTools



Course Title


Compulsory CoursesEmbedded Systems and Software ESS80US 4 8 14

Software Quality Assurance SQA80US 4 8 14Programming with Python PWP80US 4 8 14


Course Title


Compulsory CoursesOperations Research OPR80US 4 8 14

Electives Courses (Select 2)Game Development GMD80US 4 8 14Cryptography and Network Security CNS80US 4 8 14Cyber Security and Law CSL80US 4 8 14Year CoursesResearch Project XSD80UY 4 8 40

175

DEPARTMENT OF ELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION (E & C)

Bachelor of Science in Electronics and Engineering Honours (Level 8) (Specializations: Telecommunication, Instrumentation, Control, Computer

Engineering, Electrical)

Compulsory Standards TotalCompulsory Elective

Level 4 credits: 20 - 20Level 5 credits: 60 - 60Level 6 credits: 100 - 100Level 7 credits: 140 10 150Level 8 credits: 200 75 200 475Total available credits: 520 85 200 805Total minimum credits required: 520 85 - 605

RationaleThe Bachelor of Science in Electronics Honours Level 8 forms a major part of a production or process industry setup instruments that are used to measure/monitor signals and then electronics, which, accordingly, form the foundation of electronics to understand electrical machinery/processes. In most modern systems / machines where automation is involved, electronics forms part of the system. Also, in research/academic, clinical and quality assurance/standards laboratories, electronics are used for measurements and testing. This makes electronics very important in engineering and science.

The Bachelor of Science in Electronics Honours Level 8 has six specializations that are intended to produce highly trained manpower in Electronics ready to take up the challenges in industrial research/design, and in management of industrial and commercial organizations. The programme is industry-oriented and is designed to produce graduate engineers capable of adapting to technological changes and in line with Namibian Government Policy of industrialization as spelled out in Vision 2030 and in the National Human Resource Plan of the Republic of Namibia.

PurposeThe Bachelor of Science in Electronics Honours Level 8 reflects the need for highly and appropriate qualified specialised electronics professionals in the Namibian and SADC environment. It reflects further IUM’s mission statement of producing an African cadre of professionals who are capable of operating internationally in industry.

By the time the graduates have successfully completed this degree qualification, their acquired knowledge of electronics in special areas in this field will enable them to analyse, design, and build an electronic equipment in a wide range of real world situations. They

176

will be able to recognize the multidisciplinary nature of electronics, be familiar with electronics and be able to evaluate electronic systems effectiveness.

Admission RequirementsApplicants for the programme must have any one of the following qualifications:i. Namibian Secondary School Certificate (NSSC) senior /higher certificate in five subjects with 1 - 4 symbols.

ii. Grade 12 senior certificates or International General Certificate of Secondary Education (IGCSE) with a minimum of D grade in English, a D grade in Mathematics, and a D grade in any three other subjects (should include Physics, Chemistry and/or Technical Drawing). All should total twenty-five (25) points or more.

iii. Mature Age Entry as stipulated in GR 4.1.1.

iv. The equivalent of any of the above as determined by University Senate.

Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by IUM Senate.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the qualification is:Fulltime/Part-time mode - Minimum: 4 Years; Maximum: 6 Years.The qualification comprises of semesters, per academic year. There are two (2) semesters. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes for the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:•Engageinthedesignofsystems,toolsandapplicationsinelectronics,communicationand technology domains.•Applytheknowledgeofelectronicsinspecialisedareas(Communication,Electrical,control, Instrumentation, computing systems, computer science, Control Systems) to solve problems of social relevance, and pursue higher education and research.• Carry out core engineering andmanagerial tasks inmulti-disciplinary andmulti-cultural environments.•Communicate effectively,demonstrate leadershipqualities, andexhibitprofessionalconduct.•Apply the knowledge of generation, transmission and distribution of power in thenation development.•Engageinlifelonglearning,careerenhancement,andadapttochangingprofessionaland societal needs and empower the graduates to state their own businesses.•AnalyseanddesignembeddedsystemsforEngineeringproblemsolutions.• Apply Fourier Series, Vector Calculus, Complex Analytical Methods and Partial

177

Differentials and Integrals to solve Engineering problems.•Design and analyseOptical FibreCommunication systems and their application incommunications.

ArticulationThe IUM will decide if and how coursework of qualifications from other institutions will articulate with IUM courses. Appeals may be submitted to Senate

Vertically: •Fromoneyeartoanother,astudentwillberequiredtopassaminimumnumberofsubjects as determined by Senate annually (currently stands at 70%) •BachelorofScienceElectronicsandEngineeringHonoursgrantsadmissiontoMasterof Science in Electronics or related fields.

Horizontally:• Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties forassessment to gain admission to the Bachelor Honours Degree. • Students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related InformationTechnology fields with approval of the faculty Deans and HoDs to any related Bachelor Honours Degree.

Credit transferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and Outcomes of Learning between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combinations of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied and passed within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibian Qualification Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.

Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to

178

reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to disallow transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

AssessmentSpecial assessment arrangements are based on the following:Tests, assignments, group work and practical and written examinations will be used to assess the students. Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period.

Students must score at least 50% in each course /course coursework to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course. Both Formative and Summative assessment techniques are used.Formative assessment techniques are used to monitor student learning during the learning process. The feedback gathered is used to identify areas where students are struggling so that instructors can adjust their teaching and students can adjust their studying.

Summative assessment techniques are used to evaluate student learning. These assessments are appreciated at the end of a course to measure the extent to which students have achieved the desired Outcomes of Learning. The major components of this technique are:•Exams.Thisincludesfinalexams,andtestsattheendofcourseunits.•Papers,projects,andpresentations.Thesegivestudentsthechancetogodeeperwiththe material to put the knowledge they have acquired to use or create something new from it. •Portfolios.Thesegivestudentsachancetospellouttheconceptsortechniquesusedwith each course, the themes addressed, and hurdles faced so as to bring a sense of completion to the learning process.


Students must score at least 50% in each course /course coursework to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

179

Final Examinations



Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprise of the part time and full time learning mode. Contact hours for learning mode are face-to- face encounters on weekly basis.


180

BSc Electronics and Engineering Honours


SEMESTER 1 ( 70credits)

Course Title


Introductory Calculus ICC70US 6 10

Engineering Physics EPH60US 6 10Circuit Analysis I CA170US 7 10Principles of Computer Programming

CPR50US 5 10

Engineering Drawing (CAD, AutoCAD)

CAD60US 6 10

Applied English Language Skills AEL40US 4 10

Introduction to Entrepreneurship IEN40US 4 10


Course Title

Course Code

Prerequisite NQF Level

Credits

Data Communication and Computer Networks

DCN60US 6 10

Object Oriented Programming Principles of Computer Programming

5 10

Fundamentals of Electronics FOE61US None 6 10Intermediate Engineering Calculus ICA70US Introductory

Calculus7 10

Circuit Analysis II CA270US Circuit Analysis I 7 10Communication skills GCS41US None 5 10Workshop Practice WKP50US None 5 30

181



Course Title

Course Code

Prerequisites NQF Level

Credits

Cryptography and Network Security CNS70US None 7 10

Analogue Electronics I ANE60US None 6 10Advanced Engineering Calculus AEC80US Intermediate

Calculus8 10

Digital Electronics I DE170US None 7 10Principles of Management POM50US None 6 10Analogue Communication Systems ACS60US None 6 10


Course Title


Digital Communication Systems DCS710US 7 10

Research Methodology RME71US 7 10Probability and Statistics PRS70US 7 10Digital Electronics Design DE270US 7 10Mobile Communications Systems MOC60US 6 10Analogue Electronics II AE270US 7 10

182



Course Title

Course Code Prerequisites NQF Level Credits

Embedded Systems EBS70US None 7 10


IEI60US None 6 10

Electromagnetics EMG70US None 7 10Optical Fibre Communication System

OPF70US None 7 10

Power Electronics Systems Design PWE07US None 7 10Digital Signal Processing None 7 10Advanced Web Development AWD70US 7 10Operation Research OPR70US 7 10


Course Title

Course Code Prerequisites NQF Level Credits

Electrical Measurements EME70US None 7

Digital Signal Processing Application

DSP81US Digital Signal Processing

8 10

Internship IN570US None 8 10Project Management PMI80US None 8 10Control Systems CSY80US None 8 10Radio and Television RTV80US None 8 10

183

BSc Electronics and Engineering Honours (Various Specialisations)

YEAR 4

SEMESTER 1

Course Title

Course Code Prerequisites NQF Level

Credits

Research Project XP180US None 8 60


SEN70US None 7 10

TelecommunicationAntenna Theory & Propagation ATP08US NoneMicrowave Engineering MVE80US None 8 15Radar and Navigational Aids RNA80US None 8 15Control SystemsAdvanced Control Systems ACS80US None 8 15Optimal Control OPC80US None 8 15Logic and Distributed Control System

None 8 15

InstrumentationIndustrial Instrumentation II280US None 8 15Analytical and Virtual Instrumentation

ANI80US/ VRI80US

None 8 15

Biomedical Instrumentation BMI80US NoneElectricalRenewable Energy RWE80US None 8 15Power Systems and Smart Grids PY280US None 8 15Electrical Machines EMD80US None 8 15Computer EngineeringComputer Modelling and Simulation

CSC 412 None 8 15

Distributed Computing DCM80US None 8 15Operating Systems OPR70US None 8 15Digital Signal Processing Application

DSA80US None 8 10

184

SEMESTER 2

Course Title

Course Code Prerequisites NQF Level

Credits

Engineering Law and Ethics None 8 15

Artificial Intelligence AFI80US None 8 15TelecommunicationTelecommunication Switching Systems

TSS80US None

Satellite Communication STC80US None 8 15Control SystemsBiomedical Control BMC80US None 8 15Digital Control Systems None 8 15InstrumentationPower Plant Instrumentation None 8 15Avionics Instrumentation None 8 15

ElectricalPower Systems Protection PSL80US None 8 15Electrical Machines and Drives EMD80US None 8 15Computer EngineeringHuman Computer Interaction HCI70US None 8 15Fault Diagnosis and Failure Tolerance

FDF80US None 8 15

185

FACULTY OF TOURISM, HOSPITALITY, AND EVENTS

MANAGEMENT

186

Certificate in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management (Level 5)


RationaleThis qualification is designed to provide students with the necessary skills for the provision and delivery of quality service in the tourism and hospitality industry. It will sharpen such skills as: •Customerserviceskills•Culinaryskills•Managementandleadershipskills

The Certificate in Tourism, Hospitality and events Management targets students who want to become:•FrontofficeAssistants•CustomerCareConsultants•Housekeepers/Supervisors•HospitalitySalesRepresentatives•TourismHealthandSafetyOfficers•TourismConsultantsandServiceAgents•TourismandHospitalityMarketingAgents

PurposeThe main purpose of the Certificate in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management (Level 5) is to develop students’ basic professional knowledge in the dynamic and diverse tourism industry.

Admission RequirementsTo be registered for this qualification, a prospective student must:1.Hold a Namibia Senior Secondary Certificate (NSSC) Ordinary or Higher Level with passes in 5 subjects; or equivalent, with a minimum of D grade in English Language, and should total twenty points or more; OR

Enter through a flexible learning path – Or Mature Age Entry as stipulated in GR 4.1.1/prior learning with five years relevant experience in various fields of tourism information technology or related fields.

Achievement of these requirements will not automatically guarantee an acceptance into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests at the IUM.

187

If in possession of a foreign qualification, submit an NQA Evaluation report of their foreign qualifications to the IUM for consideration.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the qualification is:Minimum: 1 YearMaximum: 2 Years.The programme comprises two (2) semesters, i.e. two (2) semesters per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationUpon successful completion of this qualification, holders are able to:•DemonstratebasicunderstandingofHousekeepingintourismandhospitality.•RecordthenecessaryskillsandknowledgeinCustomerServicethatareofinteresttothe Namibian/ or other visiting traveller. •IdentifytherolesoftheTourismSysteminthedifferentsegmentsoftheindustryandthe inter-relationship of those systems. •DemonstratethebasicsskillsandcompetencesinFoodhandling,Health,SafetyandSecurity in the Tourism, Hospitality and Events industry.• Demonstrate an understanding of international customer needs and expectations,including culture shock, through the study of marketing and business studies•DemonstrateBasicITskillsinTourismandHospitality

ArticulationA student who completes this certificate can proceed to the Diploma in Tourism, Hospitality and Event Management (Level 6) offered by the IUM, and/or any other related qualification at NQF Level 6.

Credit transferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. The awarded credits are governed by the IUM Stand Alone programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended. Credits earned at an accredited institution may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in Certificate qualification.

188


Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to disallow transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

AssessmentCoursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) for the theory-based course attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities such as tests, group activities, assignments (group/ individual), demonstrations and presentations (in a preparation room or laboratory or work station), practical assessments through score sheets, timed observations and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course. Students must score at least 50% in their practical for those courses to qualify to sit for the final examinations.


Whereas for practical courses; namely Housekeeping operations, Food Handling, Health, Safety and Security in Tourism and Hospitality as well as Front Office Operations, Continuous Assessment (CA) will attract 70% of the CA mark from practical work. 30% of CA marks will be attained from the theory. Practical examinations will be set up for the above three courses and examined. 100% of the final mark will be divided as 70% practical and 30 % written examination.


A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.

189

Teaching methods/strategiesCourses will be delivered using blended learning modalities, including lectures. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. Lecturer will demonstrate the skills and competences to the students first, and allow the students to carry out the set tasks for the day. Assessments may be done during these sessions and recorded.

Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read and research extensively in advance for each of the courses.



Course Title


Compulsory Courses Applied English Language Skills AEL40US 100 4 10

Customer Service Skills CSS50US 100 5 10Micro Economics MIE50US 100 5 10Mathematics MTH51US 100 5 10Introduction to Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management

ITH50US 100 5 10

Introduction to Entrepreneurship IEN40US 100 4 10


Course Title


Compulsory Courses Food Handling, Health & Safety in Tourism and Hospitality

FHS50US 100 5 10

Front Office Operations FOO50US 100 5 10Basic IT Skills BIT41US 4Housekeeping Operations HKO50US 100 5 10Financial Accounting I FAC51US 100 5 10Principles of Marketing for Tourism and Hospitality

PMT50US 100 5 10

190

Diploma in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management (Level 6)Compulsory Elective

Level 5 credits: - 20Level 6 credits: 190 -Minimum total credits required: 190 10

PurposeThe Diploma in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management will provide students with the necessary skills for the provision and delivery of quality service in the tourism and hospitality industry.

The purpose of this qualification is to train and equip the human factor to deliver quality service of a standard that meets the requirements of present day national, regional and international tourism.

Rationale The Diploma level 6 in tourism and hospitality management qualification is developed to equip the students with the requisite knowledge and skills in the tourism industry. The qualification provides graduates with a wide range of employment opportunities in the Tourism Industry such as wholesale, travel/ transportation, hotels and attractions and ultimately contributes to the national economy and beyond. This qualification will offer training that will help students to develop strong business management and broaden their job prospect. The diploma targets those who want to become:o Tourism Officers,o Customer Service Consultantso House Keepers,o Tourism and Hospitality Health and Safety Officerso Front Office Supervisorso Service Supervisorso Hospitality Bookkeeperso Tourism Sales and Marketing Representativeso Front Office Assistant

Admission Requirements To be admitted to study for this qualification, one shall have a Certificate in tourism, hospitality and events management (level 5) from IUM or any other equivalent qualification at NQF level 5 from a recognized institution.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the qualification is:Minimum: 2 YearsMaximum: 3 Years.

191

The programme comprises two (2) semesters, per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes for the whole qualification Holders of this qualification are able to: • Describe the different stakeholders – their roles and their effects on tourism policy

and planning.• Explain the importance of appropriate e-marketing in the tourism and hospitality

industry.• Discuss the concepts of tourism geography.• Describe and be able to express knowledge of tour planning, sales and other tourism

products and services.• Identify and repeat basic French grammar structures and vocabulary in speaking,

reading and writing.• Review a range of techniques and operations practices appropriate to the travel and

tourism industry.• Interpret the practice of business law in the tourism and hospitality establishments• Demonstrate appropriate etiquette in the tourism and hospitality industry.• Describe and be able to express knowledge of basic food handling.• Demonstrate basic skills of food and beverage services.• Respond to customer queries, complaints and needs as part of ensuring superior

customer service delivery.• Explain basic concepts for management information systems• Interpret the value of the operations and quality management concepts and models

in the travel, tourism, hospitality and events management establishments• Describe the major components of events planning

ArticulationThis qualification will allow students to proceed to a Bachelor qualification in Tourism, Hospitality & Events Management (Level 7) offered by IUM or any other related qualification at NQF Level 7.



The awarded credits are governed by the IUM qualifications’ rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years. Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of

192

higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting.

Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.

The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average. AssessmentCoursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. Assessment methods used include: tests, assignments, case studies, projects, group work, cafes, quizzes and reports. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.


Teaching Methods/ StrategiesThe students will be expected to be responsible for their own learning, nobody can learn for somebody else. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the subjects. The role of the lecturer is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process. Programmed reading will support these endeavours. A wide range of teaching methods will be employed by lecturers from traditional lectures through to small decision-making groups, as well as the use of training films and videos, and advanced business simulations will employ a wide range of teaching methods.

193

Courses will be delivered using blended learning modalities, including lectures, online tutorials, advanced simulations, video and audio conferencing technologies. Learners must have access to a computer and the Internet. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read and research extensively in each of the courses. Each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process. Guided reading materials and research will support these endeavours.



Course Title

Course Code

Hours NQF Level Credits

Beverage Services BVS60US 100 6 10

Human Resources Development HRD60US 100 6 10Critical Thinking Skills for Tourism and Hospitality

TCT61US 100 6 10

Intermediate Entrepreneurshipand Innovation

IEI60US 100 6 10

Marketing Management MMA51US 100 6 10


Course Title


Tourism Geography TGG61US 100 6 10

Tourism Operations Management TOM61US 100 6 10E- Marketing for the Tourismand Hospitality Industry

ETM60US 100 6 10

Managing Information Systems MIS60US 100 6 10Etiquette for the Tourism and Hospitality Industry

EQT60US

ELECT ONE LANGUAGEGerman 1A GE140US 100 6 10French 1A FR140US 100 6 10

194

YEAR 2( 100 credits)


Course Title


Financial accounting II FA260US 100 6 10

Macro Economics MRC60US 100 6 10Events Planning EVP60USCommercial Food Preparation in the Hospitality Industry

CFP60US 100 6 10

Customer Service in Tourismand Hospitality

CST60US 100 6 10


Course Title


Business Law BLA61US 100 6 10

Business Statistics for Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management

TBS60US 100 6 10

Ecotourism ETO60US 100 6 10Tour Operations TOP60US 100 6 10Service Quality Management in Tourism and Hospitality

SQM60US 100 6 10

195

Bachelor in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management (Level 7)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 30 -Level 5 credits: 90 20Level 6 credits: 110 -Level 7 credits: 115 20Minimum total credits required: 345 20

Rationale This qualification meets the ever changing demands of tourists in this dynamic industry. The programme intends to produce a wide number of practitioners such as Customer Service practitioners, Front Office staff personnel, Tourism and hospitality supervisors, Tourism Brand marketers, Tourism policy makers, Tour operators, Events organizers, Airline staff, Sports Coordinators, Lodge supervisors/ Trainee Lodge managers, Parks and Wildlife Management Officers.

PurposeThe main purpose of the Bachelor in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management is to develop graduates with professional knowledge, positive attitudes, practical managerial and entrepreneurial skills as well as ethical values needed to contribute in the management of Travel, Tourism and Hospitality industry in the country. Advances in training in Travel, Tourism, Hospitality and Events management corresponds with the recognition of the need for scientific management of the industry and the need for qualified manpower at all levels due to the enhanced profile of tourism and hospitality industry in the national economy and policy. The programme will not only enable graduates to meet market needs, but also ensure effective management and sustainability of tourism resources for later generations as envisaged by Vision 2030.

Admission Requirements One has to satisfy the minimum admission requirements for entry to degree studies at this University as prescribed under the entry requirements in the IUM General Academic Regulations.

• Grade 12 or equivalent qualification(s), provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including English minimum D normally in not more than three examination sittings with a minimum of 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale.

• A recognised qualification at NQF level 6 or equivalent• Or Mature Age Entry as stipulated in GR 4.1.1• Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the

programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude

196

placement tests as determined by the IUM senate.

Qualification DurationThe Bachelor in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management is conferred after three years of full-time or part-time study in one or more areas of tourism and hospitality concentrations. Each year of study will be divided into two semesters and students are expected to take six courses in each semester. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationUpon successful completion of this qualification holders are able to: • Evaluate the basic principles and theories of Tourism systems as a social phenomenon

and its inter-dependence and inter-relations with other disciplines;• Evaluate knowledge, skills and competencies in Tourism product development, laws

governing tourism businesses, operations management, service delivery, marketing and promotion.

• Develop competent skills in hospitality operations such as housekeeping, front office and tour operations.

• Respond to customer queries, complaints and needs as part of ensuring superior customer service delivery.

• Explain the importance of demand and supply in tourism and hospitality.• Demonstrate the importance of tourism statistics and their collection.• Analyse strategic approaches in parks and wildlife management, eco-tourism,

events management and cultural tourism.• Improve ability to communicate in foreign language in German or French.• Apply technical skills and knowledge in conceptualization, design and execution of

research as a tool for decision making and furthering of academic knowledge and show skills for critical thinking, interpretation and use of research findings;

• Assess attitudes, skills and commitment to develop a career in Travel, Tourism and Hospitality management or motivation to pursue entrepreneurial opportunities in field.

• Develop a business proposal in Hospitality businesses for entrepreneurship purposes.

• Experience the tourism and hospitality industry through job attachments.

Articulation Vertically, the Bachelor in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management grants admission to the Bachelor in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management Honours at NQF Level 8 or any other related qualification at NQF Level 8. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Honours Degree programme. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related business and management qualifications.

197

Credit TransferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting.

Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.

AssessmentCoursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) for the theory-based course attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities such as tests, group activities, assignments (group/ individual), demonstrations and presentations (in a preparation room or laboratory or work station), practical assessments through score sheets, timed observations and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course. Students must score at least 50% in their practical for those courses to qualify to sit for the final examinations.


Whereas for practical courses; namely Housekeeping operations, Food Handling, Health, Safety and Security in Tourism and Hospitality as well as Front Office Operations, Continuous Assessment (CA) will attract 70% of the CA mark from practical work. 30% of CA marks will be attained from the theory. Practical examinations will be set up for

198

the above three courses and examined. 100% of the final mark will be divided as 70% practical and 30 % written examination.

Supplementary ExaminationsA student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.

Teaching Methods/StrategiesStudent-centred approach is adopted; however, the traditional lecture method will be applied in other topics. Students will be expected to make presentations and group discussions are encouraged to simulate case studies. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read and research extensively in each of the subjects.

In the second semester of the third year, the student will have an internship that will last six months. The internship will give the student practical experience, useful recommendation, and a substantial advantage in aligning theory with practice and job placement.

199



Course Title


Mathematics MTH51US 100 5 10

Micro Economics MIE50US 100 5 10Tourism Systems TSY50US 100 5 10Food Handling, Health, and Safety in Tourism and Hospitality

FHS50US 100 5 10

Introduction to Entrepreneurship IEN40US 100 4 10Applied English Language Skills AEL40US 100 4 10


Course Title


Hospitality Operations HLO50US 100 5 10

Basic IT Skills BIT41US 4

Customer Services for Tourism, Hospitality & Events

CST50US 100 5 10

Tourism Geography TGG61US 100 5 10Financial Accounting I FAC51US 100 5 10Principles of Marketing for Tourism, Hospitality & Events

PMT50US 100 5 10

200

YEAR 2 (110 Credits)

SEMESTER 1 (70 Credits)

Course Title


Tourism Operations Management TOM61US 100 6 10

Commercial Food Preparation in the Hospitality Industry

CFP60US 100 6 10

Financial Accounting II FA260US 100 6 10Intermediate Entrepreneurship and Innovation

IEI60US 100 6 10

Macroeconomics: Contribution to Tourism

TME60US 100 6 10

French 1A FR140US 100 4 10German 1A GE140US 4 10


Course Title


International Tourism Operations ITO70US 100 6 10

Business Law BLA61US 100 6 10Ecotourism ETO60US 100 6 15Beverage Services BVS60US 100 6 15MICE Planning MIC60US 100 6 10

French 1B FR150US 100 4 10German 1B GE150US 100 4 10

201



Course Title


Strategic Entrepreneurship for Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management

TAE70US 100 7 10

Research Methodology RME71US 100 7 20Reservation Systems RSY70US 100 7 15Tourism and the Environment TEV71US 100 7 15International Tourism Operations ITO70US 100 7 15Electives (choose one )Strategic Human Resources SHU70US 100 7 10Strategic Management SMN70US 100 7 10SELECT ONE LANGUAGEFrench 2A FR260US 10 7 10German 2A GE260US 10 7 10


Course Title


Compulsory courses

Internship IN470US 400 7 40

202

Bachelor in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management Honours (Level 8)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 6 credits: - 20Level 8 credits: 110 -Minimum total credits required: 110 10

RationaleThe Bachelor in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management Honours is a one-year qualification designed to equip students with knowledge, skills and competencies needed by tourism, hospitality & events business and industry in Namibia and beyond. It is intended for those who have successfully completed their Bachelor in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management Level 7 or others with a similarly credit rated qualification in line with IUM entry requirements and credit transfer. It is also targeted at people currently in employment who aspire to further their studies to NQF Level 8 and increase their relevance and marketability, as well as specialize in particular fields of their choice. The curriculum is designed to equip students with diverse skills (communication in a foreign language, applied research methodology, services marketing strategies, strategic innovation management, events planning & management, sports tourism management, airline management, cultural tourism, parks and wildlife management skills).

PurposeAs the Namibian economy continues growing, the demand for qualified human capital in tourism, hospitality and event supervisory or trainee management roles is fundamental. Thus the purpose of this qualification is to train and equip the human factor which is of importance in tourism.

Who is this Qualification for? This qualification is designed for students who wish to pursue a career in tourism, hospitality and events management in both the private and public sectors or to be entrepreneurs. Through the combination of tourism, hospitality and events core courses and a strong base in management sciences courses plus research. This qualification is structured to stretch and challenge the students to fulfil their true potential and to become defining players in the tourism, hospitality and events field.

Admission /Entry RequirementsThe minimum entry requirement is an appropriate Bachelor in Tourism, Hospitality& Events Management (NQF Level 7) offered by the IUM or any qualification from the NQA recognised institution.

Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the

203

programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the IUM Senate. Qualification DurationThe Bachelor in Tourism, Hospitality& Events Management Honours is conferred after one year of full-time or part-time study in one or more areas of tourism, hospitality& event specialisation and the maximum study period is two years. The year of study will be divided into two semesters and students are expected to take six examinable courses in the first semester and two year courses examinable at the end of the year. The second semester mainly focuses on research methodology and field project in addition to one elective subject. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: • Apply technical skills and knowledge in reviewing relevant literature, identifying

problems, evaluating appropriate research methodology for execution of research as a tool for decision making and furthering of academic knowledge and showing skills for critical thinking, interpretation and use of research findings

• Analyse strategic approaches in Parks and Wildlife management, eco-tourism, events management and cultural tourism

• Demonstrate competencies and ability to communicate in a foreign language either in German or French

• Demonstrate attitudes, skills and commitment expected by industry in pursuing a career in Tourism, Hospitality and Event Management

• Develop a business proposal in Hospitality businesses for entrepreneurship purposes

Articulation Bachelor in Tourism, Hospitality & Event Management Honours grants admissions to Master in Tourism and Hospitality Management offered by IUM or any related qualification at NQF Level 9. Students may also, where applicable, move into other existing Management professional qualifications.

Credit transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

204

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.

Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) for the theory-based course attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities such as tests, group activities, assignments (group/ individual), demonstrations and presentations (in a preparation room or laboratory or work station), practical assessments through score sheets, timed observations and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period.

Final Examinations The final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. Examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally. Taken in this final year of study, the Bachelor in Tourism, Hospitality and Events Management Honour, Research Project is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated to a student by the faculty in order to generate knowledge necessary to complete all the requirements for the award of the qualification.

Each student must independently complete a 10 000 – 15 000 words research project. The research should be original on a topic related to Tourism, Hospitality, and Events Management. The research should have a clearly defined problem statement, a review of the existing literature on the chosen topic, original evidence offered to support research project, consideration of alternative rival hypothesis, and a conclusion with recommendations. Upon completion of writing the research project, the student would be required to present their research findings before a faculty selected project panel.

205


A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits.

Award of the qualification Candidates will be eligible to be awarded the Bachelor Degree in Tourism, Hospitality& Events Management when they have passed all the required courses and successfully completed the Tourism, Hospitality or Events Management project as specified in the relevant qualification regulations and have fulfilled any other additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

Teaching Methods/ Strategy The teaching and learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, practical projects, tests and written assignments.

Year 1 (120 Credits)

Course Title


Semester 1 Compulsory Courses

Cultural Tourism CUT80US 8 10Applied Entrepreneurship Management

AEN80US 8 10

Applied Research Methodology ARM80US 8 10Compulsory Year CoursesServices Marketing Strategies SMS80US 8 10Events Management EVT80US 8 10Semester 2 Compulsory CoursesResearch Project XTP80US 8 30Airlines Management AIR80US 8 10Sports Tourism SPT80US 8 10Wildlife& Parks Management WPM80USelectives: choose 1 languageFrench 2B F2B60US 6 10German 2B G2B60US 6 10

206

Postgraduate Diploma in Events Management (Level 8)


Rationale Events management is a global dynamic business industry. It is an area which has grown rapidly in recent years and has become established as an important element in the promotional mix. This qualification offers opportunities to graduates seeking a change in their career or for those who are currently working in the industry and require further training to enhance their career opportunities. The qualification is designed to provide students with the opportunity to develop practical events manage-ment skills.

The qualification is underpinned by both academic theory and practical aspects in the fields of tourism, leisure and events and will involve students in the application of concepts in industry-related scenarios and realistic simulations. In this way, students will develop and apply the skills of critical evaluation and it is intended that they be-come self-directed, independent, reflexive learners. The course offers an opportunity to combine classroom-based learning with fieldwork activities. Students will therefore be given real events to manage so as to infuse theory into practice and build competitive events management skills.

PurposeThe Postgraduate Diploma in Events Management (Level 8) is designed to develop young Namibians to effectively manage events. The purpose of the qualification is to equip students with the necessary tools and expertise to meet the ever growing demand for quality service in the tourism sector.

Entry RequirementsA recognised Bachelor degree at NQF Level 7 in any discipline or an equivalent qualifi-cation with a minimum one (1) year work experience in the appropriate field.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the qualification is:Fulltime/Part-time mode - Minimum: 1 Year; Maximum: 2 Years.Distance Mode - Minimum: 2 Years; Maximum: 3 Years.

The qualification comprises of semesters, per academic year there are two (2) semes-ters. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

207

Outcomes for whole qualification

Upon successful completion of the Postgraduate Diploma in Event Management, the holder of this qualification is able to:

• Plan, design, and coordinate effective site and facility operations.• Apply the principles of professionalism and ethics to event management.• Create, plan, and implement effective management of tourism and hospitality of

events.• Develop and implement financial initiatives based on event objectives through

methods such as sponsorship programs, grant applications, and fundraising initia-tives.

• Apply the principles of marketing to events.• Apply strategies for effective human resource management to events.• Apply accounting and financial knowledge and skills to the operation of events• Apply business administration skills to the operation of events.

Articulation PossibilitiesVertically, the Postgraduate Diploma in Events Management (Level 8) grants admission to Master in Tourism and Hospitality Level 9 or any other related qualification at NQF Level 9. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Master programme. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related tourism and hospitality qualifica-tions at NQF level 8.

Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit trans-fer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equiv-alent to IUM courses. The awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree program rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qual-ification.

208

Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course require-ments can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit. The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruc-tion at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

Assessment Coursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course (both coursework and practical) to qual-ify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final ExaminationsThe final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. Examiners may, in addition to written examination and practicals, test any candidate orally.

Supplementary ExaminationsA student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supple-mentary examination. A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.

Awarding of the QualificationCandidates will be eligible for the appropriate qualification when they have passed all the required courses specified in the relevant programme regulations and have fulfilled any additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.Teaching Methods/Strategies

Courses will be delivered using blended learning modalities, including lectures, online tutorials, advanced simulations, video and audio conferencing technologies as well as exposure to real practical experiences such as independence celebrations, annual heroes commemorations, national and international conferences, and other public and private

209

functions. Learners must have access to a computer and the Internet. The teaching meth-ods adapted for this programme are student-centred. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read and research extensively in each of the courses.

Course Title NQF Level Credits

Events Management, Planning and Co-ordination 8 15Marketing and Public Relations for Events 8 15Financial Budgeting in Events Management 8 15Business Innovation and Development 8 15Diplomatic and Celebrity Events Management 8 15Event Security Planning 8 15Research Project 8 30Total Credits Required 120

210

211

FACULTY OF HEALTH AND SOCIAL SCIENCES

212

DEPARTMENT OF NURSING AND MIDWIFERY

Bachelor in Nursing Honours Degree – Bnur Hons (NQF Level: 8)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 40 -Level 5 credits: 104 -Level 6 credits: 128 -Level 7 credits: 116 -Level 8 credits: 126 -Minimum total credits required: 514 -

Rationale

The review of Bachelor in Nursing Honours is necessitated by the International University of Management policy on review of its qualifications, as well as the fact that this qualification has reached its scheduled review date and will be submitted in accordance with the National Qualifications Framework (NQF) Regulations for Namibia. The qualification is therefore developed to be in line with NQF requirements, while addressing the capacity developmental needs of the public and private sectors. This qualification is therefore necessary in order to develop expertise required in providing nursing and midwifery care to different patients and clients in the health industry and to respond to national health development priorities. The qualification was approved by Senate of the International University of Management and the Health Professions Councils of Namibia.

PurposeThe purpose of the Bachelor in Nursing Honours degree programme/qualification is to provide students with a comprehensive foundation in the theory and practice of nursing and midwifery. Nursing care has many subfields and this curriculum is designed to ensure that students acquire skills in and well-rounded knowledge of the most critical topics in Nursing and Midwifery Care. A further purpose of the programme is to develop competencies needed by the health industry – public and private, across the full-range of sectors, to achieve our country’s and region’s development goals in health care delivery. The qualification was reviewed to ensure it remains relevant to the expanding health and nursing care needs expressed by the Ministry of Health and Social Services and other stakeholders. It is in this context that the Faculty of Health and Social Sciences at the International University of Management is determined to continue offering the Bachelor in Nursing Honours degree programme/qualification.

213

Admission RequirementsOne has to satisfy the minimum admission requirement for entry to degree studies at this University as prescribed under the entry requirements in the International University of Management General Academic Regulations.

i. The student should hold a valid National Senior Secondary Certificate (NSSC) at higher evel or equivalent. ii. Prospective students should obtain a minimum of 25 points based on a scale of five subjects. English is a compulsory subject with a D symbol or better. Other compulsory subjects are Biology, Physical Science and Mathematics. iii. Mature age entry for Bachelor in Nursing Honours is 3-4 years’ experience in nursing and midwifery (Enrolled Nurse/Midwife) in a clinic or hospital with 18 points.iv. Meeting of these requirements will not automatically guarantee an acceptance into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests as determined by the International University of Management Senate and Faculty of Health Science.

Qualification DurationThe programme will be offered over four years; the maximum period of study six (6) years.

Outcomes of the whole qualificationUpon successful completion of this qualification, holders are able to:• Provide holistic nursing care across lifespan, utilizing the scientific nursing process.• Demonstrate fundamental knowledge base of the discipline of nursing and

midwifery by applying the basic ethical, moral, legal and professional principles as a framework, during their interaction with individuals of all age groups, their families and the multidisciplinary team.

• Apply knowledge from the biological sciences in solving problems/needs of individuals of all age groups in a variety of health care settings.

• Demonstrate a sound knowledge of the scientific principles of preventive, promotive, curative and rehabilitative health in providing care to individuals with health needs

• Demonstrate efficiency in gathering, analysis, synthesis and evaluation of health related information using applicable research methods.

• Apply research findings in nursing and midwifery practice.• Apply health service management principles at a unit level.• Demonstrate a personal and professional sense of work ethics and self-directed

learning in her/his own development.• Communicate effectively verbally and in writing when interacting with members of

health care professions and the public, and• Provide sexual, reproductive, maternal and newborn, child and adolescent health

care services effectively.

214

Credit Systems Credits are based on learning hours per subject. One (1) credit equates ten (10) notional hours (learning). The general guideline for teaching and learning time per course, based on the 10 hours per credit approach, is as per the table below. An example of a course with 15 credits was used to determine the notional hours.

Item Delivery Strategy

Summary of activities % Time Allocated

Hours (an example of a course with16 credit

Credits

1 •Lectures•Seminars•Tutorials•Work-shops

Tutorial support includes feedback on assignments and may vary by college according to local needs and wishes.

25% 40 4

2 Directed learning

Advance reading and preparation / Class preparation / Background reading / Group study / Portfolio / Diary etc.

25% 40 4

3 Self-man-aged learn-ing

Working through the course text and completing assignments as required will take up the bulk of the learning time. In addition students are expected to engage with the tutor and other students and to undertake further read-ing using the web and/or libraries

50% 70 7

100% 150 15ArticulationThe Bachelor in Nursing Honours grants permission to the Post Graduate Diploma in Paediatric Nursing at NQF Level 8 as well as a Master’s programme offered at NQF Level 9 programme offered at a higher institution provided that relevant permission is obtained.

215

Credit transferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalences in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. To be awarded these credits, International University of Management will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to International University of Management courses. Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is out-dated more than 5 years.

Candidates from other institutions or programmes will be treated on a case-by-case basis depending on the relevant curricula followed at the previous institution or programme. Credit recognition of another institution or programme’s courses can only be extended up to 50% of the credits needed for the qualification.

AssessmentsCoursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the overall assessment of the course. This will come from a minimum of three assessment activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during each semester. Students must score at least 50% in each course to be eligible to write final examination in the course. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course. Students must score at least 50% in their practical courses to be eligible to write final examination in the course.

Final ExaminationsThe final examination accounts for 60% of the overall assessment of the course. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. Practical examinations will be set up for the practical courses in this programme. Examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally.

Supervisors will be allocated to students to supervise the research projects. The projects must be completed by the set date. Projects will be marked by the supervisors and will be externally moderated.

To pass a course, a student must obtain a composite mark of at least 50% in that course. This must include a minimum average continuous assessment mark of 50% and a minimum examination mark (subminimum) of 36% in that course.


216

A student who fails the research project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. Teaching methods/strategiesTeaching and learning will be based on the experiential learning theory mostly in clinical nursing education while the constructivist theory will be applied mostly during theoretical instruction. Therefore, the student’s experience during the programme will feature prominently in the teaching-learning encounter. Experiential learning allows for practical and valid assessment methodologies for assessing what the student has learned from a previous or current experience. Reflection is an important concept in this specific theory that will allow students to grasp the meaning of their clinical and classroom experiences. The model provides an interaction between the student and others that results in the ability to critically examine nursing issues. The constructivist teaching is based on the belief that learning occurs while learners are actively involved in a process of learning, meaning and knowledge construction as opposed to passively receiving information.

A student-centred approach, applying adult education principles that are characterized by: self-directed learning; problem-based learning; fieldwork and projects; lectures; individual and group activities; as well as discussion groups.

In line with the philosophical and theoretical underpinnings of the curriculum, teaching strategies that promote active learning, problem solving and critical thinking will be used. These include small group discussions, class presentations, role plays, debates and lectures. For clinical nursing education it will be demonstrations, reflective sessions, case studies and nursing rounds.

The degree will be offered in collaboration with the other faculties within the university.

Quality Assurance Commitment is made to ensure that the courses remain relevant, current and provide students with a high quality learning experience. An earnest effort is made to ensure meeting the course quality assurance requirements is a continuous process through incorporating regular monitoring, review, benchmarking, and improvement. An external evaluator will evaluate the qualification in terms of course content, teaching methods, course resources and assessments.

Quality shall also be assured through:• Accreditation and registration on the National Qualifications Framework (NQF) by

the Namibia Qualifications Authority (NQA)• Engagement with relevant stakeholders from the industry• Benchmarking and regular review of policies, curriculums, delivery strategies and

assessments• Regular monitoring of lecture activities and staff development

217

• Student will be asked to complete evaluation sheets for each course studied• A dual performance evaluation system where lecturers and students appraise each other• Moderation (both internal and external) of continuous assessments and final

examinations.• Review of curriculum every fourth year after consultation with stakeholders.

Qualification StructureYear 1 (140 Credits)

Semester 1 (22 credits)

Course Title

Course Code Hours Credits NQF Level

Introduction to the Philosophy of Care

IPC0D1 2 8 4

Introduction to IT for Nursing Practitioners

ITN0D1 2 8 5

Communication Skills CSK0D1 2 8 4


Course Title


Introduction to Midwifery IMW0D1 2 8 4Introduction to Psychology for Nurses

IPS0D1 2 8 5

Critical Thinking Skills CTH0D1 2 8 4Year courses (60 credits)Course Title Course Code Hours Credit NQF

levelNursing Science I: Foundations of Nursing

FNU0D1 3 16 5

Community Health Nursing CMI0D1 2 12 4Biological Sciences: Applied Anatomy and Physics

IAN0D1 3 16 5

Clinical Nursing I CNI0D1 3 16 5

218

Year 2 (124 Credits)


Course Title


Pharmacology for Nurses PHR0D2 3 12 6


Course Title


Microbiology for Nurses MB10D2 3 12 6Year courses (60 credits)Course Title Course Code Hours Credit NQF

levelNursing Science II: Medical & Surgical Nursing

MD20D2 3 20 6

Midwifery I MW10D2 3 20 5Community Health Nursing I CM20D2 3 20 5Biological Sciences: Applied Physiology and Biochemistry

PHB0D2 3 20 6

Clinical Nursing II CN20D1 3 20 6


Year courses (136 credits)

Course Title


Nursing Science III;Medical & Surgical Nursing

MD30D3 4 20 7

Midwifery II MW10D3 4 20 6Community Health Nursing II CM20D3 4 24 6Research Methods in Health Sciences

HRE0D3 4 24 7

Clinical Nursing III CN30D3 4 24 7Mental Health Nursing MEH0D3 4 24 7

219


Year courses (150 credits)

Course Title


Nursing Science IV: Specialized Units

NS40D4 4 24 8

Midwifery II MW30D4 4 24 7Professional Practice & Ethics in Nursing

PPE0D4 4 24 8

Research Project XRP0D4 4 30 8Health Service Management (Unit Level)

HES0D4 4 24 8

Clinical Nursing IV CN40D4 4 24 8

220

Certificate in Pharmacist’s Assistant (NQF level 5)Compulsory Elective

Level 4 credits: 109 -Level 5 credits: 107 -Minimum total credits required: 216 -

Rationale The Qualification in Pharmacist’s Assistant is developed to provide optimal pharmaceutical care and services to the Namibian society. Since sufficient and efficient human resources are needed, as outlined in the Development Plan VET Sector (2016 – 2020), the pharmacist`s assistant has been identified as one of the categories of human resources that are needed to assist the qualified pharmacist in his or her role. The pharmacist’s assistant executes procedures and activities within their scope of practice according to the Pharmacy Act No 9 of 2004.

The qualification is intended for persons who wish to pursue careers in the public and private pharmaceutical industry in Namibia.

PurposeThe qualification is aimed at grade 12 and mature age learners already employed full-time by a pharmacy and are willing to continue their education and training in the field of pharmacy. The pharmacist’s assistant has been identified as one of the key priority areas for training in Namibia. The Skills Development Plan for VET Sector (2016 – 2020) conducted by the Namibian Training Authority highlights the need for capacity building in the pharmaceutical industry to promote competency in the field of pharmacy.

Competence in all areas of the pharmaceutical industry is becoming increasingly specialised as well as professional. Therefore, the content of this qualification has been developed in consultation with the Pharmacy Council of Namibia and other pharmaceutical stakeholders to confirm that the content is appropriate and consistent with current practice.

Upon completion of the certificate the student will be able to register as a pharmacist’s assistant with the Pharmacy Council of Namibia.

Qualification duration It is a one-year course that will be offered over a period of two years.

Outcomes for the whole qualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:• Demonstrate an understanding of the basic fundamental concepts, theories and

frameworks of the pharmaceutical sector in Namibia;

221

• Integrate knowledge of pharmacy to assist with the manufacturing of non-sterile or scheduled substances according to a formula and standard operating procedures approved by the responsible pharmacist

• Implement the distribution and control of stock for schedule 1 to 4 medicines or other schedule substances

• Communicate effectively with patients, clients and supervisors by using correct pharmaceutical vocabularies

• Provide information to individuals in order to promote health• Practice pharmacy within the ethical and moral codes of the profession and within

the legal framework of the Pharmacy Act No. 9 2004.

Credit systemReference is made to the internationally acceptable formula: one (1) credit equates ten (10) notional hours (learning). The general guideline for teaching and learning time per subjects are as follows:

Lectures - tutorial support that includes feedback on assignments, Self- directed learning - working through study material and completing assignments and working on the internet to undertake further reading.Practicals - working in the pharmacy under supervision of the tutor dealing with all the aspects of medication prescriptions, client care, mixing of substances, stock control, customer care.Assessments - formative and summative assessments on assignments in theory and practice

Articulation possibilitiesCertificate in Pharmacist’s Assistant level 5 can grant admission to the Diploma in Pharmaceutical Technician, NQF level 6 or higher and, where applicable, move into other existing professional pharmacy-related qualifications.

Credit transferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or other qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation or recognition of prior learning.To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combinations of courses as equivalent to IUM courses.

Special ArrangementsThe qualification will be offered by IUM and the Pharmaceutical Society of Namibia through a cooperative agreement.

Assessment and Assessment Strategies

222

AssessmentContinuous assessment is done for each module. This will come from activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. Students must at least score 50%. If the continuous assessment mark is below 50%, the student is not yet competent and has to rewrite and repeat activities of the specific module until competent (50%).

Final examinationThere will be one final examination. Summative assessments will be done after the completion of each model. The pass mark for a module is 50%. Students must pass all the modules before the certificate can be awarded.

Assessment toolsDifferent assessment tools will be used to assess the students - for example assignments, simulated situations, written and oral tests, demonstrations and portfolio compilation. The pharmacist tutor will provide guidance to students. The main lecturer will provide online support to students during this time.A tutor pharmacist is a registered pharmacist who is registered with the Pharmacy Council as such.

Modes of Teaching and LearningThe course will be offered fulltime on a block release system approach. Theoretical teaching will be done on a block system. During the block time the teaching and learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial sessions and activities, group discussions, role play, demonstrations, case studies and simulation. After a block session the students will go back to their workplace (pharmacy) and under the supervision of a registered pharmacist (tutor) do their practicals. The theoretical and practical part of the course will be done with the assistance of the Pharmaceutical Society.

Quality Assurance RequirementCommitment is made to ensure that the courses remain relevant, current and provide students with high quality teaching and learning experience. An effort is made to ensure meeting the course quality assurance requirements and is a continuous process through incorporating regular monitoring, review, benchmarking and improvement. An external evaluator will periodically evaluate the qualification in terms of course content, teaching methods, course resources and assessments.

223

Course Code HRS Credit NQF Level

Year 1Semester 1Principles of Pharmaceutical Health Care PHH40US 12 4

Customer Service CSV40US 16 4Semester 2Pharmaceutical Manufacturing Skills PMF40US 16 4Personal and Professional Development PDV40US 12 4Year coursesPharmaceutical Stock Control PSC40US 24 4Total Credits 80

Year 2Semester 1Information Communication and Technology ICM50US 12 5Pharmaceutical Mathematics PHM50US 16 5Semester 2Communication and Patient Counselling CMP50US 16 5Year coursesWorkplace Safety WPS50US 24 5Pharmacology and Disease Profiles PDP50US 32 5Total credits 100TOTAL credits 180

224

Postgraduate Diploma in Paediatric Nursing (NQF Level: 8)

RationaleThe Postgraduate Diploma in Paediatric Nursing (level 8) is designed for registered nurses working in hospitals and clinics and are interested in developing their knowledge and skills concerning the nursing and care for the sick child (Paediatric Nursing). Students who register for this qualification will gain a significant level of preventative, curative and rehabilitative knowledge and skills in paediatric nursing. Paediatric Nursing is a specialised field in nursing and students who complete the qualification successfully will be able to execute advanced procedures within their scope of practice on children. This qualification is an urgent need in Namibia because according to the Demographic and Health Survey of Namibia in 2014 one (1) in every twenty six (26) Namibian children die before the age of one year, and one in every nineteen (19) do not survive to their fifth birthday. Taking these statistics into consideration and in order to provide optimal paediatric care and services to children, it is necessary to educate and train registered nurses in the specialist field of Paediatric Nursing.

PurposeThe Postgraduate Diploma in Paediatric Nursing (Level 8) is designed to provide optimal paediatric care and service to children. It is necessary to educate and train nurses at postgraduate level in order to be available and to assist with the nursing care of sick children throughout Namibia. Nurses should be well equipped with lifesaving skills to promote healthy child care and to prevent childhood mortality throughout the country. The qualification will therefore produce graduates who will make a positive contribution to health care of children in Namibia.

The qualification is concerned with the education and training of nurses who are already registered and who practice as registered nurses in the private and public health care institutions. Students are expected to acquire the following skills: critical thinking, leadership, interpersonal communication, psychomotor and affective skills. These skills are required by employers of health care facilities to be applied to complex paediatric issues.

The qualification is offered at an institution which is accredited by the Nursing Council of Namibia. The holder of this qualification is a specialist resource person and a change agent with advanced knowledge and skills to put into practice and a nurse consultant for the multidisciplinary team on paediatric nursing care. This person can practise in the following institutions: primary healthcare, district, regional healthcare facilities, paediatric wards in hospitals public and private, and educational institutions normally at managerial level.

225

Admission/entry requirementsThe entry requirements to this qualification shall be:• Student must be in possession of a Bachelor Degree in Nursing (Level 7 or 8) or a

Diploma in Comprehensive Nursing and Midwifery Science (4 years) Level 7.• Registered as a nurse and midwife with the Nursing Council of Namibia.• Minimum of 2 years’ experience as a registered nurse and midwife.• Recognition of prior learning will be considered where applicable.

Qualification durationThe duration of the qualification is one (1) year.

Outcomes of the whole qualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:• Apply clinical leadership skills in care of children in the paediatric field• Demonstrate management skills in a child care unit within the framework of the

multidisciplinary team• Implement comprehensive paediatric nursing care using the scientific approach• Develop and implement standards of paediatric care to ensure quality and safe care• Integrate legal aspects and ethical principles during daily practices• Demonstrate accountability and moral reasoning skills for independent clinical

decisions made regarding to paediatric care• Negotiate and provide professional support to parents and families• Evaluate health care outcomes of children and make innovative suggestions to

improve care where necessary• Collaborate with the multi-disciplinary team members and refer children to relevant

organisational services• Participate in research activities (fieldwork), prepare the report and publish the

findings.

Credit SystemReference is made to the internationally acceptable formula; one (1) credit equates ten (10) notional hours (learning). The teaching and learning time and the credits are indicated in a summary below;

The total notional hours for the qualification amount to 1200 hours and this will be divided as follows;

Theoretical teaching: will be a total of 480 hours and will include lectures, discussions, tutorials, portfolio development and will be covered with 16 hours per week for 30 academic weeks.

Directed learning: Advanced reading and preparation for class.

226

Self-managed learning: Practical teaching hours will be a total of 720 hours and will be covered with 24 hours per week for 30 academic weeks. Practical sessions will include completing assignments, feedback on assignments, doing case studies, practical procedures, demonstrations and more reading. This part will take up the bulk of the learning time.

Articulation possibilitiesThe Postgraduate Diploma in Paediatric Nursing (Level 8) grants admission to a Master’s Degree (Level 9) in different aspects of paediatric nursing.


To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses of combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. The awarded credits are governed by the IUM rules and courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years. Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with the Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credits for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

AssessmentContinuous assessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and /or oral tests, assignments (group/individual), and practical evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period.Students must score a mean of 50% in all the coursework (theory and practice) to be allowed to sit for the final written and practical examinations.Semester courses will be finally assessed at the end of each semester while year courses will be finally assessed at the end of the academic year.

Final Examination The final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. Examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any student orally.

227

Supplementary examinations

A student who fails a subject with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails a subject with an overall mark of 39 % and below will be required to repeat the same subject until the subject is passed.

Methods of Teaching and LearningThe teaching and learning processes will be offered through lectures, tutorial activities and discussions, collaborative group tasks, demonstrations, case studies, practical projects, and written assignments. Practicals will be taught in hospitals, clinics and simulation.

Quality AssuranceCommitment is made to ensure that the qualification offered remains relevant, current and provides students with a high quality of teaching and learning experiences. To ensure meeting the course quality assurance requirements is a continuous process through incorporating regular monitoring, review, benchmarking and improvement. An external evaluator will periodically evaluate the qualification in terms of course content, teaching methods, course resources and assessments.

YEAR 1Course Code

COURSE TITLE Status Semester NQF Level

Cred-its

CHC80PS Maternal and Child Health Care Services

Compulsory 1 8 8

CPN80PS Communication In Pae-diatric Nursing

Compulsory 2 8 8

CFH80PY Child And Family Health

Compulsory JA 8 16

RME90PY Research Methodology Compulsory JA 8 24APC80PY Anatomy And Physiol-

ogy: Capita Selecta For Children

Compulsory JA 8 16

PNS80PY Paediatric Nursing Sci-ence

Compulsory JA 8 24

PAC80PY Paediatric Clinical Prac-tice

Compulsory JA 8 24

228

DEPARTMENT OF HIV/AIDS MANAGEMENT

Diploma in HIV/AIDS Management (Level 6)


RationaleHIV remains a leading cause of adult morbidity and mortality in Namibia, which continues to have one of the highest HIV prevalence rates in the world according to the recent Surveillance Report. Furthermore, the attainment of Vision 2030 requires the creation of a knowledge based economy. The implementation of a knowledge based economy requires public health practitioners who are knowledgeable, skilled and innovative in all aspects of public health.

The ever increasing regional and global demand for qualified personnel includes the demand for practice-oriented experts in public health who are able to make a difference in any dynamic firm in the world is confirmed by consultations with various stakeholders in both the public and private sectors of Namibia.

PurposeThe Diploma in HIV/AIDS Management (Level 6) is designed for professionals seeking depth in the chosen career with greater public health responsibilities. Its contents include materials and techniques that are consistent with modern principles and best practices, providing knowledge and skills that have immediate application in the real world of work. The qualification aims to empower people who are involved in practical public health activities with the capacity to further develop their career in public health. The qualification provides practice-oriented education for high level public health service providers with skills that would enable graduates to succeed in any public health care settings in Southern African region and beyond.

The qualification will also equip students with effective working knowledge of the analytical tools, programming and management concepts used in public, corporate and NGO sector as well as grounding them in the practical management skills required in organisation or community activities.

Admission Requirements Students will be admitted if they hold the Certificate in HIV/AIDS Management Level 5 or equivalent.

229

Qualification DurationThe study period for this programme is:Minimum: 2 Years.Maximum: 4 Years

The programme comprises two (2) semesters per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:• Organise and effectively manage related public health and HIV/AIDS projects,

workshops, seminars, and training programmes for local communities and workplaces on prevention, voluntary testing and counselling both in the public and private sector

• Demonstrate an understanding of HIV/AIDS policy and Strategic Plan/Framework and procedures in place to support the Vision 2030 program components relating to health.

• Apply the acquired counselling skills to both the infected and affected.

ArticulationStudent who possesses the Diploma in HIV/AIDS Management will articulate to the 3rd year of the Bachelor in HIV/AIDS Management Level 7.

Credit transferAny credit recognition and credit transfer from other qualifications are granted for qualifications from accredited institutions. Internal students that apply for advanced standing or credit accumulation or credit transfer will have their cases considered by the relevant faculty.

Students from outside IUM will have their cases considered by the relevant faculty. Credit from outside institutions may be awarded up to fifty percent of total credits for any qualification conducted by IUM. Appeals may be submitted to Senate.

AssessmentCourse work/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprises of the part time and distance learning mode. Contact hours for distance learning mode are face-to- face encounters on monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays such as Easter break.

230

The following are the methods of delivery:•Face-to-face:Lectureanddiscussions,•Seminars/publiclecture•Tutorials•Workshops•Self-managedlearning

TOTAL CREDITS 191



Course Title

Course Code

Notional Hours

NQF Level Credits

Compulsory Courses Intermediate Entrepreneurship and Innovation

IEI60US 100 5 10

Epidemiology: The Basic Science of Public Health

EPI50US 100 5 10

Community Based Care & Support II CB261US 120 6 12Health Economics and HIV/ AIDS HEC60US 120 6 12


Course Title

Course Code Notional Hours

NQF Level Credits

Compulsory Courses Counselling Practicum COP60US 150 5 15

Leadership Development in HIV/ AIDS Management

LHM60US 120 5 12

Nutrition and Wellbeing in HIV/AIDS Management

HNW60US 120 6 12

231



Course Title

Course Code

Notional Hours

NQF Level Credits

Compulsory Courses Networking and Partnerships NAP61US 100 6 12

Corporate Governance and HIV/ AIDS

CGH60US 100 6 12

Health and Wellness HAW60US 120 6 13Policy and Legal Frameworks in HIV/ AIDS

PLH60US 120 6 12


Course Title


NQF Level Credits

Compulsory Courses Health Systems and HIV/AIDS Management

HSH60US 120 6 12

Occupational Safety, Health and HIV/AIDS

OHH60US 120 6 13

Public Health Practices in HIV/AIDS Management

PHP60US 120 6 12

Physical Therapy and HIV/AIDS

HPT60US 120 6 12

232

Bachelor of HIV/AIDS Management (NQF Level: 7)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 40 -Level 5 credits: 95 -Level 6 credits: 118 -Level 7 credits: 110 20Minimum total credits required: 363 10

RationaleThe attainment of Vision 2030 requires the creation of a knowledge based economy. The implementation of a knowledge based economy requires public health practitioners who are knowledgeable, skilled and innovative in all aspects of public health. The National Human Resource Plan for 2010-2025 (pg.28) states that the impact of HIV/AIDS is a challenge as well as a threat of decreased investments in the education of Namibia. The Bachelor in HIV/AIDS Level Management degree was developed in this context.

PurposeThe Bachelor in HIV/AIDS Management Level 7 aims to develop a conceptual understanding of HIV/AIDS and of how society has framed this disease, its historical background, and the social, legal, political and ethical issues associated with it. The qualification is designed for professionals seeking a career transition with greater public health responsibilities especially in the area of creating an awareness of the social and psychological implications of HIV/AIDS for people living with HIV and their families, communities and support systems. Furthermore, the holders of this qualification will be able to demonstrate an understanding of the implications of the epidemic HIV/AIDS for society by describing infection control measures, groups at greatest risk, contact tracing, education, economics, community resources, the stress of care-giving, and the prospects for the future.

Admission RequirementsHold a Namibia Senior Secondary Certificate (NSSC) Ordinary or Higher Level with passes in 5 subjects; or equivalent, with a minimum of D grade in English Language, and should total twenty five points or more; OR through Mature Age Entry as stipulated in GR 4.1.1/prior learning with three years relevant experience in various fields in public health or related fields. Achievement of these requirements will not automatically guarantee admission into the programme. This can only be achieved after successful interview and/or aptitude placement tests at the IUM.

Holders of Diploma in HIV/AIDS Management (Level6) or its equivalent.

233

Note: If in possession of a foreign qualification, submit an NQA Evaluation report of their foreign qualifications to the IUM for consideration.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the programme is:Minimum: 3 Years.Maximum: 5 Years.The programme comprises of two (2) semesters per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: • Implement programmes aimed at improving the conditions of those that are

infected and affected in order to enhance the quality of their lives.• Design and implement long term strategies to achieve the objectives of HIV /AIDS

and Health Management programs in the public, private and NGO sector.• Apply the acquired skills to develop expertise in public health and HIV/AIDS.• Apply the standards of precautionary and preventive measures while giving first aid• Explain behaviour change and communication theories and models.• Explain and differentiate the quantitative and qualitative methods used in the study

of Health Communication.• Define and analyse essential terms related to social network concepts and analytic

approaches.• Demonstrate skills in planning a health behaviour change and communication in

HIV and AIDS programmes. • Examine the consequences of health literacy deficits on HIV/AIDS-related

behaviours and results.• Discuss the principles of corporate governance and HIV/AIDS.• Explain the roles of governance structures, develop governance frameworks and

implement the Policy and legal Frameworks in HIV/AIDS.

ArticulationA student who holds a Bachelor in HIV/AIDS Management will be able to articulate to IUM’s Bachelor in HIV/AIDS Management Honours Level 8 or any other related qualification at Level 8.

Credit transferAny credit recognition and credit transfer from other qualifications are granted for qualifications from accredited institutions. Internal students that apply for advanced standing or credit accumulation or credit transfer will have their cases considered by the relevant faculty. Students from outside IUM will have their cases considered by the relevant faculty. Credit from outside institutions may be awarded up to fifty per cent

234

of total credits for any qualification conducted by IUM. Appeals may be submitted to Senate.

AssessmentCoursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course /coursework to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Practical Assessment: Students will be required to do practical assessments during internship and counselling skills practicum during the second and third years. It will contribute to HIV/AIDS management, health and social sciences studies credits. The Practical Assessment will be part of the HIV/AIDS, health and social sciences modules and some tools will be used to assess students’ practical skills and experience in the work environment. The expectations and implications of marking practical skills in a variety of contexts such as workshops, work placements or industry settings are also investigated and will be part of the continuous assessment. Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprise of the full time, part time and distance learning mode. Contact hours for distance learning mode are face-to- face encounters on monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays such as Easter break.

The following are the methods of delivery:•Face-to-face:Lectureanddiscussions,•Seminars/publiclecture•Tutorials•Workshops•Self-managedlearning

235

YEAR 1: 125 ( 363 credits)


Course Title

Course Code

Notional Hours

NQF Level Credits

Communicable and Non-Communicable Diseases

CND50US 100 5 10

Applied English Language Skills AEL40US 100 4 10Epidemiology: The Basic Science of Public Health

EPI50US 100 5 10

Counselling Skills CSL51US 100 5 10The Global Impact of HIV/AIDS GIH50US 100 5 10Introduction to Entrepreneurship IEN40US 100 4 10


Course Title

Course Code

Notional Hours

NQF Level Credits

Complementary and Alternative Medicine (CAM)

100 5 10

Basic IT skills 100 4 10Counselling Practicum 100 5 15Community Based Care & Support I 100 5 10First Aid and HIV/AIDS 100 5 10Health Communication Skills 100 4 10

236



Course Title


NQF Level Credits

Networking and Partnerships NAP61US 120 6 12

Corporate Governance and HIV/ AIDS

CGH60US 120 6 12

Policy and Legal Frameworks in HIV/ AIDS

PLH60US 120 6 12

Community Based Care & Support II

CB261US 120 6 12


IEI60US 120 6 10


Course Title

Course Code

Notional Hours

NQF Level Credits

Leadership Development in HIV/ AIDS Management

LHM60US 120 6 12

Nutrition and Wellbeing in HIV/ AIDS Management

HNW60US 120 6 12

Health Economics and HIV/ AIDS HEC60US 120 6 12Public Health Practices in HIV/AIDS Management

PHP60US 120 6 12

Health Systems and HIV/AIDS Management

HSH60US 120 6 12

237



Course Title

Course Code

Notional Hours

NQF Level Credits

Research Methodology (Year-long Course)

RME71US 200 7 20

Sociology of HIV/AIDS SOH70US 150 7 15Information Systems in Public Health

IPH70US 150 7 15

Strategic Entrepreneurship SEN70US 100 7 10Quality Improvement in Public Health

QPH70US 150 7 15

SEMESTER 2( 45 credits)

Course Title

Course Code

Notional Hours

NQF Level Credits

Project Management PRH60US 150 7 15

Internship IN270US 200 7 20Electives : (choose one)Family life Education FLE70US 150 7 10Stress Management STM70US 100 7 10

238

Bachelor of HIV/AIDS Management Honours (NQF Level: 8)


RationaleThe attainment of Vision 2030 requires the creation of a knowledge based economy. The implementation of a knowledge based economy requires public health practitioners who are knowledgeable, skilled and innovative in all aspects of public health. The National Human Resource Plan for 2010-2025 (pg.28) states that the impact of HIV/AIDS is a challenge as well as a threat of decreased investments in the education of Namibia. The Bachelor in HIV/AIDS Honours Level Management degree was developed in this context.

The ever increasing regional and global demand for qualified personnel includes the demand for practice-oriented experts in public health who are able to make a difference in any dynamic firm in the world.

PurposeThe Bachelor Honours in HIV/AIDS Management (level 8) aims to develop a broad-based practical understanding of the complexity and multi-dimensionality of the evolving phenomenon known as HIV/AIDS as a paradigm for the relationship between disease, society, and public policy. The qualification aims to empower people who are involved in practical public health activities with the capacity to further develop their career in public health.

Admission RequirementsStudents will be admitted if they hold the Bachelor in HIV/AIDS Management Level 7 or any equivalent.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the programme is:Minimum: 1 Years.Maximum: 2 Years.The programme comprises of two (2) semesters per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the Bachelor Degree/Honours Qualification

Holders of this qualification are able to: • Conduct research on HIV/AIDS and related communicable and opportunistic

diseases.• Analyse and implement the current HIV/AIDS and other communicable and

239

opportunistic diseases awareness and prevention programmes. • Prepare reports and coordinate HIV/AIDS Management programmes within

organizations.• Create a comprehensive response framework on HIV/AIDS and related

communicable and opportunistic diseases.• Apply the acquired skills to discuss the relationship and distinctions between law,

ethics, and health• Identify and describe the inalienable fundamental rights to which a person is

inherently entitled to as a human being.• Apply strategic, organised, and interdisciplinary knowledge, skills, and competencies

essential in HIV/AIDS management and public health services• Analyse the different human societies and cultures and their development vis-à-vis

HIV/AIDS.

Credit TransferAny credit recognition and credit transfer from other qualifications are granted for qualifications from accredited institutions. Internal students that apply for advanced standing or credit accumulation or credit transfer will have their cases considered by the relevant faculty.

Students from outside IUM will have their cases considered by the relevant faculty. Credit from outside institutions may be awarded up to fifty per cent of total credits for any qualification conducted by IUM. Appeals may be submitted to Senate.

ArticulationStudents who hold the Bachelor Degree in HIV/AIDS Management Honours will articulate to the IUM’s Master in HIV/AIDS Management Level 9 or any other qualification at NQF Level 9.

AssessmentCoursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations.

Practical Assessment: Students are expected to conduct research projects in the second semester.

Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprises of the part time and distance learning mode. Contact hours for distance learning mode are face-to- face encounters on monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays such as Easter break.

240

Lecture Delivery Strategies:The following common lecture delivery strategies shall be used depending on the lecturer:•Centralclasspresentation(PowerPointandchalk-talk)bylecturer.•Centralclasspresentations(PowerPointandchalk-talk)bystudents.•Lecturerledclassdiscussion•Individualandgroupexercises•Caseanalysis(whereapplicable).


Semester 1: course ( 74 credits)

Course Title


Social Anthropology SAN80US 160 8 16

Strategic Management (for HIV/AIDS)

SMH80US 160 8 16

Research Project XHA81UY 320 8 32Applied Entrepreneurship Management

AEN80US 100 8 10

Semester 2: course (64 credits)

Course Title


Human Rights and HIV/ AIDS HRH80US 160 8 16

Monitoring and Evaluation in HIV/AIDS Management

HME80US 160 8 16

Health Law and Ethics HLE80US 160 16Electives : (choose one)Public Health Approaches to HIV/AIDS

PHA80US 160 8 16

The Tools of Public Health Practice TPH80US 160 8 16

241

DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND WELLNESS STUDIES

Certificate in Health and Wellness Studies (NQF Level: 5)


RationaleThe Certificate in Health and Wellness Studies (level 5) has been developed in response to the need for a healthy Namibian nation as envisaged in Vision 2030.

PurposeThe purpose of this qualification is to train students to acquire professional knowledge and skills of healthy lifestyles .This qualification enables the students to learn the fundamental principles, concepts, and skills applied to health education, health promotion, and disease prevention. It further trains students with skills to assist people to improve the patient’s behaviour by alleviating the impact of lifestyle diseases and conditions such as cancer, diabetes, hypertension and obesity in order to further promote healthy ways of life.

Admission RequirementsApplicants should meet the following requirements: -Hold a Namibia Senior Secondary Certificate Higher (NSSCH) or Higher International General Certificate for Secondary Education (HIGCSE) and or in four subjects with 1- 4 grades, with a minimum of 20 points or more.

ORHold a Grade 12 Namibia Senior Secondary Certificate Ordinary (NSSCO) or International General Certificate for Secondary Education (IGCSE) with a minimum of E symbol in English Language totalling 20 points or more.ORA minimum of 20 points from a combination of NSSCH/HIGCSE and NSSCO/IGCSE.OREnter through flexible learning path – Mature Age Entry as stipulated in GR 4.1.1

/prior learning. ORThe equivalent of any of the above as determined by the IUM Senate.

242


The study period for the programme is a Minimum of 1 Year and Maximum: of 2 Years.The programme comprises 2 semesters, i.e. two (2) semesters per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:

• Identify and implement individual components of health and wellness programmes• Discuss and determine appropriate solutions to operational problems in programme

management. • Demonstrate skills of promoting healthy lifestyles and health care programmes.

ArticulationVertically, the Certificate in Health and Wellness grants admission to Diploma in Health and Wellness. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Diploma programme. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related Certificate qualifications. IUM courses articulate from qualification to qualification as per the statement in course contents. The IUM will decide if and how course work from qualifications from other institutions will articulate with IUM courses. Appeals may be submitted to Senate. This Certificate of Health and Wellness Studies (Level 5) will articulate to the Diploma of Health and Wellness Studies (Level 6).

Credit transferCandidates from other institutions or programmes will be treated on a case-by-case basis depending on the relevant curricula followed at the previous institution or programme. Credit recognition of another institution or programme’s courses can only be extended up to 50% of the credits needed for the qualification.

AssessmentCoursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.


243


Teaching methods/strategiesThis qualification will be offered through the following modes of delivery:•Face-to-face•DesignThinking(CaseMethod)•Self-learning•SocialMedia•OnlineLearningToolsThe degree will be offered in collaboration with the other faculties within the university.



Course Title


Compulsory Courses

Mathematics MTH51US 5 10

Applied English Language Skills AEL40US 4 10Critical Thinking skills CTS51US 5 10Introduction to Entrepreneurship IEN40US 4 10

SEMESTER 2 (54 credits

Course Title


Compulsory Courses

Basic IT Skills BIT41US 5 10

Communication Skills GCS41US 4 10

Introduction to Health and Wellness IHW50US 5 10

Introduction to Counseling ICO50US 5 10Introduction to Occupational Health and safety

IOH50US 5 10

YEAR COURSEAnatomy and Physiology HAP50UY 5 24

244

Diploma in Health and Wellness Studies (NQF Level: 6)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 5 credits: 92Level 6 credits: 94 -Minimum total credits required: 186

RationaleThe Diploma in Health and Wellness Studies (Level 6) has been developed in response to the need for a healthy Namibian nation as envisaged in Vision 2030 and “Strengthening the School Health Programme in Namibia” (2012-2015).

PurposeThe main purpose of the Diploma in Health and Wellness Studies (Level 6) is to train students to analyse, arrange, and evaluate information related to disciplines that holistically integrate strategies in promoting the health and wellbeing of individuals and groups. Furthermore, this qualification has a purpose of delivering a comprehensive understanding and application of preventative health and wellness approaches within a culturally diverse society. This qualification includes a variety of occupations within the corporate and community contexts such as of a senior health administrator, supporting staff and health and wellness officer.

Admission RequirementsStudents who meet the requirements should be holders of a Certificate of Health and Wellness Studies (Level 5) or other equivalent qualification.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the programme is:Minimum: 2 Years.Maximum: 3 Years.The programme comprises of 2 semesters per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole qualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:

• Discuss the influence of culture, religion, and family history on an individual’s perception of health and illness.

• Identify and apply sound health and wellness skills to develop well balanced and healthy lifestyle.

• Identify and discuss health and wellness policies in Government, Organize and facilitate education and information sessions on health and wellness in the

245

workplace and at community level; non-government and private organizations; mobilize resources for health and wellness awareness programmes.

• Facilitate trainings for workforce at all levels and community resource persons (peer educators and health promoters) on Health and Wellness and explain international and legal frameworks on Health and Wellness

• Identify and use public health information, health and wellness systems and programmes.

• Use management information systems to effectively manage public and private health care services.

• Explain the role of occupational health practitioners and the analysis of their effectiveness in practice and conduct assessments of the work environment, its effects on health, relevant legislation and the effective control of workplace hazards.

ArticulationVertically, the Diploma in Health and Wellness Studies (Level 6) grants admission to Bachelor of Health and Wellness Studies at NQF Level 7 and/or any qualification at NQF Level 7. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for students to gain admission or any related Bachelor programme. These students can also apply at other institutions for entering into Bachelor programmes at NQF Level 7.

Horizontally, students may, where applicable, be moved into existing or new related Diploma programmes.

Credit transferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content acquired through learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM coursesThe awarded credits are governed by the IUM degree programme rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years. Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning; the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibian Qualification Authority requirements.



246

Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.



AssessmentCoursework/Continuous Assessment

Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities for example tests, assignments, mini projects, group work/discussion and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period.


Final Examinations




Teaching methods/strategiesThis qualification will be offered through the following modes of delivery:•Face-to-face

247

•DesignThinking(CaseMethod)•Self-learning•SocialMedia•OnlineLearningTools


YEAR 1 (92 credits)

Semester 1

Course Title


Management Communication MCM50US 5 10

Marketing of Health and Wellness MHW50US 5 10Year Courses Integrated Wellness counselling IWC50UY 5 24Occupational Health and safety I OH150UY 5 24Health and Wellness Studies I HW150UY 5 24

YEAR 2 94 credits

Semester 1

Course Title


Home Based Care HBC60US 6 12


IEI60US 6 10

Project Management PRH60US 6 12

Semester 2

Course Title


Nutrition NUT60US 6 12

Year courses

Health and Wellness Studies II HW260UY 6 24Occupational Health and safety II OH260UY 6 24

248

Bachelor of Health and Wellness Studies (NQF Level: 7)

Compulsory ElectiveLevel 4 credits: 30 -Level 5 credits: 144 -Level 6 credits: 94 -Level 7 credits: 114 -Minimum total credits required: 382 -

RationaleThe Bachelor of Health and Wellness Studies (NQF level 7) has been developed in response to the national need for healthy Namibian citizens as envisaged in Vision 2030.

PurposeThe purpose of this qualification is to develop students’ knowledge and skills in implementing health goals, sustain life-changing behaviours, and manage healthy lifestyles progress. It further trains students with skills to assist people to improve the patient’s behaviour by alleviating the impact of lifestyle diseases and conditions such as cancer, diabetes, hypertension and obesity in order to further promote healthy ways of life.

Admission RequirementsThe normal entry requirement to undergraduate degree programmes shall be a Namibia Senior Secondary Certificate ( Ordinary or Higher or a combination of Both ) or equivalent qualifications, provided that the candidate has passed five subjects (including English at Grade D) normally in not more than three examination sittings with a 25 points on the IUM’s evaluation scale.

The above are essential requirements as the instructional design of the qualification and course assessments will be integrated with the work place experience.Applicants should also meet the following requirements: -

Hold HIGCSE senior certificate in four subjects with 1- 4 symbolsORHold a Grade 12 senior certificate (IGCSE) with a minimum of D symbol in English Language totalling twenty five points or moreOREnter through flexible learning path – Mature Age Entry as stipulated in GR 4.1.1/prior learning. OR

249

Diploma of Health and Wellness (Level 6) or equivalent

The achievement of these requirements will not automatically guarantee a place on the degree course, it will be subject to a successful interview/aptitude test (as required) and availability of places.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the programme is:Minimum: 3 YearMaximum: 4 Years.The programme comprises 2 semesters, i.e. two (2) semesters per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: • Assess institutional needs and design health promotion and wellness programmes.• Implement and manage health promotion and wellness programmes. • Evaluate private and public health care policies.• Develop policy for effective service provision in public and private health care

services.• Discuss the concepts of occupational health practice in relation to current needs

and initiatives, and analyse the role of occupational health practitioners and their effectiveness in practice.

• Design and implement public relations programmes for health promotion.• Apply business models which underpin innovative and sustainable business

ventures through identifying possible markets, business models and ways of efficiently growing a business venture.

ArticulationThe holder of this qualification will articulate to Bachelor of Health and Wellness studies Honours at NQF level 8 or any related qualification at NQF level 8.

Credit transferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content acquired through learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses.


250

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning, the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.

Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting.

Credits earned at an accredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.




AssessmentCoursework/Continuous Assessment

Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.



251


Teaching methods/strategiesThe delivery methods for this qualification comprise of the fulltime, part time and block release learning mode. Contact hours for distance learning mode are face-to- face encounters on monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays such as Easter break.

The following are the methods of delivery:•Face-to-face•DesignThinking(CaseMethod)orSelf-learning•SocialMedia•OnlineLearningTools

The degree will be offered through a face-to-face mode in collaboration with the other faculties within the university.

YEAR 1

Semester 1

Course Title


Compulsory Courses

Mathematics 5 10

Basic IT Skills 4 10

Applied English Language Skills 4 10Critical Thinking Skills 5 10Introduction to Entrepreneurship 4 10Marketing of Health and Wellness 5 10

252

Semester 2

Course Title


Years Courses

Health and Wellness Studies I 5 24

Occupational Health and safety I 5 24

Anatomy and Physiology 5 32

YEAR 2

Semester 1

Course Title


Compulsory Courses

Project Management 6 12

Nutrition 6 12

Intermediate Entrepreneurship And Innovation

6 10

Semester 2

Course Title


Compulsory Courses

Home Based Care 6 12

Year Courses

Health and Wellness Studies II 6 24Integrated Wellness Counseling 7 24Occupational Health and safety II 6 24

253

YEAR 3

Semester 1

Course Title


Strategic Entrepreneurship 7 10

Professional Ethics 7 12

Semester 2

Course Title


Years Courses

Health and Wellness Studies III 7 24

Health and Wellness Management 7 24

Occupational Health and safety II 7 24Research Methodology 7 20Internship 7 10

254

Bachelor of Health and Wellness Studies Honours (NQF Level: 8)


RationaleBachelor of Health And Wellness Studies Honours level 8 has been developed in response to the need for a healthy Namibian nation as envisaged in Vision 2030 and “Strengthening the School Health Programme in Namibia” (2012-2015). The qualification addresses the need for improved management skills throughout all levels of health and wellness whether public or private. In doing so, it meets the immediate needs of the health and wellness sector of providing quality service to all Namibians. Over the long term, a cadre of qualified managers in health and wellness will assist in reaching the Vision 2030 goal of health for all.

PurposeThe Bachelor of Health and Wellness Studies Honours is designed for health care providers and people who want to equip themselves with the skills required to build and design health and wellness promotion projects. It therefore provides an avenue for candidates to assess and evaluate health care topics in greater depth and detail. This qualification addresses the need for improved management skills throughout all levels of the health and wellness sector whether public or private in planning and implementing health care policies. Graduates will not only have practical hands on approach, competency and proficiency but also discover new trends and developments in the health and wellness sector through the research expertise to be acquired in this qualification.

Admission RequirementsApplicants must be holders of a Bachelor of Health and Wellness Studies degree at NQF Level 7 or equivalent.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the programme is:Minimum: 1 Year.Maximum: 2 Years.The programme comprises of two (2) semesters per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole qualificationUpon successful completion of this qualification, holders are able to:•Plan,manageandensurethequalityofhealthandwellnessprovision.•Design,implementandmanagehealthandwellnessprojects.•Developpublicrelationsstrategiesregardinghealthandwellness.

255

•Examinethestrategicrolesofhealthandwellnessproviders.•Analyzeallrelevanthealthandwellnessinformation.•Draftandimplementhealthcarepolicies.

ArticulationIUM courses articulate from qualification to qualification as per the statement in course contents. The IUM will decide if and how course work from qualifications from other institutions will articulate with IUM courses. Appeals may be submitted to Senate. The holders of this qualification will articulate to Masters degree or any qualification at NQF Level 9.

Credit transferCandidates from other institutions or programmes will be treated on a case-by-case basis depending on the relevant curricula followed at the previous institution or programme. Credit recognition of another institution or programme’s courses can only be extended up to 50% of the credits needed for the qualification.

AssessmentCoursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period.



Supervisors will be allocated to students to supervise the research projects. The projects must be completed by the set date. Projects will be marked by the supervisors and will be externally moderated.


A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course as per IUM examination regulations. A student may not proceed from one level to the

256

next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.

Teaching methods/strategies

This qualification will be offered through the following modes of delivery:•Face-to-face•DesignThinking(CaseMethod)•Self-learning•SocialMedia•OnlineLearningToolsThe degree will be offered in collaboration with the other faculties within the university.

Course Title


Semester 1

Health Education Practice 8 12

Semester 2

Strategic Management in Health and Wellness

8 12


8 10

Year courses Marketing of Health and Wellness 8 32Public Relations for Health and Wellness

8 32

Research Project 8 32Health Informational Promotion 8 32Total Credits Required 130

257

FACULTY OF EDUCATION

258

Diploma in Education - Pre and Junior Primary (NQF Level: 7)

Purpose Of the QualificationThere is an urgent need for qualified pre and junior primary school teachers in Namibia. Enrolment in early childhood education has suddenly increased and this increase is mainly due to the government initiative to help make public education accessible to all by abolishing school fees as well as a strategic emphasis by the Namibian Government to increase learner access to education opportunities.

Though the initiative is a step in the right direction, it has stressed the education system. Today there are large inequalities in educational access between rural and urban areas and a pupil-to-teacher ratio that exceeds 40:1 in some rural areas. Overall, the Ministry of Education estimates that another 5000 teachers must be trained to reach universal primary education target by 2030.

Early childhood education is a vital investment for the country’s future, setting an early foundation for life-long learning for early childhood school teachers help to give young learners the best possible start in life. They inspire young learners through learning and they have a greater opportunity to relate well with learners and their parents.

The students studying the International University of Management Diploma in Education (Pre and Junior Primary) will be actively involved in their learning and development. For this qualification has been carefully designed, in collaboration with the major stakeholders, to be responsive to the needs of the profession and aims to model what outstanding teaching and learning in the pre and junior primary classroom looks like. The student learning experiences will be varied and will include educational visits, lectures, conferences, seminars, tutorials, practical workshops and independent study supported by research and online learning materials. In addition to this, the students will spend a significant proportion of time on professional placement (school based studies). Assessment methods are varied according to the courses but include, among others, posters, essays, presentations and portfolios. All of these have an explicit focus on supporting each student’s development as an outstanding pre and junior primary school teacher.The Diploma in Education (Pre and Junior Primary) will enable the students to develop a deep understanding of how learners learn. The students will learn about current initiatives and their impact on classroom practices. The students will be supported in their learning to become creative and flexible practitioners prepared to make a positive impact on learners’ lives and meet the needs of early childhood education of the future. This qualification will not only meet but also implement all the requirements for training quality early childhood educators as articulated by the Ministry of Basic Education in its ministerial policy documents.

Apart from aligning itself directly with the ministerial policy documents on pre and

259

junior primary education, this qualification considers the ever growing pool of an unqualified teachers who do not meet the present minimum requirement for entry into Bachelor of Education (Junior Primary) Honours at the International University of Management. This qualification, therefore, will provide a suitable bridge for entry into Bachelor of Education (Junior Primary) Honours and further training.

This qualification targets anyone who has the zeal to be become a pre and primary school teacher and has the necessary requirements to pursue this study to become a professionally qualified pre and primary school teacher in order to meet the high demand for academically and professionally qualified pre and primary school teachers in Namibia and the SADC region.

Outcomes of the Qualification Holders of this qualification are able to:

• identify some of the key areas associated with teaching and learning at pre and junior primary school level;

• identify key techniques for using songs, play and games to enhance learners’ learning;

• understand how different learning styles affect the way learners learn and identify different techniques for exploiting different learning styles;

• define how lesson planning is linked to syllabus and curriculum and explain how the curriculum can define what and how you teach;

• identify a variety of classroom management factors which affect the learning conditions in the young learner classroom;

• demonstrate ability to carry out both formal assessment methods (quizzes, short tests, oral tests and worksheets) and informal assessment methods (observation of each learner’s progress in learning and practice situations);

• provide high quality teaching of core skills (literacy, numeracy, ICT, thinking skills, problem solving);

• develop in the learners an awareness of their personal learning styles and strengths and encourage them to assume more responsibility for their progress;

• encourage lifelong learning;• demonstrate knowledge and understanding of learners’s early childhood

development process in cognitive, emotional, social, aesthetic, spiritual and ethical, and physical domains; and

• demonstrate an ability to teach the whole of the junior primary school curriculum

Qualification DurationThe study period for the qualification is:Fulltime/Part-time/Block release mode - Minimum: 3 Years; Maximum: 5 Years.The qualification comprises of two (2) semesters per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

260

COURSESYEAR 1

Course Code

Course Title

Status Semester NQF Level Credits

CLR50US Children’s Literature And Reading Support

Compulsory 1 5 6

ACR50US Academic Writing Compulsory 1 5 8

IRE50US Introduction To Religious And Moral Education

Compulsory 1 5 6

IST50US IT Skills For Teachers Compulsory 1 4 6PE150US Physical Education

For Pre And Junior Primary I

Compulsory 1 5 6

EFT50US English For Teachers Compulsory 2 5 8AE150US Arts Education For

Pre And Junior Primary I

Compulsory 2 6 6

AEP50US Assessment In Education (PJP)

Compulsory 2 5 8

ILP50US Introduction To Life Skills (PJP)

Compulsory 2 4 6

PAE50US Principles And Approaches Of Early Childhood Education

Compulsory 2 5 6

TEE60US Technology Application In Early Childhood Education

Compulsory 2 6 10

EF150UY Educational Foundations I (DIEPJ)

Compulsory Year 5 8

MJ150UY Micro Teaching For Pre And Junior Primary I

Compulsory Year 5 8

BM150US Basic Mathematics I Compulsory Year 5 10DZ150UY English Language

Practice ICompulsory Year 5 8

Electives (choose 1 Language)

261

DA150UY Afrikaans Language Practice I

Elective 1/9 Year 5 10

DK150UY Khoekhoegowab Language Practice I


DW150UY Oshikwanyama Language Practice I


DD150UY Oshindonga Language Practice I


DH150UY Otjiherero Language Practice I


DU150UY Rukwangali Language Practice I


DM150UY Rumanyo Language Practice I


DL150UY Silozi Language Practice I


DT150UY Silozi Language Practice I


YEAR 2

Course Code

Course Title


IEE40US Introduction To Environmental Education

Compulsory 1 4 6

IRM60US Intermediate Religious And Moral Education

Compulsory 1 6 6

MGC60US Multi-Grade Classroom Teaching

Compulsory 1 6 10

PE260US Physical Education For Pre And Junior Primary II

Compulsory 1 6 6

CSL50US Counselling And Learner Support

Compulsory 2 5 10

AE260US Arts Education For Pre And Junior Primary II

Compulsory 2 5 6

262

IEC40US Introduction To Early Childhood Curriculum Development

Compulsory 2 5 10

MLS50US Intermediate Life Skills

Compulsory 2 5 6

EF260UY Educational Foundations II

Compulsory Year 6 10

BM260UY Basic Mathematics II Compulsory Year 6 10MJ260UY Micro Teaching

For Pre And Junior Primary II


SBS60UY School Based Studies I

Compulsory Year 6 8

DZ260UY English Language Practice II


Electives (choose 1 Language)DA260UY Afrikaans Language

Practice IIElective 1/9 Year 6 10

DK260UY Khoekhoegowab Language Practice II


DW260UY Oshikwanyama Language Practice II


DD260UY Oshindonga Language Practice II


DH260UY Otjiherero Language Practice II


DU260UY Rukwangali Language Practice II


DM260UY Rumanyo Language Practice II


DL260UY Silozi Language Practice II


DT260UY Thimbukushu Language Practice II


263

YEAR 3

Course Code

Course Title


FAH70US First Aid Compulsory 2 7 NCB

IED70US Inclusive Education Compulsory 2 7 12

EPY70US Educational Psychology For Young Learners


ECC70US Early Childhood Classroom Management


LSM70UY Learning Support In Mathematics And Science


SB270UY School Based Studies II


DZ370UY English Language Literacy Development


Electives (choose 1 Language)DA370UY Afrikaans

Language Literacy Development


DK370UY Khoekhoegowab Language Literacy Development


DW370UY Oshikwanyama Language Literacy Development


DD370UY Oshindonga Language Literacy Development


DH370UY Otjiherero Language Literacy Development


DU370UY Rukwangali Language Literacy Development


264

DM370UY Rumanyo Language Literacy Development


DL370UY Silozi Language Literacy Development


DT370UY Thimbukushu Language Literacy Development


265

Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.


The awarded credits are governed by the IUM diploma qualification rules and the rules covering credit. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.



Credits earned at an unaccredited institution of higher learning may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in the IUM diploma qualification.


Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions of higher learning is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM diploma in education qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.

The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions of higher learning, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.


Modes of Teaching and Learning in Teacher EducationThe teaching and learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial activities

266

and discussion, school-based activities, collaborative group tasks, practical projects and written assignments.

AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period.

Students must score at least 50% in each course /coursework to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final ExaminationsThe final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. Examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally. Supplementary ExaminationsA student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination.

A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying a deficit of more than 30% of the courses or credits.

Practical Teaching All students should acquire field experience in the first, second and third year of study and submit a report. For the: o first year - this field experience amounts to 40 hours (consecutive 2 weeks) of class observation per year (Each level -10 hours);o second year - this period of practice teaching amounts to 80 hours (consecutive 4 weeks) per year (Pre and Grade 1 – each 40 hours); and o third year - this period of practice teaching amounts to 240 hours (consecutive 6 weeks) hours per year (Pre and Grade 1 – each 40 hours, and Grade 2 and Grade 3 – 80 hours each).

Each and every one of these field experiences are examinable and are a requirement for graduation. Assessment is by means of observation of the student, student assessment by learners and staff, and by submission of a portfolio. Furthermore, students will be required to practice teaching in at least one (1) school in the rural setting during the 3 years of practice teaching.

267

Articulation Vertically, the Diploma in Education (Pre and Lower Primary) grants admission to Bachelor of Education (Primary) Honours. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Bachelor honours programme. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related Diploma teachers qualifications.

268

Bachelor of Education Honours (Pre and Junior Primary) (NQF Level: 8)

Rationale and the purpose of the Qualification The Namibia’s Occupational Demand and Supply Outlook Model (NODSOM) of 2012 and other several reports issued by the Ministry of Education highlights the shortage of professionally qualified teachers at all levels of the education system in Namibia. There is a high demand for appropriately qualified teachers especially for early childhood education which brought about the design and development of the Bachelor of Education (Pre and Junior Primary) Honours.

This qualification is designed to train early childhood education classroom teachers in thematic approach to teaching and learning, ability to locate learning within the child’s context (environment) and help children understand why they are doing what they are doing. Furthermore, this qualification aims to equip early childhood education teachers with an in-depth understanding of the subject matter (classroom activities), sound professional teaching skills including multi-grade teaching skills (application), and ability to adapt to the ever-changing early childhood educational needs in Namibia (contextualisation).

The Bachelor of Education (Pre and Junior Primary) Honours qualification is designed to produce early childhood education teachers with an in-depth understanding of the early childhood education classroom activities, sound professional skills and ability to adapt to the ever-changing early childhood educational needs in Namibia. Its focus is on quality early childhood teaching and learning as well as management of early childhood classroom environment. Hence, the qualification content has been research-based and infusing best practices in early childhood education and strategies for classroom teaching and learning. This qualification combines early childhood education theoretical components with practical application and the basis for this approach are the principles and insights of leading pedagogues such as Rudolph Joseph Steiner, Emmi Pikler, Thomas Gordon, Lori Malaguzzi and Maria Montessori.

Furthermore, this qualification also provides future early childhood educators with a foundation in classroom, department and school management, curriculum development, and methods of early childhood teaching and learning, including multi-grade teaching skills, as well as skills for working with children age five (5) through nine (9) years, Grade 0 through Grade 3. Furthermore, an emphasis is placed on the integration of appropriate technology in the school curriculum at this level.

The three-year course leading to the qualification Bachelor of Education (Pre and Junior Primary) Honours aims at equipping students with necessary competencies in early childhood classroom teaching and learning and school managerial skills which are presently largely lacking in early childhood education across Namibia. This qualification will not only meet but also implement all the requirements for training quality early

269

childhood educators as articulated by the Ministry of Basic Education in its ministerial policy documents.

It can, therefore be deduced that through the design of this qualification, the IUM intends to make available quality pre and junior primary education that will promote learner-centred and inclusive education and meaningful access to early childhood education. The effort made here is to improve the quality of classroom teaching and learning and management, increase availability and access to quality education at early childhood education level as well as reduce the vulnerability of children to failure and dropout at later stages of education. Therefore, students completing this qualification will be well versed in teaching strategies that are not only varied but flexible as well within the well-structured sequences of fun lessons with stories, song and movement. These students upon graduation will be prepared for pre and junior primary school class teaching and learning as well as administration.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the qualification is:o Fulltime/Part-time mode block release - Minimum: 4 Years; Maximum: 6 Years.The qualification comprises of two (2) semesters, per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes for the whole qualification Holders of this qualification are able to:• demonstrate ability to teach school subjects;• demonstrate understanding of the concepts, theories, principles and facts related to

the pre and junior primary school curriculum subjects;• demonstrate expertise in teaching methodologies and strategies that are consistent

with the theme teaching approach, and in the facilitating integration of learning;• demonstrate knowledge and understanding of children’s early childhood

development process in cognitive, emotional, social, aesthetic, spiritual and ethical, and physical domains;

• demonstrate understanding of learner-centred education and theories on literacy and literacy development;

• demonstrate expertise in implementing strategies developed to cope with code-switching and developing in learners the ability to think in the target language;

• demonstrate competency in curriculum design, development, implementation and analysis;

• demonstrate competency in developing a scheme of work that accommodates the challenges around first and second language issues;

• demonstrate competence in the well-structured sequences of fun lessons with stories, song and movement;

• create and maintain a learning environment that is conducive to effective early childhood learning;

270

• facilitate learning in such a way that different needs of learners, including the exceptionally talented children and those with learning disabilities and challenges, as well as emotional and behavioural problems, are taken into account within the framework of inclusive education;

• use information and communication technologies to enhance teaching and learning;• demonstrate ability to locate learning within the children’s context (environment)

and help children understand why they are doing what they are doing; and• Demonstrate ability to carry out both formal assessment methods (quizzes, short

tests, oral tests and worksheets) and informal assessment methods (observation of each learner’s progress in learning and practice situations).

Articulation Vertically, the Bachelor of Education (Pre and Junior Primary) Honours grants admission to Master of Education. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Masters programme. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related undergraduate teachers qualifications.

This qualification is designed for teachers willing to take up teaching assignments in both the private and public schools. It is structured to stretch and challenge the teachers to fulfil their true potential and to become defining players in the education system. The basis for the argument is that a teacher must first be a student and these programmes target those individuals willing to become students and then be transformed into professional teachers. Furthermore, a key concern of the qualification is the importance of literacy and numeracy to personal fulfilment.

Credit transferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content acquired learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses


Courses will be evaluated for their current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting.

Credits earned at an unaccredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is

271

equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.





Major CombinationsThis qualification has no option of specialisation, but all courses are core and compulsory to all students perusing their studies for a Bachelor of Education in Pre and Junior Primary Honours.

Assessment Coursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period.

Students must score at least 50% in each course /coursework to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.



A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to

272

repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.

Practical Teaching All students should acquire field experience in the second, third and fourth year of study and submit a report. For the: •secondyear-thisfieldexperienceamountsto2weeksofclassobservationperyear;•thirdyear-thisperiodofteachingpracticeamountsto4weeksperyear;and•fourthyear-thisperiodofteachingpracticeamountsto12weeksperyear.

Teaching Methods/Strategies The delivery methods for this qualification comprise of the part time and distance learning modes. Contact hours for distance learning mode are face-to- face encounters on monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays such as Easter break.The following are the methods of delivery:•Face-to-face•DesignThinking(CaseMethod)orSelf-learning•SocialMedia•OnlineLearningToolsThe degree will be offered through a face-to-face mode in collaboration with the other faculties within the university.

CoursesYEAR 1

Course Code

Course Title


ACR50US Academic Writing Compulsory 1 5 8

IST50US IT Skills For Teachers Compulsory 1 5 6

PE150US Physical Education For Pre And Junior Primary I

Compulsory 1 5 6

RE150US Religious And Moral Education For Pre And Junior Primary I

Compulsory 1 5 6

TR150US Teaching Reading With Learners’ Literature I

Compulsory 1 5 6

LS150US Life Skills For Pre And Junior Primary I

Compulsory 2 5 6

273

AE150US Arts Education For Pre And Junior Primary I

Compulsory 2 5 6

AEP50US Assessment In Education

Compulsory 2 5 8

GCP50US Guidance And Counselling

Compulsory 2 5 8

TE150US Integrated Technology In Early Childhood Education I

Compulsory 2 5 8

EF150UY Educational Foundations I

Compulsory Year 5 8

CR150UY Micro Teaching I Compulsory Year 5 10NM150UY Numeracy And

Mathematics Education I


EL150UY English Language I Compulsory Year 5 105electives (choose 1 Language)

LA150UY Afrikaans Language I Elective 1/9 Year 5 10LK150UY Khoekhoegowab

Language IElective 1/9 Year 5 10

LW150UY Oshikwanyama Language I


LD150UY Oshindonga Language I


LH150UY Otjiherero Language I


LU150UY Rukwangali Language I


LM150UY Rumanyo Language I Elective 1/9 Year 7 10LL150UY Silozi Language I Elective 1/9 Year 7 20

274

YEAR 2

Course Code

Course Title


EV160US Environmental Education I

Compulsory 1 7 6

MGC60US Multi-Grade Classroom Teaching

Compulsory 1 6 10

PE260US Physical Education For Pre And Junior Primary II

Compulsory 1 6 6

RE260US Religious And Moral Education For Pre And Junior Primary II

Compulsory 1 6 6

EFT50US English For Teachers Compulsory 2 4 10TPA60US Teaching Phonemic

Awareness And PhonicsCompulsory 1 6 6

AE260US Arts Education For Pre And Junior Primary II

Compulsory 2 6 6

CC160US Early Childhood Curriculum Development I

Compulsory 2 6 10

TE250US Integrated Technology In Early Childhood Education II

Compulsory 2 6 10

LS260US Life Skills For Pre And Junior Primary II

Compulsory 2 6 6

TR260US Teaching Reading With Learners’ Literature II

Compulsory 2 6 6



CR260UY Micro Teaching II Compulsory Year 6 6NM260UY Numeracy And

Mathematics Education IICompulsory Year 6 10

SBS60UY School Based Studies I Compulsory Year 6 6EL260UY English Language II Compulsory Year 6 10

5electives (choose 1 Language)LA260UY Afrikaans Language II Elective 1/9 Year 6 10

275

LK260UY Khoekhoegowab Language II


LW260UY Oshikwanyama Language II


LD260UY Oshindonga Language II Elective 1/9 Year 6 10LH260UY Otjiherero Language II Elective 1/9 Year 6 10LU260UY Rukwangali Language II Elective 1/9 Year 6 10LM260UY Rumanyo Language II Elective 1/9 Year 6 10LL260UY Silozi Language II Elective 1/9 Year 6 10LT260UY Thimbukushu Language II Elective 1/9 Year 6 10

YEAR 3

Course Code

Course Title


PE370US Physical Education For Pre And Junior Primary III

Compulsory 1 7 6

CC270US Early Childhood Curriculum Development II

Compulsory 1 7 12

LS370US Life Skills For Pre And Junior Primary III

Compulsory 2 7 12

AE370US Arts Education For Pre And Junior Primary III

Compulsory 2 7 6

EV270US Environmental Education II Compulsory 2 7 6IED70US Inclusive Education Compulsory 2 7 12

ERM70UY Research Methodology In Education


EF370UY Educational Foundations III Compulsory Year 7 12CR370UY Micro Teaching III Compulsory Year 7 6NM370UY Numeracy And Mathematics

Education IIICompulsory Year 7 10

SB270UY School Based Studies III Compulsory Year 7 6EL370UY English Language III Compulsory Year 7 10

5electives (choose 1 Language)LA370UY Afrikaans Language III Elective 1/9 Year 7 10LK370UY Khoekhoegowab Language

IIIElective 1/9 Year 7 10

276

LW370UY Oshikwanyama Language III Elective 1/9 Year 7 10LD370UY Oshindonga Language III Elective 1/9 Year 7 10LH370UY Otjiherero Language III Elective 1/9 Year 7 10LU370UY Rukwangali Language III Elective 1/9 Year 7 10LM370UY Rumanyo Language III Elective 1/9 Year 7 10LL370UY Silozi Language III Elective 1/9 Year 7 10LT370UY Thimbukushu Language III Elective 1/9 Year 7 10

YEAR 4

Course Code

Course Title

Status Semester NQF Level

Credits

FAH70US First Aid Compulsory 2 8 NCB

EF480UY Educational Foundations IV Compulsory Year 8 15

PME80UY Project Management In Education


XPJ80UY Educational Research Project Compulsory Year 8 30SB380UY School Based Studies III Compulsory Year 8 15EL480UY English Language IV Compulsory Year 8 12

5electives (choose 1 Language)LA480UY Afrikaans Language IV Elective 1/9 Year 8 10LK480UY Khoekhoegowab Language IV Elective 1/9 Year 8 10LW480UY Oshikwanyama Language IV Elective 1/9 Year 8 10LD480UY Oshindonga Language IV Elective 1/9 Year 8 10LH480UY Otjiherero Language IV Elective 1/9 Year 8 10LU480UY Rukwangali Language IV Elective 1/9 Year 8 10LM480UY Rumanyo Language IV Elective 1/9 Year 8 10LL480UY Silozi Language IV Elective 1/9 Year 8 10LT480UY Thimbukushu Language IV Elective 1/9 Year 8 10

277

Bachelor of Education Honours (Senior Primary) (NQF Level: 8)

Rationale and Purpose of the QualificationEducation is an important factor both in the day-to-day development of the child and in contributing to the personal, social, cultural and economic fulfilment of the future adult. The design and introduction of this qualification by the IUM is, therefore, a significant educational development for it bridges early childhood education with adolescence - secondary school education in ensuring that there is proper continuity in the education process. This qualification also incorporates new content and embraces new approaches and methodologies in teaching and learning, building on the earlier emphasised nu-meracy and reading. A key concern of the qualification is the importance of literacy and numeracy to personal fulfilment. The curriculum also responds to changing needs, par-ticularly in the areas of science and technology, social, personal and health education, and citizenship, and in taking account of the initiative in modern languages.

In preparing teachers for the senior primary education sector, this qualification guides and facilitates student teachers’ initial entry into teaching and provides a solid theoreti-cal foundation to support and aid their preparation for professional practice within the classroom. This qualification is designed to produce teachers with an in-depth under-standing of the subject matter, sound professional skills and ability to adapt to the ev-er-changing educational needs in Namibia. Its focus is on quality instruction and teach-ing in the senior primary school. This qualification aims at improving the competency of senior primary school teachers in quality teaching and class management skills which are presently largely lacking mainly in public schools in Namibia. This qualification, therefore, intends to improve the quality of senior primary school teaching, instruction and classroom management.

Qualification DurationThe study period for the qualification is:• Fulltime/Part-time mode/block release - Minimum: 4 Years; Maximum: 6 Years.The study period comprises of two (2) semesters, per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes for the whole qualification Holders of this qualification are able to:• Demonstrate mastery in teaching at least two (2) school subjects taught at senior

primary school level;• Demonstrate competency in at least two (2) subject matter content and pedagogical

knowledge and skills;• Demonstrate creativity and ingenuity to discovery, comprehension, control and

adaptation of senior primary school teaching methodologies to new technologies;• Demonstrate ability to develop the learners’ ability in creative thinking, problem

solving and communication skills.

278

• Demonstrate awareness, understanding and commitment to professional ethics, ba-sic human rights and sound environmental responsibility;

• Demonstrate capability and capacity to produce and use relevant learning materi-als; and

• Demonstrate leadership and classroom managerial skills.

Articulation Vertically, the Bachelor of Education (Senior Primary) Honours grants admission to Master of Education. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Masters programme. Horizon-tally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related undergraduate teaching qualifications.

This qualification is designed for senior primary school teachers willing to take up teaching assignments in both the private and public schools. It is structured to stretch and challenge the senior primary school teachers to fulfil their true potential and to become defining players in the education system. The basis for the argument is that a senior primary school teacher must first be a student and this qualification targets those individuals willing to become students and then be transformed into professional senior primary school teachers.

Credit transferCredit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content acquired learn-ing outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equiva-lent to IUM courses. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years. Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning, the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements. Courses will be evalu-ated for their current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting.

Credits earned at an unaccredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification. Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning. Acceptance of credits earned at oth-er institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.

279



Major CombinationsThe core courses for this qualification are fixed and cannot be exchanged. The qualifica-tion is offered in four (4) specialisations and each specialisation has a number of school subject combinations. In addition to that students have option to elect one course from pre-vocational subjects and one course from supportive subject that runs up to year three. No deviation from the prescribed combinations as reflected in the course content will be allowed.

Assessment Coursework/Continuous Assessment

Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examina-tions. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final Examinations


Supplementary ExaminationsA student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a sup-plementary examination.

A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one oppor-tunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.

280

Practical Teaching

All students should acquire field experience in the second, third and fourth year of study and submit a report. For the: • second year - this field experience amounts to 2 weeks of class observation per year;• third year - this period of teaching practice amounts to 4 weeks per year; and • fourth year - this period of teaching practice amounts to 12 weeks per year.

Teaching Methods/Strategies The delivery methods for this qualification comprise of the part time and distance learn-ing modes. Contact hours for the distance learning mode are face-to- face encounters on a monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays such as Easter break.

The following are the methods of delivery:•Face-to-face•FlippedClassroom•DesignThinking(CaseMethod)orSelf-learning•SocialMedia•OnlineLearningTools

The degree will be offered through a face-to-face mode in collaboration with the other faculties within the university.

281

YEAR 1Course Code Course Title Status Semester NQF

LevelCredits

ACR50US Academic Writing Compulsory 1 5 8IST50US IT Skills For Teachers Compulsory 1 4 6THD50US Theories Of Human

DevelopmentCompulsory 1 5 8

LP150US Life Skills I (Senior Primary)

Compulsory 1 5 10

EF150UY Educational Foundations I

Compulsory Year 5 8

MTE50UY Micro Teaching Compulsory Year 5 8EFT50US English For Teachers Compulsory 2 4 10AS150US Assessment In

Education (Senior)Compulsory 2 5 8

GCS50US Guidance And Counselling (Senior /Secondary)

Compulsory 2 4 8

ID150US Integrating Technology In Education I

Compulsory 2 5 8

Electives (Choose One From The Following)AD150US Arts Education I Elective 1/3 1 5 8PD150US Physical Education I Elective 1/3 1 5 8RO150US Religious And Moral

Education IElective 1/3 1 5 8

Electives (Choose One From The Following)HC150US Home Ecology I Elective 1/3 2 5 8DT150US Design And Technology

IElective 1/3 2 5 8

EA150US Elementary Agriculture I

Elective 1/3 2 5 8

Choose 2 Subjects (See Valid Subjects Combination)EP150UY English Language

Education IElective Year 5 12

282

M150UY Mathematics Education I

Elective Year 5 12

NS150UY Natural Science And Health Education I

Elective Year 5 12

SE150UY Social Studies Education I

Elective Year 5 12

SA150UY Afrikaans Language Education I - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 5 15

SK150UY Khoekhoegowab Language Education I - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 5 10

SW150UY Oshikwanyama Language Education I - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 5 15

SD150UY Oshindonga Language Education I - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 5 12

SJ150UY Otjiherero Language Education I - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 5 15

SU150UY Rukwangali Language Education I - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 5 15

SN150UY Rumanyo Language Education I - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 5 15

SL150UY Silozi Language Education I - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 5 15

YEAR 2Course Code COURSE TITLE Status Semester NQF

LevelCredits

MGT60US Multi-Grade Classroom Teaching

Compulsory 1 6 10

CP160US Curriculum Planning And Development I

Compulsory 1 6 10

283

LP260US Life Skills II (Senior Primary)

Compulsory 1 6 12



SBS60UY School Based Studies I Compulsory Year 6 8ELP60US Educational Law And

PoliciesCompulsory 2 6 10

ID260US Integrating Technology In Education II

Compulsory 2 6 10

Electives (Choose One From The Following)AD260US Arts Education II Elective 1/3 1 6 10PD260US Physical Education II Elective 1/3 1 6 10RO260US Religious And Moral

Education IIElective 1/3 1 6 10

Electives (Choose One From The Following)DT260US Design And Technology

IIElective 1/3 2 6 12

EA260US Elementary Agriculture II

Elective 1/3 2 6 12

HC260US Home Ecology II Elective 1/3 2 6 12


Education Ii (Primary)Elective Year 6 12

MC260UY Mathematics Education II

Elective Year 6 12

NS260UY Natural Science And Health Education II

Elective Year 6 12

SE260UY Social Studies Education II

Elective Year 6 12

SA260UY Afrikaans Language Education II - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 6 12

SK260UY Khoekhoegowab Language Education II - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 6 12

284

SW260UY Oshikwanyama Language Education II - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 6 12

SD260UY Oshindonga Language Education II - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 6 12

SJ260UY Otjiherero Language Education II - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 6 12

SU260UY Rukwangali Language Education II - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 6 12

SN260UY Rumanyo Language Education II - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 6 12

SL260UY Silozi Language Education II - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 6 12

ST260UY Thimbukushu Language Education II - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 6 12


LevelCredits

LP370US Life Skills III (Senior Primary)

Compulsory 1 7 12

CP270US Curriculum Planning And Development II

Compulsory 1 7 12

EF370UY Educational Foundations III


SB270UY School Based Studies II Compulsory Year 7 10ERM70UY Research Methodology

In EducationCompulsory Year 7 12

SM370US School Management And Leadership

Compulsory 2 7 12

EVD70US Evaluation In Education Compulsory 2 7 12IED70US Inclusive Education Compulsory 2 7 12

285

Electives (Choose One From The Following)AD370US Arts Education III Elective 1/3 1 7 12PD370US Physical Education III Elective 1/3 1 7 12RO370US Religious And Moral

Education IIIElective 1/3 1 7 12

Electives (Choose One From The Following)DT370US Design And Technology

IIIElective 1/3 2 7 12

EA370US Elementary Agriculture III

Elective 1/3 2 7 12

HC370US Home Ecology III Elective 1/3 2 7 12


Education IIIElective Year 7 12

MC370UY Mathematics Education III

Elective Year 7 12

NS370UY Natural Science And Health Education III

Elective Year 7 12

SE370UY Social Studies Education III

Elective Year 7 12

SA370UY Afrikaans Language Education III - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 7 12

SK370UY Khoekhoegowab Language Education III- Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 7 12

SW370UY Oshikwanyama Language Education III - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 7 12

SD370UY Oshindonga Language Education III - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 7 12

SJ370UY Otjiherero Language Education III - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 7 12

286

SU370UY Rukwangali Language Education III - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 7 12

SN370UY Rumanyo Language Education III - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 7 12

SL370UY Silozi Language Education III - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 7 12

ST370UY Thimbukushu Language Education III - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 7 12


LevelCredits

FAH70US First Aid Compulsory 2 7 NCBEF480UY Educational Foundations

IVCompulsory Year 8 15

ESY80UY Education Systems Compulsory Year 8 15PME80UY Project Management In

Education Compulsory Year 8 15

XPJ80UY Educational Research Project


SB380UY School Based Studies III Compulsory Year 8 15Electives (Choose One From The Following)DT480US Design And Technology

IVElective 1/3 2 8 12

EA480US Elementary Agriculture IV

Elective 1/3 2 8 12

HC480US Home Ecology IV Elective 1/3 2 8 12Choose 2 Subjects (See Valid Subjects Combination)EP480UY English Language

Education IVElective Year 8 15

MC480UY Mathematics Education IV

Elective Year 8 15

NS480UY Natural Science And Health Education IV

Elective Year 8 15

287

SE480UY Social Studies Education IV

Elective Year 8 15

SA480UY Afrikaans IV - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 8 15

SK480UY Khoekhoegowab IV - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 8 15

SW480UY Oshikwanyama IV - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 8 15

SD480UY Oshindonga IV - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 8 15

SJ480UY Otjiherero IV - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 8 15

SU480UY Rukwangali IV - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 8 15

SN480UY Rumanyo IV - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 8 15

SL480UY Silozi IV - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 8 15

ST480UY Thimbukushu IV - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 8 15

288

Bachelor of Education Honours (Secondary Education) (NQF Level: 8)

Purpose The main purpose of Bachelor of Education in secondary Education honours qualification is to produce professionally qualified teachers who are able to apply a combination of subject matter knowledge with the relevant pedagogical approaches to ensure improved learning outcomes under various contexts. The qualification will contribute to the national efforts for the production of innovative and competent Secondary school teachers who would make lasting impressions in the lives of learners. The qualification will also equip teachers with the necessary teaching skills, competencies, and strategies to be effective secondary school teachers, academic manager and administrators.

Namibia’s Occupational Demand and Supply Outlook Model (NODSOM) of 2012 and other reports issued by the Ministry of Education highlight the shortage of professionally qualified teachers at all levels of the education system in Namibia. The Bachelor of Education (Secondary) Honours has been developed in response to the high demand for appropriately qualified teachers in Namibia.

The rationale for the development of this qualification was motivated by the need to meet the above mentioned challenge because the targets cannot be achieved without the necessary inputs from qualified teachers who are able to implement the national curriculum and assessments.

Outcomes for the whole qualification

Holders of this qualification are able to:• Teach secondary school subjects of their respective specialisation;• Utilise teaching methods that foster learners’ independent and dependent inquiry

and in-depth understanding;• Develop authentic means for assessing learning and to inform their teaching and

learners learning;• Demonstrate a commitment to working ethically and collectively with colleagues

to achieve high quality, equitable outcomes for learners and the wider community;• Design curriculum that meets the changing secondary education needs of Namibia

with special reference to outcomes-based education;• Promote, coordinate and conduct research into secondary school problems through

the prescribed subjects offered at particular levels;• Interpret, systemise and utilise in practice existing knowledge in view of the

education task;• Apply various techniques to carry out different roles of a secondary school educator,

i.e. as a lifelong learner, facilitator, mediator of learning, curriculum designer, administrator, assessor, agent of change, specialist in the selected subject(s) and a responsible citizen.

289

Qualification durationThe study period for the qualification is:Fulltime/Part-time / Block release Mode - Minimum: 4 Years; Maximum: 6 Years.The study period comprises of two (2) semesters, per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Major CombinationsThe core courses for this qualification are fixed and cannot be exchanged. The qualification is offered five groups of specialisations: Mathematics and Science, Languages Education, Humanities, Commerce and Information Technology. Each group of specialisation comprises of two school subjects.No deviation from the prescribed combinations as reflected below will be allowed.

The following are the fields of studies and subject combination:1. Mathematics and Science grouping a. Mathematics and Computer Studies b. Mathematics and Agriculture 2. Language Grouping a. English and Namibian Languages: CHOOSE ONE (Otjiherero/Oshikwanyama/Oshindonga/Rukwangali/Silozi/Afrikaans/ Khoekhoegowab,Thimbukushu,Rumanyo,) b. English and Foreign Language: CHOOSE ONE (Portuguese/French/German) 3. Humanities Grouping Geography and History 4. Commerce Grouping a. Accounting and Mathematics b. Accounting and Economics c. Accounting and Business studies d. Accounting and Entrepreneurship e. Economics and Business studies f. Office practice and Business studies g. Entrepreneurship and Business studies h. Office practice and Accounting 5. Information Technology Grouping a. Computer studies and Office Practice

290

YEAR 1Course Code

Course Title Status Semester NQF Level

Credits

IST50US IT Skills For Teachers Compulsory 1 4 6FS150UY Life Skills I (Secondary) Compulsory 1 5 10PES50US Physical Education

(Secondary)Compulsory 1 5 20

THD50US Theories Of Human Development

Compulsory 1 5 8

ACR50US Academic Writing Compulsory 1 5 8MTE50UY Micro Teaching Compulsory Year 5 8EF150UY Educational Foundations

ICompulsory Year 5 8

EFT50US English For Teachers Compulsory 2 5 8AED50US Assessment In Education

(Secondary)Compulsory 2 5 8

GCS50US Guidance And Counselling (Senior /Secondary)

Compulsory 2 4 8

ID150US Integrating Technology In Education I

Compulsory 2 5 8

Choose 2 Subjects (See Valid Subjects Combination)AN150UY Accounting Education I Elective Year 5 15AG150UY Agriculture Education I Elective Year 5 15BE150UY Business Studies


CE150UY Computer Studies Education I

Elective Year 5 15

EC150UY Economics Education I Elective Year 5 15ER150US Entrepreneurship


GO150UY Geography Education I Elective Year 5 15HI150UY History Education I Elective Year 5 15ME150UY Mathematics Education I Elective Year 5 15

291

OE150UY Office Practice Education I

Elective Year 5 15

ES150UY English Language Education I (Secondary)

Elective Year 5 15

SA150UY Afrikaans Language Education I - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 5 15

SK150UY Khoekhoegowab Language Education I - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 5 15

SW150UY Oshikwanyama Language Education I - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 5 15

SD150UY Oshindonga Language Education I - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 5 15

SJ150UY Otjiherero Language Education I - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 5 15

SU150UY Rukwangali Language Education I - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 5 15

SN150UY Rumanyo Language Education I - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 5 15

SL150UY Silozi Language Education I - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 5 15

YEAR 2Course Code


Credits

CP160US Curriculum Planning And Development I

Compulsory 1 6 10

FS260UY Life Skills Education II Compulsory 1 6 12REM70US Religious And Moral

Education For Secondary School

Compulsory 1 7 20

ELA60US Educational Law And Policies

Compulsory 2 6 10

292

ID260US Integrating Technology In Education II

Compulsory 2 6 10

SBS60UY School Based Studies I Compulsory JA 6 8EF260UY Educational Foundations

IICompulsory JA 6 10

Choose 2 Subjects (See Valid Subjects Combination)AN260UY Accounting Education II Elective Year 6 15AG260UY Agriculture Education II Elective Year 6 15BE260UY Business Studies

Education IIElective Year 6 15

CE260UY Computer Studies Education II

Elective Year 6 15

EC260UY Economics Education II Elective Year 6 15ER260UY Entrepreneurship

Education IIElective Year 6 15

GO260UY Geography Education II Elective Year 6 15HI260UY History Education II Elective Year 6 15ME260UY Mathematics Education II Elective Year 6 15OE260UY Office Practice Education

IIElective Year 6 15

ES260UY English Language Education II- Secondary

Elective Year 6 15

SA260UY Afrikaans Language Education II - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 6 15

SK260UY Khoekhoegowab Language Education II - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 6 20

SW260UY Oshikwanyama Language Education II - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 6 15

SD260UY Oshindonga Language Education II - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 6 15

SJ260UY Otjiherero Language Education II - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 6 15

293

SU260UY Rukwangali Language Education II - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 6 15

SN260UY Rumanyo Language Education II - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 6 15

SL260UY Silozi Language Education II - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 6 15

YEAR 3Course Code


Credits

FS370US Life Skills III (Secondary) Compulsory 1 7 12CP270US Curriculum Planning

And Development IICompulsory 1 7 12

EF370UY Educational Foundations III

Compulsory JA 7 12

ERM70UY Research Methodology In Education

Compulsory JA 7 12

SB270UY School Based Studies II Compulsory JA 7 15EVA70US Evaluation In Education Compulsory 2 7 12INS70US Inclusive Education Compulsory 2 7 12SML70US School Management And

LeadershipCompulsory 2 7 12

Choose 2 Subjects (See Valid Subjects Combination)AN370UY Accounting Education II Elective Year 7 15AG370UY Agriculture Education III Elective Year 7 15BE370UY Business Studies


CE370UY Computer Studies Education III

Elective Year 7 15

EC370UY Economics Education III Elective Year 7 15ES370UY English Education III Elective Year 7 15ER370UY Entrepreneurship


G0370UY Geography Education III Elective Year 7 15HI370UY History Education III Elective Year 7 15

294

ME370UY Mathematics Education III

Elective Year 7 15

OE370UY Office Practice Education III

Elective Year 7 15

SF370UY French III Elective Year 7 15SG370UY German III Elective Year 7 15SO370UY Portugese III Elective Year 7 15SA370UY Afrikaans Language

Education III - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 7 15

SK370UY Khoekhoegowab Language Education III- Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 7 15

SW370UY Oshikwanyama Language Education III - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 7 15

SD370UY Oshindonga Language Education III - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 7 15

SJ370UY Otjiherero Language Education III - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 7 15

SU370UY Rukwangali Language Education III - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 7 15

SN370UY Rumanyo Language Education III - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 7 15

SL370UY Silozi Language Education III - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 7 15

ST370UY Thimbukushu Language Education III - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 7 15

Choose 2 Subjects (See Valid Subjects Combination)TAC80UY Teaching Methods

Accounting EducationElective Year 8 10

295

TCS80UY Teaching Methods Computer Studies Education

Elective Year 8 10

TEG80UY Teaching Methods English Education

Elective Year 8 10

TGR80UY Teaching Methods Geography Education

Elective Year 8 10

TMA80UY Teaching Methods Mathematics Education

Elective Year 8 10

TOF80UY Teaching Methods Office Practice Education

Elective Year 8 10

TAG80UY Teaching Methods Agriculture Education

Elective Year 8 10

THI80UY Teaching Methods History Education

Elective Year 8 10

TBS80UY Teaching Methods Business Studies Education

Elective Year 8 10

TET80UY Teaching Methods Entrepreneurship Education

Elective Year 8 10

TEM80UY Teaching Methods Economics Education

Elective Year 8 10

TFR80UY Teaching Methods French Elective Year 8 10TGE80UY Teaching Methods

GermanElective Year 8 10

TPO80UY Teaching Methods Portuguese

Elective Year 8 10

TAF80UY Teaching Methods Afrikaans - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 8 10

TKS80UY Teaching Methods Khoekhoegowab - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 8 10

TWS80UY Teaching Methods Oshikwanyama - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 8 10

296

TDS80UY Teaching Methods Oshindonga - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 8 10

TJS80UY Teaching Methods Otjiherero - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 8 10

TUS80UY Teaching Methods Rukwangali - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 8 10

TRS80UY Teaching Methods Rumanyo - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 8 10

TZS80UY Teaching Methods Silozi - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 8 10

TTS80UY Teaching Methods Thimbukushu - Senior/Secondary

Elective Year 8 10

YEAR 4Course Code


Credits

FAH70US FIRST AID Compulsory 2 7 NCBEF480US Educational Foundations

IVCompulsory Year 8 15

XPJ80UY Educational Research Project


SB480UY School Based Studies III Compulsory Year 8 15PME80UY Project Management in

EducationCompulsory Year 8 15

ESY80UY Education Systems Compulsory Year 8 15Choose 2 Subjects (See Valid Subjects Combination)ES480UY English Language


AN480UY Accounting Education IV Elective Year 8 15AG480UY Agriculture Education IV Elective Year 8 15BE480UY Business Studies


297

CE480UY Computer Studies Education IV

Elective Year 8 15

EC480UY Economics Education IV Elective Year 8 15ER480UY Entrepreneurship


GO480UY Geography Education IV Elective Year 8 15HI480UY History Education IV Elective Year 8 15ME480UY Mathematics Education

IVElective Year 8 15

OE480UY Office Practice Education IV

Elective Year 8 15

SG480UY German Language Education IV

Elective Year 8 15

SF480UY French Language Education IV

Elective Year 8 15

SO480UY Portuguese Language Education IV

Elective Year 8 15

SA480UY Afrikaans Language Education IV

Elective Year 8 15

SK480UY Khoekhoegowab Language Education IV

Elective Year 8 15

SD480UY Oshindonga Language Education IV

Elective Year 8 15

SW480UY Oshikwanyama Language Education IV

Elective Year 8 15

SJ480UY Otjiherero Language Education IV

Elective Year 8 15

SU480UY Rukwangali Language Education IV

Elective Year 8 15

SN480UY Rumanyo Language Education IV

Elective Year 8 15

SL480UY Silozi Language Education IV

Elective Year 8 15

ST480UY Thimbukushu Language Education IV

Elective Year 8 15

298

Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content acquired learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing. To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses.

Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.


Courses will be evaluated for their current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting.

Credits earned at an unaccredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.



The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgement of the IUM on this question shall be final.


Assessment and Evaluation Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period.

Students must score at least 50% in each course modes to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

299

Practical Teaching All students should acquire field experience in the Second, Third and Fourth year of study and submit a report. For the:

o Second year - this field experience amounts to 40 hours (consecutive 2 weeks) of class observation per year (Each level - 8 hours);o Third year - this period of practice teaching amounts to 80 hours (consecutive 4 weeks) per year (Grade 8 and 9 – each 40 hours); and o Fourth year - this period of practice teaching amounts to 240 hours (consecutive 6 weeks) hours per year (Grade 8 and 9 – each 24 hours, and Grade 10 through Grade 12 – 64 hours each). Note: The above is a provisional working formula for practical teaching hours’ distribution. The actual distribution of the hours will vary according to the area(s) of specialisation.

Each and every one of these field experiences are examinable and are a requirement for graduation. Assessment is by means of observation of the student, student assessment by staff (both respective school and IUM), and by submission of a portfolio. Furthermore, students will be required to practice teaching in at least one (1) school in the rural setting during the 3 years of practice teaching.

Final ExaminationsThe final examination counts for 60% of the overall final mark. The final examination comes at the end of the course. Unless prescribed otherwise, the standard examinations will be of three hours duration. Examiners may, in addition to written examination, test any candidate orally. Supplementary ExaminationsA student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination.


Teaching Methods/Strategies The teaching and learning processes will take place through lectures, tutorial activities and discussion, school-based activities, collaborative group tasks, practical projects and written assignments.

Students must have access to a computer and the Internet and other modern technology

300

especially appreciated in the secondary school instruction. The teaching and learning methods adapted for this qualification are student-centred learning methods. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read and research extensively in each of the courses. Each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process. Guided reading materials and research will support these endeavours.

The delivery methods for this qualification comprise of the fulltime, part time and block release learning modes. Contact hours for block release mode are face-to- face encounters on a monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays such as Easter break.


Articulation Upon the successful completion of the requirements for an award of the Bachelor of Education (Secondary) Honours a candidate may be granted admission to a Master of Education programme. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Masters programme. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related undergraduate teachers qualifications.

301

Postgraduate Diploma in Education (NQF Level: 8)

Purpose This qualification is designed for the professionally unqualified and/or underqualified senior primary or secondary school teachers, who earned a qualification in a subject matter, but who do not have qualification in pedagogy and/or other Teacher Education professional qualification. It is a one-year qualification aimed at providing participants with the requisite pedagogical knowledge and skills to be more effective and competent teachers, lecturers or trainers. The focus of the qualification is to equip participants with good pedagogical practices in the design, delivery and evaluation of curricula. The qualification also aims to equip participants with critical self-reflection in relation to current international trends and challenges in pedagogy. It enables participants to become familiar with the delivery of curricula to a variety of students, through various modes of delivery, in a wide range of contexts.

Students will acquire theoretical and practical pedagogical methodologies that can be applied in the art of imparting knowledge and skills (teaching/learning process) in different contexts. This qualification is designed for the professionally unqualified and/or underqualified senior primary or secondary school teachers, who earned a qualification in a subject matter, but who do not have qualification in pedagogy and/or other Teacher Education professional qualification. With this qualification, these teachers will be professionally qualified to undertake teaching assignments in both the private and public schools. The qualification will equip the teachers with the right tools to fulfil their true potential and to become defining players in the education system.

Outcomes for the Whole Qualification

Holders of this qualification are able to:•Applyappropriatepedagogicstotheirteachingcontexts;•Designcurriculaincludinglearningandteachingmethodologies,assessmentstrategiesand evaluation models in accordance with the set standards;•Organiseandmaintainalearningclimateandclassroomenvironmentthatsupportslearning and growth.•Integrateandapplyappropriateteachingmethodologytothesubjectmatter•Demonstrateprofessionalgrowth,competence,values,reflectionandevaluation•Integrateknowledge,experience,andskillsacrossdomainsandcontexts.

Qualification durationThe study period for the qualification is:Fulltime/Partime/Block Release mode - Minimum: 1 Year; Maximum: 2 Years.The qualification comprises of two (2) semesters, per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

302

COURSES

YEAR 1Course Title

Course Code Status Semester NQF Level

Credits

AED80PY Assessment In Education

Compulsory Year 8 8

CMS80PY Classroom Management and Supervision


CPD80PY Curriculum Planning & Development In Education


ETP80PY Education Theory & Practice


EPR80PY English Proficiency

Compulsory Year 8 8

PGC80PY Guidance And Counselling

Compulsory Year 8 8

XPE80PS PG Dip Mini Research Project


TPE80PY Teaching Practice (10 weeks-SBS)


Choose 2 Subjects (See Valid Subjects Combination)TET80PY Teaching

Methods of Entrepreneurship

Elective Year 8 10

TAC80PY Teaching Methods of Accounting

Elective Year 8 10

TAG80PY Teaching Methods of Agriculture

Elective Year 8 10

TBI80PY Teaching Methods of Biology

Elective Year 8 10

303

TBS80PY Teaching Methods of Business Studies

Elective Year 8 10

TCS80PY Teaching Methods of Computer Studies

Elective Year 8 10

TEM80PY Teaching Methods of Economics

Elective Year 8 10

TGR80PY Teaching Methods of Geography

Elective Year 8 10

THI80PY Teaching Methods of History

Elective Year 8 10

TMA80PY Teaching Methods of Mathematics

Elective Year 8 10

TOF80PY Teaching Methods of Office Practice

Elective Year 8 10

TPS80PY Teaching Methods of Physical Science

Elective Year 8 10

TEG80PY Teaching Methods of English

Elective Year 8 10

TAF80PY Teaching Methods of Afrikaans

Elective Year 8 10

TKH80PY Teaching Methods of Khoekhoegowab

Elective Year 8 10

TKW80PY Teaching Methods of Oshikwanyama

Elective Year 8 10

TDO80PY Teaching Methods of Oshindonga

Elective Year 8 10

304

THE80PY Teaching Methods of Otjiherero

Elective Year 8 10

TRU80PY Teaching Methods of Rukwangali

Elective Year 8 10

TRM80PY Teaching Methods of Rumanyo

Elective Year 8 10

TSI80PY Teaching Methods of Silozi

Elective Year 8 10

Credit Transfer

Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications.

Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.

Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning, the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibian Qualification Authority requirements.Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting.

Credits earned at an unaccredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.



The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that

305

the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgement of the IUM on this question shall be final.


Assessment and Evaluation Coursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.

Final Examinations


Supplementary Examinations

A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination.


Teaching Methods/Strategies

Courses will be delivered using blended learning modalities, including lectures, online tutorials, advanced simulations, video and audio conferencing technologies. Learners must have access to a computer and the Internet. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read and research extensively in each of the courses. Each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process. Guided reading materials and research will support these endeavours.

306

Articulation Vertically, the Postgraduate Diploma in Education grants admission to Master of Education. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Masters programme. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related teachers qualifications at NQF level 8.

307

Postgraduate Diploma in Higher Education (NQF Level: 8)

Purpose The International University of Management (IUM)’s Faculty of Educational Administration and Management is committed to the development of human resources in order to address the needs of the education sector in Namibia as articulated in the National Human Resources Plan 2010-2025. In this regard, the focus is to contribute to the production of professionally qualified teachers who are able to interpret and implement the curriculum in a holistic way as innovative educators, instructional leaders, planners, counsellors and researchers.

This qualification is designed for tertiary educators to attain good pedagogical practice in the quality delivery of the curriculum. The qualification aims to equip tertiary educators with critical self-reflection in relation to current international trends and challenges in pedagogics. It enables tertiary educators to become familiar with the delivery of curriculum to a variety of students, through various models of delivery, in a wide range of contexts.

Conventionally, the proficiency in one’s own discipline has been the most respected feature of a tertiary educator. In recent years, however, there has been a growing entreaty to improve tertiary educators’ pedagogical thinking and skills as well. As a consequence, training of tertiary educators is becoming a widespread trend in many countries. And it is in this line that the IUM designed this qualification - Postgraduate Diploma in Teaching and Learning (Higher Education) to encompass instruction in all educational disciplines; helping tertiary educators to build confidence in a teaching environment.

It is the IUM’s belief that this qualification on pedagogical training will have an effect on scales measuring conceptual change/student-focused approach and self-efficacy beliefs in tertiary education for this qualification will provide the requisite pedagogical knowledge and skills needed for value results.

Vertically, the Postgraduate Diploma in Teaching and Learning (Higher Education) grants admission to Master of Education. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Master qualification. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related teachers qualifications at NQF level 8

Outcomes for the whole qualificationHolders of this qualification are able to:• Design and implement instructional practices to produce a positive impact on

teaching and learning.• Demonstrate an understanding of the process of educational change and how to

communicate effectively to stakeholders.

308

• Analyse the educational needs of the students.• Create innovative strategies and incorporate technology in tertiary education• Demonstrate deep and thorough conceptual understanding of identified aspects of

the subject matter.

Qualification durationThe study period for the qualification is:Full time/Part time/Block Release mode - Minimum: 1 Year; Maximum: 2 Years.The qualification comprises of TWO (2) semesters, per academic year.. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

COURSESYEAR 1Course Title

Course Code Status Semester NQF Level

Credits

AHE80PYAssessment in Higher Education


EHE80PYE- Learning in Higher Education


EDM80PYEducational Management


PDA80PY

Curriculum Planning and Development In Higher Education


RSH80PY

Research Supervision in Higher Education


TLH80PY

Teaching and Learning in Higher Education


Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses. Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of

309

higher learning, the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an unaccredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that the quality of instruction at such institutions is for any reason deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.The IUM reserves the right to reject transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

ASSESSMENT AND EVALUATION Coursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the activities and evaluations undertaken by the student during study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.




Teaching Methods/StrategiesCourses will be delivered using blended learning modalities, including lectures, online

310

tutorials, advanced simulations, video and audio conferencing technologies. Learners must have access to a computer and the Internet. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read and research extensively in each of the courses. Each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process. Guided reading materials and research will support these endeavours.

Articulation Vertically, the Postgraduate Diploma in Teaching and Learning (Higher Education) grants admission to Master of Education. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to any Masters programme. Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related teachers qualifications at NQF level 8.

311

Bachelor in Education: Educational Leadership, Management and Policy honours degree


Mission Statement The International University of Management (IUM)’s Faculty of Educational Administration and Management (FEAM) targets to utilise available expertise and resources to contribute towards the development of human resources that meet the needs and challenges of pre-tertiary and tertiary education in Namibia as articulated in the National Human Resources Plan 2010-2015. The main thrust of teaching, research and community engagement in the Faculty focuses on the production of eminent teachers, curriculum developers, educational planners, administrators, counsellors and researchers.

Rationale The Bachelor in Education - Educational Leadership, Management and Policy Honours is one of the qualifications currently offered by IUM. This qualification was initially developed to contribute to the development of human resources in the education sector due to the identified gaps in the number of appropriately qualified education managers, as indicated the “National Human Resource Plan 2010-2025” (NPC, 2012).

The qualification blends theory with practical application in order to equip education managers with the necessary knowledge and skills for improved institutional performances. It introduces education managers to theories, education issues and research around educational leadership, management and policy in Namibia and beyond. The qualification has a variety of important topics to assist students to understand leadership theories while laying a foundation for the administration and management of different tasks in educational settings.

Purpose The qualification further aims to strengthen students’ knowledge of leadership skills and management skills in order to lead effectively and efficiently by handling educational issues that affect schools and different departments in the education sector. The training and development of appropriately qualified education managers at various levels will enable the education sector to make a meaningful contribution to the realisation of knowledge based society in line with Vision 2030 goals.

To be admitted to this qualification a candidate should have a Bachelor in Education or equivalent qualification at NQF level 7 and relevant working experiences. Candidates in management position with relevant qualifications may be considered for admission in

312

this qualification which has to be determined by the IUM Senate.

Articulation PossibilitiesUpon the successful completion of the requirements for an award of the Bachelor in Education – Educational Leadership and Policy Honours, a candidate may be granted admission to a Master of Education. Interfaculty students can apply for approval with the Deans of other Faculties for assessment to gain admission to related Master qualifications.

Horizontally, students may, where applicable, move into existing or new related postgraduate related teachers’ qualifications.

Who is the qualification for? This qualification targets among others, the following levels of staff in the education sector: School Inspectors, Education Officers, School Principals, Vice Principals, Heads of Department and Senior Teachers.

Outcomes for whole qualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: • Analyze educational policies, and contribute to innovative solutions to educational

matters;• Conduct independent inquiry in a specialized field of leadership, management and

policy and report their findings in academically appropriate ways;• Exhibit the potential to act as academic leaders and experts in the field of educational

leadership, management and policy;• Plan and execute advanced research in the educational leadership, management and

policy field;• Identify the principles, practices and methods appreciated in education leadership,

management and policy and apply them in the education system and rest of society;• Recognise and understand the factors determining the extent to which Education

Leadership, Management and policy is relevant to good governance, public office, democracy, quality service delivery, law and order, equality and justice;

• Identify problems and develop a range of short term, medium-term and long term solutions in the area of Education Leadership, Management and policy; and

• Initiate change and effect change in the area of Education Leadership, Management and policy.

Admission/Entry RequirementsThe entry requirements to this qualification shall be: • A Bachelor in Education or equivalent qualification at NQF level 7 with at least two

years related work experience.or• A qualification in Education NQF Level 6 with at least three years related work

experience.

313

• Special considerations for admission might also be determined by the IUM Senate.

Qualification Duration The study period for the qualification is:- Fulltime/part time mode - Minimum: 2 Years; Maximum: 4 Years.- The qualification comprises four (4) semesters, i.e. two (2) semesters per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December. Modes of Teaching and LearningA wide range of teaching methods will be employed by lecturers from traditional lectures through to small decision-making groups, as well as the use of training films and videos and advanced business simulations. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the subjects. Each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process. Programmed reading and reading guides will support these endeavours.

Class contributions and presentations by the students will be encouraged and the extent to which these contributions and presentations conform to the student learning of the first year will be an important facet in the success of the student.

Individual assignments will be set by the lecturer every two weeks and should be equivalent to the standard of examinations. These will normally take the form of an e-mailed or duplicated hand out that should be returned with the finished assignment. There will also be tests given. The student will be expected to carry these out without solicited or unsolicited help. It is in the student’s interest to carry out these assignments and tests with integrity. They will be marked anonymously against a given marking scheme. In this way assessment will become part of the student’s learning.

The lecturer will use these results to monitor student progress and to make decisions as to whether the student is ready to sit examinations when the time comes. Students may not sit examinations unless the lecturer judges he or she has a good chance of succeeding.

Assessment Coursework/Continuous AssessmentContinuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the assignments tests and other academic activities undertaken by the student during the study period. Students must score at least 50% in each subject/course coursework to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50% needs to redo some or all the assigned academic activities.

314


Supplementary ExaminationsA student who fails a subject/course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a subject/course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same subject/course until the subject/course is passed.A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the subjects/courses or credits.

Quality Assurance RequirementsThe quality assurance for this qualification will be assured through the processes of accreditation and registration on the National Qualifications Framework (NQF) by the Namibia Qualifications Authority (NQA); engagement with relevant stakeholders from the industry; benchmarking with other universities; and regular review of curriculum, policies, delivery strategies and assessments. Regular monitoring of class activities and staff development will be in place. Students will be asked to complete evaluation sheets for each subject studied in this course and also to evaluate their lecturers. Quality will be also assured through a dual performance evaluation system where lecturers and their supervisors appraise each other. Further, internal and external moderation of continuous assessments and final examinations will be regularly conducted and the courses under this qualification will be taught by persons who hold qualifications at a level higher than NQF Level 8.

Awarding of the qualificationCandidates will be eligible for the appropriate qualification when they have passed all the required courses specified in this qualifications as well as research project and any other additional requirements stipulated in the IUM student policies.

To be awarded the Bachelor in Education – educational leadership, management and policy honours, a candidate must have passed all taught courses and must also have passed the research project component.

Other requirements Each student must undertake a research on a particular case in Education and give a report of 20000- 25000 words. This report should demonstrate original research on a topic related to education leadership, management and/or policy. It should have satisfied

315

all the defined requirement as per IUM guidelines of research project

The Bachelor in Education – Educational Leadership, Management and Policy Honours marks category shall be classified as follows:

80% and above First Class Division70-79% Upper Second Class60-69% Lower Second Class50-59% Pass40-49% Supplementary Fail0-39% Fail

Credit TransferInternal students that apply for advanced standing or credit accumulation or credit transfer will have their cases considered by the relevant faculty. Students from other institutions other than IUM will have their cases considered by the relevant faculty. And credit for such qualifications may be awarded to the maximum of fifty percent of total credits for any qualification conducted by IUM. Appeals may be submitted to senate.

Credit SystemsReference is made to the internationally acceptable formula: one (1) credit equates ten (10) notional hours (learning). A first year student in this programme will attract credits. Successful completion of this year will allow a student to register for the final year.

General Guideline for Teaching and Learning Time per Subject (10 hours per credit)Item Delivery Summary of Activities Hours Credits1 Lectures

SeminarsTutorialsWorkshops

Tutorial support includes feedback on assignments and may vary by college according to local needs and wishes.

40 4

2 Directed learning

Advance reading and preparation / Class preparation / Background reading / Group study / Portfolio / Diary etc.

40 4

3 Self-managed learning

Working through the course text and completing assignments as required will take up the bulk of the learning time. In addition students are expected to engage with the tutor and other students and to undertake further reading using the web and/or libraries

70 7

TOTAL 150 15

316

Qualification structure The programme has a coursework component and a research component. It may be taken on a full-time or part-time basis. The assessment structure will be practice-driven and will include an emphasis on case studies, research projects that are grounded in authentic work-based settings, and group cooperation and collaborations for both oral and written reflective presentations.

CoursesThe interdisciplinary nature of this qualification is reflected in the required core courses. The student can then reinforce his or her individual strengths in an area of particular interest through the programme concentration and the research domain. The programme’s restricted electives, coupled with university general education requirements, provide the student with a well-rounded, multi-faceted learning experience that prepares the student for today’s changing world.

317

List of CoursesYEAR IIICourse Code


Credits

AWP80US Academic Writing for Postgraduate

Compulsory 1 8 10

EMT80US Educational Media and Technology

Compulsory 1 8 10

PRM80US Project Management Compulsory 1 8 10LME80UY Educational Leadership

and ManagementCompulsory Year 8 12

FOM80UY Educational Financial Management


ILC80UY Leadership and Curriculum Management


ERM80UY Educational Research Compulsory Year 8 12LEI80UY Legal and Ethical Issues

in EducationCompulsory Year 8 12

Year IVCourse Code

course title Status Semester NQF Level

Credits

OSH80US Occupational Safety and Health Management

Compulsory 1 8 10

MIO80US Managing Innovation in Organizations

Compulsory 1 8 10

STS80US System Thinking and Strategic Management

Compulsory 1 8 10

PPG80US Practices of Good Governance

Compulsory 1 8 10

LCO80UY Leadership Change and Organizational Development


EPP80UY Educational Policy and Planning


XED80UY Research Project Compulsory Year 8 30

318

319

CENTRE FOR IMPROVED INSTITUTIONAL PERFORMANCE

(CIIP)

320

Centre For Institutional Improvement And Performance (CIIP)

About CIIP

MissionTo be a source for the improvement of institutional management performance at all levels in the private and public sectors.

DeliveryTraditional short courses as well as Soft Skill training on site, for the public and private sectors.

IUM Staff TrainingThe centre delivers regular staff training to ensure that IUM delivers best service to its customers.

Certification•CertificateofAttendancewillbeawarded forworkshopandshortcourses forwhoseduration is less than a semester.•AnIUMcertificatewillbeissuedforallothershortcourseswhosedurationislongerthan one semester, the delegate must attain a pass mark of 50%.

Fees•Applicationandregistrationfeesarenon-refundableandispaiduponregistration•30%oftherequiredtuitionfeesmustbepaidbeforethecommencementofclass•Nocertificatewillbeissuedunlessallfeesaresettledandallsubjectspassed.•20%rebatewillbegiventoreturningCIIPstudents Short courses on offer 1. Administrative Short Courses: •CertificateSecretarial&OfficeAdministration •Diploma:OfficeAdministration2. Finance Short Courses: •BookkeepingCertificate4. Management Short Courses: •ManagementDevelopment5. Computer Studies •FundamentalsofDatabases •AdvancedDatabasedesign •Webdevelopment •PCMaintenance6. Entrepreneurial studies •FoundationalEntrepreneurship

321

•AdvancedEntrepreneurship6. Preparatory Course7. Professional Development and Soft Skills Workshops

CERTIFICATE: Secretarial and Office Administration

About this course A qualified and competent Secretary is central to the smooth running of any business, ensuring day to day activities happen in the most efficient manner. As a Secretary, you will require excellent skills in IT, organisation, good composure, flexibility, and strong interpersonal and communication abilities, which you will acquire from this course.

What you will learnThis course is designed to develop your keyboard skills, teach you how to master the most common business software packages, and give you excellent communication techniques which will enable you to understand the language of business.

Who should attend?Anyone who wants to improve their skills and those who may lack in this area. The courses will better your skills and enable you to work under pressure, learn how to prioritise workloads which will enable a candidate to do the work efficiently.

DurationOne Semester [This period includes all activities that will take place, including holidays, class and assessment.]

Entry Criteria•Grade10•Matureentryisalsoencouraged

Cost: Application fee N$140.00, Registration fee N$750.00 (non-refundable) plus: + Course fee N$6,410.00All fees must be paid 4 weeks before the final exams

322

Programme Modules Duration & Assessments

Total Costs

Certificate: Secretarial and Office Administration

Keyboard and Basic Typing KBT0SC Semester-long.

[See note above]

Admissions in semester 1 and semester 2 One (1) assessment will be done after every module and student should score 50% or more to qualify to write the exam in May or Nov

N$7,300.00

Base Profile - Word Processing IWP0SCBase Profile - Spread sheets ISP0SCBase Profile – Online and Computer Essentials COE0SCOffice Administration 1 OA10SC Basic Numeracy BN0SC English Language Basics ELB0SC

323

CERTIFICATE: BookkeepingAbout this courseThe purpose of this course is to give students with no prior knowledge of bookkeeping a foundation in the fundamentals of bookkeeping.

What you will learn? You will learn these main functions:• Basic English and Numeracy for a better understanding of Bookkeeping terms andcalculations.•Theabilitytomaintainup-to-daterecordkeepingoffinancialtransactions.•Correctaccountingbooksi.e.Ledger•Doubleentrybookkeepingandnotes.•Introductiontofinancialstatements.•BasicWordProcessing.

Who should attend? This qualification is designed for people who are seeking to start a career in bookkeeping or as a financial clerk DurationOne Semester [This period includes all activities that will take place, including holidays, class and examination.]

Cost: Application fee N$140.00 Registration fee N$750.00 (non-refundable), plus: + Course feeN$6,620.00Final Payment must be paid 4 weeks before the final examsProgramme

SubjectDuration & Assessments Total Costs

Certificate in Bookkeeping

Introduction Bookkeeping IBKOSC

Semester-long

Admissions in semester 1 and semester 2One (1) assessment will be done after every module and Student should score 50% or more to qualify to write the exam in May or Nov

N$7,510.00

Base Profile - Word Processing IWP0SC

Base Profile - Spread sheets ISP0SC

Base Profile - Computer and Online Essentials COE0SC

Business Accounting BA0SCEnglish Language Basics ELB0SC

Basic Numeracy BN0SC

324

DIPLOMA: Office AdministrationAbout this courseWith this course you will improve on the high quality, office skills training learnt in the Certificate in Secretarial and Office Administration course and you will also learn how to speak the language of business.

What you will learnYou will learn how to master in-demand software packages for presentations, project planning and databases, as well as excellent computer keyboard skills and creating complex business documentation.

Who should attend?Anyone who has completed the Certificate: Secretarial and Office Administration. DurationOne Semester [This period includes all activities that will take place, including holidays, class and examination.]

Entry CriteriaCertificate: Secretarial and Office Administration

Cost: Application fee N$140.00, Registration fee N$750.00 (non-refundable) plus: + Course fee = N$8,930.00All fees must be paid 4 weeks before the final exams

325


Total Costs

Diploma: Office Administration

Advanced Typing & Speed Development TSD0SC

Semester-long.[See note above]

Admissions in semester 1 and semester 2

1 x CA1 x Exam May & November

N$9,820.00

IUM Computer Studies: Standard Profile Presentation IPT0SCIUM Computer Studies: Standard Profile Using Databases IUD0SCIUM Computer Studies: Standard Profile IT Security ISEOSCOffice Administration 2 OA20SC Business Communication BC0SC Introduction to Bookkeeping IBK0SCBusiness Ethics – BE0SC

MDP: Management Development Programme [Only in Windhoek]

About this courseThis course offers the skills you need to evaluate information and address business challenges. You learn fundamental business concepts and proven management analysis tools typically needed on a daily basis to guide your analysis, planning, decision and implementation

What you will learn Leverage organisational structures, operations and systems to achieve business objectives; Apply finance and accounting techniques to support decision-making; Formulate a comprehensive marketing plan; Integrate business practices to optimise organisational effectiveness; Develop strategies that create on-going competitive advantage

Who should attend?Managers at all levels, business analysts, IT professionals and anyone who wants a fast-track course to improve their business knowledge and decision-making, or needs to better interact with marketing, sales, finance or operations staff. Duration: See table below

Entry CriteriaMinimum of 3 years in a fully-appointed supervisory role & one programme leads to

326the next.Cost: Application fee N$140.00, Registration fee N$750.00(non-refundable) plus: Course FeeNew Managers: MDP Programme N$9,450.00Senior Managers: MDP Programme N$11,550.00Module Subject Duration & Assessments Total Costs

New Managers: MDP Programme

Leadership skills required of a new manager LSN0SC

Windhoek only.Course is made of : ‘contact’ sessions with Tutors; Self-study; Research and “Formal’ class room work

Total Time – 200 hours. Semester-long.

Evaluation – Group work, Individual & presentations.

N$10,340.00

Goal setting and planning management GSP0SCTime management and communication TMC0SCBusiness Writing Skills & Report Writing BWR0SCPrinciples of Marketing Theory PMT0SC

Senior Managers: MDP Programme

Building effective interpersonal interactions BEI0SC

Windhoek only.

Course is made of : ‘contact’ sessions with Tutors; Self-study;Research and “Formal’ class room work

Total Time – 250 hours. Semester-long.

Evaluation – Group work, Individual & Presentation.

N$12,440.00

On boarding & Hiring for Success OHS0SC PWP0SC - Developing personal and work group improvement plansDeveloping High Performance Teams DHP0SC Managing Diversity and Inclusion MDI0SC Professional Supervision & Delegation PSD0SC Professional Performance Reviews PPR0SC Managing Disciplinary and Grievances Effectively MDG0SC

327

Preparatory CourseAbout this courseThe Preparatory Course is a qualification which prepares people for study at university.

What you will learnThe Preparatory Course provides a good foundation in the knowledge and skills required for studying at university level, so that students are confident and well prepared when they enrol for academic courses at higher education level.

Who should attend?Students who do not meet the minimum entry points for academic courses.

Duration: Preparatory year February to November [This period includes all activities that will take place, including holidays, class and examination.] Entry Criteria18 or 19 points at Grade 12 in five subjects including English

Cost: Application fee N$140.00 Registration fee N$750.00 (non-refundable), plus: Course Fee N$12,290.00

328


Cost excl. App & Reg

PreparatoryPREP

Computer Studies: Base Profile - Word Processing IWP0SCBase Profile - Spread sheets ISP0SCBase Profile - Computer and Online Essentials COE0SC

February – SeptemberTwo Continuous (2) assessment will be done after every module and Student should score 50% or more to qualify to write the exam in Nov

N$13,180.00

Basic Arithmetic Skills PREBASEnglish for Academic Purposes PREEAPEssay WritingNote-taking and note-makingSpeaking and Listening SkillsReading and Comprehension of Academic TextsWriting Standard Academic EnglishExamination Skills: Preparing for and Succeeding in an ExaminationIntroduction to Management PREIM

329

English Language Upgrade CourseAbout this course: This intensive course will prepare those who have not scored a D or better in English at grade 12 for the demands of writing University level reports and essays.

What you will learn: Advanced English for Academic Purposes

Who should attend: Anyone who has scored E in Grade 12 English (Excluding students intending to register or are registered for Education, Electronics and Health science courses)

Duration: 6 months

Entry Criteria: None

Tuition Fee: N$ 2,210.00

Programme Cost DurationEnglish Upgrade Course SENGL N$ 2,210.00 1 semester

Foreign/Second Language CoursesAbout this course: Each of these courses gives an introduction to the language

What you will learn: Each course is designed to give you basic written and spoken skills in the language course of your choice.

Who should attend: Anyone interested in learning English, French or German as a second language.

Duration: 1 year

Entry Criteria: None

Cost: See Table Below

330

Programme Cost DurationFrench SFREN N$2,210.00

Application (N$140.00) + Registration (N$750.00) Total Costs N$3,100.00

1 year

German SGERM N$2,210.00Application (N$140.00) + Registration (N$750.00) Total Costs N$3,100.00

1 year

English - Foreign/Second Language SENGB

N$3,680.00Application (N$140.00) + Registration (N$750.00) Total Costs N$4,570.00

1 year

331

Professional Development and workshop courses

COURSE NAME Duration Meetings Administration 1 Day Public Policy Analysis & Monitoring and Evaluation 3 Days Systems thinking and strategic development 2 Days Fundamentals of Entrepreneurship 3 Days

Environment Impact Assessment 3 DaysTraining of Trainers 4 DaysCustomer Service Excellence Strategies 2 DaysFood Handling & Safety 3 DaysMunicipal Waste Management 3 Days

Project Management Strategies 4 DaysLogistics and Supply Chain management 5 DaysAgribusiness Concepts 5 DaysKnowledge Transfer and Management 2 DaysEmotional Intelligence in the workplace 2 DaysBusiness Plan Writing 2 DaysWarehouse Management & Inventory 5 DaysSocial Media Marketing Strategy 5 DaysInnovation & Intellectual Property Management 5 DaysResearch Skills for Postgraduate 4 DaysLeadership & Management as effective instruments of the 21st century 3 DaysNational Security & Diplomacy 5 DaysMicrosoft Office (MS) & Cisco Certified Network Associate (CCNA) 10 Days

• Course roll out is subject to minimum number of students registered for the course.

• Full payment is required before the course starts.• Venues for the courses will be in Windhoek & the Swakopmund IUM Research

centre.• Note, however, that all short courses can be offered anywhere in Namibia at the

request of the organization/companies.

332

333

DISTANCE AND E-LEARNING CENTRE

334

DISTANCE AND E-LEARNING CENTRE

IUM launched its Distance and Open Learning programme several years ago. This gave opportunity to persons who, for various reasons, could not access full-time or part-time university programmes opportunity to enroll in all the programmes the university offered on full-time and part-time modes at all levels : Certificate to Bachelor Honours degree levels.

IUM was admitted to the membership of the Distance Education Association of Southern Africa (DEASA) in 2012.

IUM outsourced the administrative aspects of this service to the Institute of Open Learning (IOL) several years ago. This arrangement has, however, now ended and the university is set to use E-Learning, Blended E-Learning, and Blended Learning to offer its programmes across the board.

IUM recognizes that in the digital era, the theory and practice of distance education/learning are fast being subsumed by online education and eLearning and is prepared to meet the consequences of this reality head on. In this regard, the Distance and E-Learning Centre will use fine-tuned or digitized distance learning, e-learning, and blended e-learning to support student learning.

335

SCHOOL OF POSTGRADUATE STUDIES

336

IntroductionThe International University of Management School of Postgraduate Studies is designed to facilitate a sustainable transition for an aspiring candidate from acquiring knowledge towards an advanced stage of its creation and application beyond the curriculum. Through various academic programmes, the Postgraduate School aims at establishing a holistic nature and legitimacy of a research culture, to motivate candidates to cultivate ability for intercultural and transnational communication, in scientific, economic, business, social, and political spheres.

ProgrammesThe School of Postgraduate Studies currently offers studies leading to the following awards:

Master of Business Administration (Marketing)Master of Business Administration (Finance)Master of Business Administration (Management)Master of Business Administration (Human Resources)Master in HIV/AIDS ManagementMaster of Education – Educational Leadership, Management and Policy EducationMaster of Science in Information TechnologyMaster of Science in Tourism and Hospitality ManagementMaster in International Relations Diplomacy and ManagementMaster in Public Policy and ManagementPhD in Business AdministrationPhD in Information and Communication TechnologyPhD in EducationPhD in Tourism and Hospitality

337

Master of Business Administration (NQF Level: 9)Compulsory Strands

CompulsoryElective

Level 8 credits: 196 192 104Minimum total credits required: 196 48 13

RATIONALEThe main purpose of the Master of Business Administration degree programme is to provide knowledge and skills for aspiring senior managers, administrators, supervisors and professionals, and to further develop managerial skills of women and men already holding positions of authority and influence in organisation in the country and beyond. The qualification builds on the theoretical aspects of earlier learning at graduate level 8 by developing and sharpening managers’ capacities in research, investigation, decision-making, design and development, implementation, monitoring and evaluation.

This qualification combines a synergistic mix of academics and practitioners where the former concentrates on the transfer of knowledge while the latter concentrates on the transfer of skills. Integration of statistical skills and competencies, informational technology, research, project planning and management and strategic business innovation and development make the programme relevant to close the gap of much needed qualified manpower. The graduates of this qualification will not only meet the needs of the market, but also create jobs thereby adding value to the national economy. to survive the hostile and business environments and global economic downturns.

PURPOSEThis qualification aims to train resourceful and qualified professionals and practitioners who will not only contribute to the national economies, but also navigate and provide solutions to the uncertain and volatile business economic environment prevailing in Namibia and the region. This training will help students to develop strong business management acumen and broaden their career prospects.The qualification will equip managers, supervisors, and entrepreneurs who want to be adequately equipped, skilled, creative and innovative. The MBA is designed to equip the captains of industry and commerce with management tools needed to survive the hostile and business environments and global economic downturns.

ADMISSION REQUIREMENTSTo be admitted to this qualification, a candidate must have at least successfully completed an undergraduate degree (NQF level 7/8) in any discipline from the International University of Management (IUM), and/or equivalent from any other recognised university or institution of higher learning or,Must have obtained such professional qualifications or membership of professional institution deemed equivalent to a diploma or first degree by the Postgraduate

338

Admissions Committee and approved by the IUM Senate and Stakeholders.Further information on admission requirements can be seen below, in a section titled Regulations for the degree of Master.

TARGET GROUPThe MBA is designed for professionals willing to take up regional and international assignments in both the private and public sectors. It builds on the bachelors or equivalent qualifications already held by supervisory and senior managers. The MBA is structured to stretch and challenge the managers to fulfil their true potential and to become defining players in the management of organisational change.

QUALIFICATION DURATIONMinimum: 2 YearsMaximum:5 Years OUTCOMES OF THE WHOLE QUALIFICATIONHOLDERS OF THIS QUALIFICATION ARE ABLE TO: •Demonstratemasteryofprinciples,concepts,knowledgeandskills/talentsofefficientand effective organisational management.•Evaluatecriticallyexistingsocialmanagement science theoriesandconcepts for thepurpose of applying them in real life organisational situations.•Engageinrigorousintellectualanalysis,interpretation,criticismandproblem-solvingdemonstrating analytical thinking skills and innovativeness on given case problems and problems obtaining on the ground.•Research,analyseandarguefactuallyfromsituationalevidenceobtainingandtherefromrecommend appropriate interventional strategic courses of action.• Exercise morality and ethical behaviour in managing risks and ensuring expectedcorporate governance practice.•Diagnose problemsbefore theyhappen, drawupdamage control actionplans, andimplement them in a manner that charters the organisation along a path of profitability/success.•Organizeresourcesefficientlyandethicallyinamannerthatensuresattainabilityoftheorganisation’s bottom-line/primary objective. CREDIT SYSTEMS Reference is made to the internationally acceptable formula: one (1) credit equates ten (10) notional hours (learning).The general guideline for teaching and learning time per course, based on the 10 hours per credit approach, is as per the table below. An example of a course with 15 credits was used to determine the notional hours

General Guideline for Teaching and Learning Time per Subject (10 hours per credit)

339

Item Delivery Summary of Activities Hours Credits

1 LecturesSeminaTutorialWorkshops

Tutorial support including feedback on assignments and may vary by college according to local needs and wishes.

40 4

2 Directed learning Advanced reading and preparation / Class preparation / Background reading / Group study / Portfolio / Diary etc.

30 3

3 Self-managed learning

Working through the course text and completing assignments as required will take up the bulk of the learning time. In addition students are expected to engage with the tutor and other students and to undertake further read-ing using the web and/or libraries

30 3

TOTAL 100 10

ARTICULATIONHolders of Bachelors or equivalent qualification in various fields will be able to articu-late to Master of Business Administration or any other qualification at level 9.

CREDIT TRANSFERHolders of academic qualifications obtained from other bona fide educational institu-tions may be granted exemptions on the subjects sat for and passed. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within a period of five years. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an NQA accredited institution or equivalent. Credits from other universities and/or institutions may be awarded up to 50% of total credits for the qualification at IUM.

ASSESSMENTBoth Formative and Summative assessment techniques are used.Students taking this course shall be assessed and evaluated as follows:

340

•Continuousassessment40%(ascoreof50%plusrequiredtoqualifyforexamination)•FinalExamination60%(aminimumof36%requiredinexaminationtopasscourse)

TEACHING METHODS/STRATEGIESA wide range of teaching methods will be employed by lecturers from traditional lectures through to small decision-making groups, as well as the use of training films and videos and advanced business simulations. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the subjects. Each student will be men-tored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process. Programmed reading and reading guides will support these endeavours.The following common lecture delivery strategies shall be used depending on the lecturer:•Centralclasspresentation(PowerPointandchalk-talk)bylecturer.•Centralclasspresentations(PowerPointandchalk-talk)bystudents.•Lecturerledclassdiscussion•Individualandgroupexercises•Caseanalysis

QUALITY ASSURANCE Commitment is made to ensure that the courses under this qualification remain rel-evant, current and provide students with a high quality teaching and learning experi-ence. An earnest effort is made to ensure meeting the course quality assurance re-quirements is a continuous process through incorporating regular monitoring, review, benchmarking, and improvement. An external evaluator will periodically evaluate the qualification in terms of course content, teaching methods, course resources and assessments.

QUALITY SHALL ALSO BE ASSURED THROUGH THE FOLLOWING;•AccreditationandregistrationontheNationalQualificationsFramework(NQF)bythe Namibia Qualifications Authority (NQA) and in concurrency with National Coun-cil on Higher Education (NCHE).•Engagementwithrelevantstakeholdersfromtheindustry.•Benchmarkingandregularreviewofpolicies,curriculums,deliverystrategiesandassessments.•Regularmonitoringoflectureactivitiesandstaffdevelopment.•Studentswillbeaskedtocompleteevaluationsheetsforeachcoursestudied•Adualperformanceevaluationsystemwherelecturersandstudentsappraiseeachother.•Moderation(bothinternalandexternal)ofcontinuousassessmentsandfinalexam-inations.•Thecoursesunderthisqualificationwillbetaughtbypersonswhoholdqualificationhigher than level 8.

341

QUALIFICATION STRUCTURE

YEAR 1 (ALL SPECIALISATIONS)Semester 1 (130 Credits)Course Title Course code Hours NQF Level Credits Corporate Governance & Social Responsibility CGS90PS 100 9 10

Contemporary Managerial Finance CFM91PS 100 9 10Strategic Marketing Management and Action Planning SMP91PS 100 9 10

Leadership and Change Management LCM91PS 120 9 12Information Systems Strategy ISS90PS 100 9 10Strategic Operations Management SOM90PS 100 9 10

Semester 2Applied Quantitative Decision Making Techniques AQD91PS 100 9 10

Strategic Management and Systems Thinking STS91PS 120 9 12

Managerial Economics & Decision Making MED91PS 120 9 12

Entrepreneurship & New and Small Business Management ENS90PS 120 9 12

Project, Programme and Portfolio Management PPM90PS 100 9 10

Research Methodology RME91PS 120 9 12

YEAR 2 (MBA- MANAGEMENT SPECIALISATION)Semester 1 (125 Credits)Course Title Course code hours NQF Level Credits Business Risk & Intelligence of Manage-ment

120 9 12

Advanced Business Ethics 120 9 12

342

Competing in the Global market Place (International Business

120 9 12

Strategic Sustainability Management 120 9 12Electives Courses (Choose 1 )Business Logistics & supply Chain Manage-ment

130 9 13

Management of Technology and Innovation 130 9 13

Semester 2Dissertation 640 9 64

YEAR 2 (MBA- FINANCE SPECIALISATION)Semester 1 (125Credits)Course Title Course code hours NQF Level Credits Financial Strategies & Decision Making 120 9 12

Performance Evaluation Management 120 9 12

International Finance Management 120 9 12Fundamental of Financial Risk Management

120 9 12

Electives Courses (Choose 1 )

Financial Reporting & Analysis 130 9 13

Auditing and Assurance 130 9 13


YEAR 2 (MBA- HUMAN RESOURCE SPECIALISATION)Semester 1 (125 Credits)Course Title Course code hours NQF Level Credits Strategic Thinking in HRM 120 9 12

Strategic HRD 120 9 12

343

Personal Growth and Interpersonal Effectiveness

120 9 12

Organizational Development & ChangeManagement

120 9 12

Electives Courses (Choose 1 )Global Labour & Employment Law 130 9 13Compensation & Benefits 130 9 13


344

YEAR 2 (MBA- MARKETING SPECIALISATION)Semester 1 (125 Credits)Course Title Course code hours NQF Level Credits International Marketing Strategies 120 9 12Marketing Research 120 9 12Product Development & Innovation

120 9 12

Integrated Marketing Communications

120 9 12

Electives Courses (Choose 1 )Services Marketing 130 9 13Brand management 130 9 13


345

Master in HIV and AIDS Management (NQF Level: 9)

Purpose

The Master’s degree in HIV/AIDS Management is a guided research programme whose purpose is to make a strong, relevant, contextual and practical response to the HIV/AIDS epidemic. The programme focuses on research, design, action planning, develop-ment, implementation, and monitoring and evaluation of efforts against the epidemic. The programme also enhances the need to find a sustainable solution to the devastating epidemic. In addition, the programme is designed to develop and improve managerial skills of men and women holding supervisory positions in institutions involved in efforts aimed at mitigating the HIV/AIDS menace.

Programme outcomes

Holders of this qualification will be able to:

Investigate HIV/AIDS cases (that is, measure, record, present, and analyse real life prob-lems in their local environment).. Plan, budget, design, and execute research on HIV/AIDS (that is, use a variety of re-sources in the community to find information and to capture data, and apply knowledge and skills acquired during their studies).. Organise, present, and interpret data from investigations for the benefit of society.. Design, develop and implement feasible programmes and projects for combating the HIV/AIDS epidemic.

RequirementsThe Master’s degree in HIV/AIDS will be awarded to candidates credited with a mini-mum of 240 credits made up of 4 compulsory courses (40 NQF Credits) and a 200- NQF Credit Research Project/Dissertation of between 20,000 to 25,000 words.

QUALIFICATION STRUCTURE

YEAR 1 Course Title Course code hours NQF Level Credits Semester 1 ESSENTIALS OF HIV/AIDS SCI-ENCE EH191PS 32 10

Year CoursesSOCIAL SCIENCE RESEARCH METHODOLOGY SSR91PS 9 32

346

Semester 2INFORMATION SYSTEM MAN-AGEMENT ISM91PS 9 10PROJECT MANAGEMENT FOR HIV/AIDS MANAGEMENT PMH91PS 9 10

YEAR 2MASTERS HIV/AIDS RESEARCH PROJECT XMH0M6 9 166

Special Programme RegulationsSPR1 : Admission

SPR 1.1 : To be admitted to the Master’s degree programme in HIV/AIDS, a candidate must normally have at least successfully completed a Bachelor`s degree or a postgraduate diploma in HIV/AIDS Management with an average of at least 65% or a lower second class IUM degree or equivalent from a recognised university or institution of Higher Learning and a minimum of 3 years work experience in an HIV/AIDS related field.SPR 1.2 : Candidates may also be admitted through a flexible learning experience approved by Senate.SPR 2 : Credit Recognition and Transfer ArrangementsStudents from other accredited institutions may be awarded exemptions in respect of related courses passed and qualifications obtained within a period of 5 years. Credits from other universities and/or institutions may be awarded up to 50% of total credits for the qualification at IUM.SPR 3 : AttendanceStudents are expected to:. attend and pass all the four (4) courses prior to the commencement of the dissertation /project proposal. submit a dissertation/project proposal within the first year of study. complete the programme within a maximum period of four(4) years

SPR 4 : AssessmentThe assessment of the four courses comprises of two components, namely:. Continuous Assessment (CA) shall be 50% of the overall assessment of a course.. Formal Examinations (FE) shall account for 50% of the overall assessment of the course.To pass a course, a candidate must obtain a composite mark of 50%.

NB : All work submitted by students shall be examined and moderated internally and externally.

347

Master of Education – Educational Leadership, Management and Policy Education (NQF Level: 9)

Purpose Of The QualificationThe purpose of this qualification is to train professionals who are seeking to broaden their knowledge in the field of Educational Leadership in order to manage public and private organisations. This qualification can be used to secure management cadre leadership positions within a variety of professional settings such as hospitals, government, private and community organisations. The Master of Education – Educational Leadership, Management and Policy programme is solidly anchored on the following:

• A work-based practical approach to facilitate integration of work-based learning and experience with theories of leadership and management

• Reflective practice including use of an electronic portfolio to facilitate self-assessment of practical leadership and management skills

• A constructivist approach to knowledge and learning that emphasises integration of skills, attitudes, knowledge and experience across courses, and collaboration within a community of learners

This qualification targets professionals such as school principals, vice principals, senior teachers, subject teachers, deans, department heads, team leaders and other educational professionals in public and private sectors. Candidates should have a minimum of two years of working experience in an educational institution; and must have been employed in – public and private education institutions.Additional qualifications and work experience may be required from all candidates.This qualification grants admission to a Doctor of Philosophy, Educational Leadership, Management and Policy programme or any other related PhD qualifications or any qualification at NQF Level 10.

Outcomes for the whole Qualification Holders of this qualification are able to:• Demonstrate evidence of advanced knowledge about a specialist field and

demonstrate mastery of sophisticated theoretical subject matter;• Evaluate critically the findings and discussions in the literature, research, analyse

and argue from evidence;• Demonstrate ability to work independently and apply knowledge to new situations;

and engage in rigorous intellectual analysis, criticism and problem-solving;• Analyse effectively Education Management and Leadership role and critically

evaluate the current thinking its application to the school system;• Demonstrate in-depth knowledge and systematic understanding of Education

Management and Leadership; • Apply initiative, adaptability and professional responsibility in the workplace and

rest of the school system; • Originate the necessary skills required for lifelong independent and devise a

348

comprehensive range of learning resources and reflective learning (self-evaluation and problem solving); and

• Demonstrate the skills to manipulate complex data from a variety of sources, and use IT effectively in the analysis of the data to inform managerial and professional decisions.

Admission/entry RequirementsTo be admitted to the Master in Education – Educational Leadership and Management programme, the candidate must have:• Bachelor Honours Degree in Education or an equivalent qualification at NQF Level

8 and must have a minimum of three years working experience in an educational institution

• Must have been employed in an educational institution – public or private. Proof of employment is required.

The above are essential requirements as the instructional design of the qualification and course assessments will be integrated with the work place experience and the equivalent will be determined by the IUM Senate.Qualification Duration

The Master in Education – Educational Leadership and Management is a two-year full time postgraduate study programme leading to NQF Level 9 qualificationThe study period for the qualification is:Full time mode - Minimum: 2 Years Maximum: 4 Years.Contact hours will only be given over weekends and some of the public holidays.The qualification comprises of a minimum of four (4) semesters, i.e. two (2) semesters per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Course Structure

YEAR 1 Course Title Course code hours NQF Level Credits Year CoursesDigital-Age Leadership In Teaching and Learning DAL90PY

9 16

Educational Statistics EST90PY 9 20Instructional Supervision For Educational Leaders SEL90PY

9 16

349

Leadership and Management In Education LEM90PY

9 16

Leading and Managing Human Relations In Education LMH90PY

9 16

Organisational Behaviour In Teaching & Learning OBT90PY

9 16

Research Methodology RME90PY 9 20

YEAR 2Dissertation XEL90PY 9 70Ethics In Educational Leadership and Practices EEL90PY

9 16

Law and Policy In Education LPE90PY 9 18Project Management In Education PMD90PY 9 16

Credit Transfer Credit is the value assigned for the recognition of equivalence in content and learning outcomes between different types of learning and/or qualifications. Credit reduces the amount of learning required to achieve a qualification and may be through credit transfer, articulation, recognition of prior learning or advanced standing.To be awarded these credits, IUM will need to assess the courses or combination of courses as equivalent to IUM courses.Courses awarded as credits need to have been studied within the past 5 years.Generally, credit will be given if the courses were taken at an accredited institution of higher learning, the course was equivalent to courses offered at IUM, or compatible with Namibia Qualifications Authority requirements.Coursework will be evaluated for its current relevance and may not transfer if the material is outdated by more than 5 years since the course was attended and examination sat and passed and/or the course was not passed at the first examination sitting. Credits earned at an unaccredited college may not transfer unless the credit earned is equivalent to courses offered in degree qualification.Credits earned at IUM are also transferable to other institutions of higher learning.Acceptance of credits earned at other institutions is limited to 50% of the total credits required for an IUM qualification. No more than half the major area course requirements can be earned through transfer and/or exemption credit.The IUM reserves the right to reject any or all credits from other institutions, regardless of their accreditation status, when it determines through investigation or otherwise that

350

the quality of instruction at such institutions is deficient or unsatisfactory. The judgment of the IUM on this question shall be final.The IUM reserves the right to disallow transfer credit for courses if the student’s subsequent grades in required courses in the same subject fall below average.

Assessment And Evaluation Assessment

Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course/coursework to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.



Dissertation WritingTaken in the last year of study, dissertation writing is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated by student and approved by the Postgraduate School in order to generate the research necessary to complete their Masters degree.

Each student must complete a 20 000 – 25 000 word dissertation. This project should involve original research on a topic related to the studied field. The dissertation will have a clearly defined problem statement, a review of the existing literature on the chosen topic, original evidence offered to support the dissertation, consideration of alternative rival hypothesis, and a conclusion with recommendations.Upon completion of the research, the results are to be presented for oral defence before an examination panel. The students shall score a minimum of 50% in order to pass the dissertation.

351

Teaching Methods/StrategiesCourses will be delivered using blended learning modalities, including lectures, online tutorials, advanced simulations, video and audio conferencing technologies. Learners must have access to a computer and the Internet. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read and research extensively in each of the courses. Each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process. Guided reading materials and research will support these endeavours.Articulation

The Master of Education – Educational Leadership, Management and Policy qualification grants admission to a Doctor of Philosophy in Education or any other related PhD qualifications or any qualification at NQF Level 10.

352

Master of Science in Information Technology (NQF Level: 9)

Field: Physical, Mathematical and Computer SciencesQualification Code: M Sc. ITLevel of qualification: 9

Total credits available: 300

Total credits required: 260


RationaleThe shortage of IT and computing technical skills in Namibia is often commented on. Equally, the acute shortage of IT related management skills receives less attention. Yet IT related management skills are just as critical for national development.

PurposeThe Master of Science in Information Technology degree programme is designed for people working in information computer technology appointments who wish to pursue information computer technology to a higher level. It seeks to empower those in the ICT related fields with management oriented skills within a technical environment.The development of the Master of Science in Information Technology is in response to the Government of the Republic of Namibia`s economic blue print, Vision 2030. Vision 2030 envisages a knowledge based Namibian economy revolving on digital information communication technology.

Admission RequirementsTo be registered for the Master of Science in Information Technology, the candidate:

3.1. Must have a Bachelor Honours Degree in Information Technology or an equivalent;or3.2. Bachelor of Technology or Bachelor Degree in Information or an equivalentApplicants with BTECH or Bachelor of Technology or Bachelor Degree in Information or an equivalent must have a minimum of two years of working experience in an Information Technology sector (Proof of employment is required).

Qualification DurationThe qualification is studied over a minimum period of two years and not more than a maximum of four years.

353

Outcomes of the whole QualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: • Demonstrate mastery in the field of software development, systems acquisition

advice, systems implementation or and systems integration.• Exhibit analytical thinking skills, an innovative mindset and an ethical sense in

managing risks, solving Information Technology (IT) problems and identifying IT opportunities

• Evaluate critically current thinking and research within IT and its application to the advancement of the IT industry

• Demonstrate an in depth comprehensive range of managerial skills in the IT industry

• Apply IT initiatives, adaptability and professional responsibility in the workplace• Apply the necessary IT skills required for lifelong independent and reflective

learning (self-evaluation and problem solving).

Credit Systems Reference is made to the internationally acceptable formula: one (1) credit equates ten (10) notional hours (learning).The general guideline for teaching and learning time per course, based on the 10 hours per credit approach, is as per the table below. An example of a course with 15 credits was used to determine the notional hours.

ArticulationHolders of the Master of Science in Information Technology degree are eligible for the Doctor of Philosophy in Information Technology areas of specialization and any other related qualifications at NQF level 10.

Credit transferHolders of academic qualifications obtained from other bona fide educational institutions may be granted exemptions on the subjects sat for and passed. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within a period of five years. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an NQA accredited institution or equivalent. Credits from other universities and/or institutions may be awarded up to fifty percent of total credits for the qualification at IUM.

Special ArrangementsDelivery/Teaching/ Modes The delivery methods for this qualification comprises of full time, part time and distance learning mode. Contact hours for distance learning mode are face-to-face encounters on monthly basis and block periods during IUM academic breaks and other public holidays. In addition, all subjects shall be delivered in the following form:• Technical subjects shall be delivered in the form of lectures and laboratories.

354

• Non-Technical subjects shall be delivered in the form of lectures and Seminars.

Special Assessment ArrangementsSpecial assessment arrangements are based on the following:• Course-related knowledge and skills (including prior knowledge, recall and

understanding; analysis and critical thinking skills; synthesis and creative thinking skills; problem solving skills; and application and performance skills).

• Student attitudes, values, and self-awareness (including students’ awareness of their own values and attitudes; students’ awareness of their own learning processes; and course-related learning and study skills awareness).

• Reactions to instruction methods (including student and peer reactions to lecturers and lecturing, class activities, assignments, and materials.

Courses


SEMESTER 1 (100 Credits)Course Title Hours NQF Level CreditsCompulsory CoursesSoftware Engineering SOE90PS 2 9 20Information Systems Strategy OMI90PS 2 9 20Information Technology Project Management ITM90PS 2 9 20

Electives Courses Information Technology Law and Ethics ILE90PS 2 9 20

Advanced Systems Analysis and Enterprise Modelling ASA90PS 2 9 20

355

SEMESTER 2 (120 Credits)Course Title Course Code Hours NQF Level Credits

Compulsory Courses

Information Security Management

ISM90PS 2 9 20

Data Management and Business Intelligence

DMI90PS 2 9 20

Network Computing NEC90PS 2 9 20Research Methodology RMT90PS 2 9 20

Electives Courses Distributed and Mobile Systems DMS90PS 2 9 20Internet And Web Application Development

IWA90PS 2 9 20

356

YEAR 2 (90 credits)SEMESTER 1 (50 credits)Course Title Hours NQF Level CreditsCompulsory CoursesThesis 1 XI190PS 2 9 30Master’s Practicum MP190PS 2 9 20

Elective CoursesN/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

SEMESTER 2 (60 credits)Course Title Hours NQF Level Credits

Compulsory Courses

Thesis 2 XI290PS 2 9 30

Elective Courses

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

357

Master of Science in Tourism and Hospitality Management (NQF Level: 9)


Rationale The importance of developing a professional, effective and efficient tourism and hospitality sector with emphasis on good leadership and management skills has, in recent years, taken a central place at both local and global levels. The Master of Science in Tourism and Hospitality Management degree programme is designed to prepare tourism professionals for leadership in tourism and hospitality and/or similar managerial settings. The qualification focuses on building and enhancing leadership capacity in aspiring and existing leaders so as to equip them with the necessary tools to be at the forefront of ever-changing tourism and hospitality sector.

This qualification draws on strong research and teaching traditions in the areas of management, leadership, policy, facility and service delivery improvement, international development and comparative studies anchored on tourism and hospitality.

It offers a selection of courses that recognise the global context of tourism and hospitality, the importance of culture and context in implementing sustainable tourism, and the centrality of management and leadership in the implementation of lifelong improvements in tourism and hospitality sector.

It is aimed at tourism and hospitality professionals who are seeking to broaden their knowledge of the tourism and hospitality sector and prepare themselves for the next stage in their career, leadership and management. The qualification uses an innovative leadership model to prepare students to assume dynamic roles, leading transformative change in tourism and hospitality and focuses on the levers of improvement—how the tourism and hospitality sector creates conditions in start-up tourism and hospitality facilities and services, or transforms the existing facilities and services into top notch facilities and services. At the same time, the qualification is intensely personal, focusing on the leadership development of each participant—his or her sense of purpose and commitment, skills in working effectively with other tour operators, and courage in tackling one of the biggest challenges the tourism and hospitality sector faces today—providing the knowledge, skills and social development.

In short, this qualification offers participants the opportunity to undertake a general study of the theory and practice of tourism and hospitality management. Purpose

358

The purpose of this qualification is to enable participants to understand and critique theories and practices of tourism and hospitality management in the light of current research and professional experience. The integration of theory and practice is central to the qualification. The qualification is based upon current research and best practices in tourism and hospitality management. Participants are expected to read and analyse current research. The Master of Science in Tourism and Hospitality Management is solidly anchored on the following:• A work-based practical approach to facilitate integration of work-based learning and

experience with theories of leadership and management in tourism and hospitality management

• Reflective practice including use of an electronic portfolio to facilitate self assessment of practical leadership and management skills in the tourism and hospitality sector

• A constructivist approach to knowledge and learning that emphasises integration of skills, attitudes, knowledge and experience across courses, and collaboration within a community of tourism product providers

Who is this qualification for?This qualification targets the following categories in the tourism and hospitality sector:• Qualified staff in the tourism and hospitality sector with a Bachelor Honours Degree

in Tourism and Hospitality or equivalent.• Staff within the tourism and hospitality industry e.g. hotel managers, front office,

department heads, team leaders.• Other tour operators, managers and professionals involved in the management of

tourism and hospitality facilities.

Admission/Entry RequirementsTo be registered for the Master of Science in Tourism and Hospitality Management, the candidate must have:• Bachelor Honours Degree in Tourism and Hospitality Management or an equivalent

qualification at NQF Level 8.• Relevant working experience in the field of Tourism and Hospitality (may be

required). • All prospective students shall be approved by IUM SENATE.


The Master of Science in Tourism Hospitality is a two-year full time post graduate study qualification leading to NQF Level 9 qualification.The study period for the qualification is:Fulltime mode - Minimum: 2 Years; Maximum: 4 YearsContact hours will only be given over weekends and some of the public holidays.

359

Outcomes of the whole QualificationThe holder of this qualification is able to:• Synthesise information on Tourism and Hospitality Management and integrate

theory and practice; • Combine complex data from a variety of sources, and use IT effectively in the analysis

of the data to inform managerial and professional decisions;• Devise a comprehensive range of learning resources to demonstrate independence,

reflective learning and effective Continuing Professional Development;• Generate informed judgements as a thinking professional and contribute to the

tourism and hospitality industry’s effectiveness;• Analyse the Tourism and Hospitality industry and communicate the outcomes

effectively;• Evaluate critically the current thinking and research within tourism and hospitality

management and its application to the tourism and hospitality industry;• Critique the concepts, theories and techniques relating to the tourism and hospitality

industry;• Evaluate and critically reflect upon current research, relevant scholarship and

professional practice related to the tourism and hospitality management;• Build in-depth knowledge and systematic understanding of the tourism and

hospitality industry; • Demonstrate initiative and personal responsibility for their own learning which can

become part of their future career development;• Demonstrate ability of self-direction, autonomy and originality in problem solving;• Demonstrate a comprehensive range of managerial skills in the tourism and

hospitality industry;• Apply initiative, adaptability and professional responsibility in the workplace and

rest of the tourism and hospitality industry; and • Originate the necessary skills required for lifelong independent and reflective

learning (self-evaluation and problem solving).

ArticulationThe Master of Science in Travel and Tourism qualification grants admission to Doctorate of Philosophy in Travel and Tourism or any other related PhD qualifications or any qualification at NQF Level 10.

Credit Transfer Holders of academic qualifications obtained from other educational institutions may be granted exemptions on the subjects sat for and passed. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within the last five years. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an NQA accredited institution or equivalent. Under no circumstance shall exemptions be awarded in excess of 50% credits. Assessment

360

Continuous Assessment (CA) attracts 40% of the final grade. This will come from the examinable activities such as written and/or oral tests and assignments (group and/or individual), and evaluations undertaken by the student during the study period. Students must score at least 50% in each course to qualify to sit for the final examinations. This means a student whose continuous assessment mark is below 50%, fails the course.




Dissertation WritingTaken in the last year of study, dissertation writing is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated by student and approved by the Postgraduate School in order to generate the research necessary to complete their Masters degree

Each student must complete a 20 000 – 25 000 word dissertation. The dissertation should involve original research on a topic related to the studied field. It will have a clearly defined problem statement, a review of the existing literature on the chosen topic, original evidence offered to support the dissertation, consideration of alternative rival hypothesis, and a conclusion with recommendations.Upon completion of the research, the results are to be presented for oral defence before an examination panel. The students shall score a minimum of 50% in order to pass the dissertation.

Teaching Methods/StrategiesCourses will be delivered using blended learning modalities, including lectures, online tutorials, advanced business simulations, video and audio conferencing technologies. Candidates must have access to a computer and the Internet. The teaching methods adapted for this qualification are student-centred learning methods. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the courses. Each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own

361

learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process.

CoursesYEAR 1 (155 Credits)SEMESTER 1 ( 85 Credits)Course Title Course Code Hours NQF Level CreditsInformation Systems Strategy OMI90PS 150 9 20Contemporary Managerial Finance

CMA90PS 150 9 10

Research Methodology RME90PS 150 9 20Strategic Marketing Management & Action Planning

SMM90PS 150 9 10

Strategic Operations Management

150 9 10

Contemporary Tourism Studies for Emerging Destinations

150 9 15

SEMESTER 2 ( 70 Credits)

Course Title Course Code Hours NQF Level Credits

Tourism & Hospitality Law and Ethics

THL90PS 150 9 15

Tourism Policy & Planning TPP90PS 150 9 15Managerial Economics and Decision Making

EMT90PS 150 9 10

Tourism and the Environment TEV91PS 150 9 15Strategic Hospitality & Tourism Branding

SHT90PS 150 9 15

YEAR 2 (120 Credits)SEMESTER 1 (60 Credits)Course Title Course Code Hours NQF Level CreditsCompulsory

362

Cultural Heritage Tourism Management

CHT90PS 150 9 10

Parks & Wildlife Management PWM90PS 150 9 15Conventions and Event Management

CEM90PS 150 9 10

Applied Hospitality Operations Management

10

Electives (Choose ONE only)

Resort Amenity and Attraction Development

RAA90PS 150 9 15

Sports Tourism Management STM90PS 150 9 15

SEMESTER 2 ( 70 Credits)Course Title Course Code Hours NQF Level CreditsDissertation XTM90PS 60

363

Master in International Relations, Diplomacy and Management (NQF Level: 9)


The RationaleThe demand for International Relations, Diplomacy and Management (IRDM) has existed throughout recorded history for as long as distinct human communities have sought ways to communicate, to trade and to collaborate with other communities. In modern times, international connections, communications and collaboration have become increasingly important in all spheres of human endeavour including social, cultural, political, economic, and scientific spheres. There is a growing demand for greater understanding and innovations in international relations, diplomacy and management as one of the fastest growing areas where postgraduate studies are needed worldwide. Globalizing forces in economics together with the dynamic state of the post-cold war international politics have made the field of international relations, diplomacy and management a compelling one for the twenty-first century professionals and students who would like to help shape our new world. The most coveted international relations careers such as positions in high profile International Organisations are hotly contested and studying a specialised Masters degree in International Relations, Diplomacy and Management (MIRDM) is a definite asset.The MIRDM is unique in that it offers students a multi-disciplinary introduction in the field and blends this with an academic approach to the advanced study of International Relations, Diplomacy and Management based on real world practices.

PurposeThe qualification prepares students for careers in diplomacy, international governmental and non-governmental organisations, management, national and international administration “Think Tank”, international interest association or international business. The qualification offers a special blend of academic education in International Relations and political affairs with graduate education and training in world affairs, diplomacy and management.

The qualification is designed for students who have relevant working experience at supervisory levels and above. This enables the students to combine classroom acquired knowledge with what they do in the workplace. Students bring to class their organisational experiences for critiquing, and take classroom acquired knowledge for experimentation at their work places. This dual learning approach is intended to generate a body of knowledge and skills through exploratory research and as experimental implementers who would contribute to the advancement of knowledge and/or prepare others for

364

advanced and specialised employment.The qualification introduces students to the theory and practice of modern diplomacy and statecraft. It explores the evolution of the diplomatic system and its extension throughout the world together with the impact of technology on diplomacy such as the changing role of the resident Ambassador, and the growth of summitry. The instrument of diplomatic craft, both formal (such as International Law) and informal (such as negotiating techniques and public diplomacy) are examined as some of phenomena which diplomats are forced to deal with revolutionary and economic diplomacy.

Who is this Qualification for?The qualification targets professionals working in the public and private sectors, including entry and mid-level career diplomats, other public service officials, post graduate students and staff from nongovernmental organisation, especially those whose work or studies is linked to the United Nations and other international organisations. It can also lead to employment in the civil service or a career as an analyst or policy advisor for numerous organisations that require international relations expertise.Admission RequirementsThe Master in International Relations, Diplomacy and Management degree programme is open to students who must meet the following requirements: 1. Hold a Bachelor Honours degree or an equivalent qualification at NQF Level 8 in a relevant field of study.

2. Have at least a 70% or B+ grade average (or equivalent) in the final year of study.

All prospective students to the qualification shall be approved by the International University of Management (IUM) Senate.

Additional qualifications and work experience may be required from all candidates.Qualification Duration

The MIRDM is a two-year full time postgraduate study programmes leading to NQF Level 9 qualification.The study period for the qualification is:Fulltime mode - Minimum: 2 Years; Maximum: 4 YearsThe qualification comprises a minimum of four (4) semesters, i.e. two (2) semesters per academic year. Semester 1 runs from January to June. Semester 2 runs from July to December.

Outcomes of the whole QualificationThe holder of this qualification is able to:• Interpret the key concepts, models, theories and debates involved in the study of

contemporary international relations and diplomacy;

365

• Evaluate interactions between politics and economics in the International System;• Analyse an institutional backdrop underpinning international politics including

the international organisations;• Analyse prevailing global issues, such as international conflicts, global health, and

environmental challenges;• Demonstrate an in-depth knowledge of a particular functional era and /or region

in the world;• Demonstrate advanced skills to collect, sort, and evaluate information relating to

international relations, diplomacy, and management; and• Analyse complex situations and synthesize information by integrating different

fields of study in a complex world.

ArticulationThis Master in International Relations, Diplomacy and Management qualification grants admission to Doctorate of Philosophy in International Relations, Diplomacy and Management or any other related PhD qualifications.

Credit transferHolders of academic qualifications obtained from other educational institutions may be granted exemptions on the subjects sat for and passed. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within the last five years. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an NQA accredited institution or equivalent. Under no circumstance shall exemptions be awarded in excess of 50 credits.



Supplementary ExaminationsA student who fails a course with an overall mark of 40-49% is eligible to sit for a supplementary examination. A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A

366

student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.

Dissertation WritingTaken in the last year of study, dissertation writing is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated by student and approved by the Post Graduate School in order to generate the research necessary to complete their Masters degree.


Teaching methods/strategiesThe IUM MIRDM blends work with learning in a win-win style. Students attend face-to-face classroom learning with highly qualified Lecturers. The traditional classroom chalk-talk approach, individual study and group study, workshops conducted by highly qualified lecturers in international relations, presentations by students, case analysis and conceptual exercises are all fused into a synergistic package of delivery methodologies that amalgamates theory with practice. The methodologies used encourage analysis, critical thinking and discussion of the real issues impacting on the current world affairs. Nevertheless, courses will be delivered using blended learning modalities, including lectures, online tutorials, simulations, video and audio conferencing technologies. The teaching methods adapted for this programme are student-centred learning methods. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the courses. Each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process. Programmed reading and reading guides will support these endeavours.

Courses

367

YEAR 1 ( 150 Credits)SEMESTER 1 (75 Credits)Course Title Course Code Hours NQF

LevelCredits

International Relations Theories IRT90PS

9 25

Diplomacy Theories and Practice

DTP90PS 9 25

Foreign Policies Analysis FPA90PS 9 25Research Methodology RME90PS 9 25Year course French for Communication Purposes

NFP90PS 5 None-Credit Bearing (NCB)


Course Title Course Code Hours NQF Level

Credits

Namibia Foreign Policy NFP90PS 9 25Electives (chose any two)International & Multilateral Organizations

IMO90PS 9 25

Management of Trade and Investment Disputes

MTI90US 9 25

International Political Economy

IPE90PS 9 25


SEMESTER 1 (50 Credits)Course Title Course Code Hours NQF

LevelCredits

Electives (chose any one)Management of International Conflicts

MAI90PS 9 25

368

International Law ILA90PS 9 25SEMESTER 2 ( 60 credits)Course TitleYear course Dissertation MID90PS 9 60Total Credits 260

369

Master in Public Policy & Management ( NQF Level: 9)


Rationale Today’s professionals especially those with a bias in leadership, management and policy, in and out of government, appreciate that theirs is a distinguished calling. Faced with many of today’s most difficult policy issues, these professionals need inventive solutions that they know can be politically and administratively effective. The Master in Public Policy and Management is a degree for professionals with significant practical experience who have a desire to be with essential management and analytic skills that would allow them to meet policy management challenges. The Master in Public Policy and Management hones and integrates professionals’ talents to enhance their effectiveness in the world of policy. The Master in Public Policy and Management degree is useful to the public service practitioners and other practitioners who are involved in policy design, implementation and evaluation as well as governance. It is also useful to those who are interested in developing their leadership capacities, knowledge, skills and talent. This qualification can be used to secure leadership positions within management in the public sector, within non-governmental organisations, and within a variety of other professional settings such as hospitals, parastatal, private and community organisations.

Employing authorities are likely to continue to view postgraduate study such as the Master in Public Policy and Management as a valuable form of professional development.

PurposeThe purpose of the Master in Public Policy and Management degree programme is to strengthen the public policy and managerial skills of future leaders, senior managers and professionals from both the public and private sectors. This programme provides committed policy professionals with the theoretical foundation and practical tools they need to make a difference. The qualification is aimed at enabling participants to synthesise and critique theories and practices of public policy and management in the light of current research and professional experience. The integration of theory and practice is central to the programme.

Who is this programme for?This programme targets the following categories in the education sector:• Qualified staff in the public sector with a Bachelor’s Honours Degree in Public

Policy and Management or equivalent.

370

• Other managers and professionals involved in policy design, implementation and analysis at various levels and with necessary qualifications.

• Other managers and professionals involved in governance and/or public management at various levels and with necessary qualifications.

• Other candidates with necessary qualifications and who aspire to attain the necessary tools for policy design, implementation and analysis, and good governance.

Admission/Entry RequirementsTo be admitted to the Master in Public Policy & Management degree programme, a candidate must have• A Bachelor’s degree in Public Policy and Management at level 8 or equivalent

qualifications • Relevant working experience in the field of Public Policy and Management (maybe

required) All prospective students shall be approved by the IUM SENATE

Qualification DurationThe Master in Public Policy & Management is a two-year full time postgraduate study qualification leading to NQF Level 9 qualification.The study period for the qualification is:Fulltime mode - Minimum: 2 Years; Maximum: 4 YearsContact hours will only be given over weekends and during some public holidays

Outcomes of the whole qualificationHolders of this qualification are able to: • Produce evidence of advanced knowledge about a specialist field of enquiry or

professional practice;• Demonstrate mastery of sophisticated theoretical subject matter;• Evaluate critically the findings and discussions in the literature;• Research, analyse and argue from evidence;• Work independently and apply knowledge to new situations; and• Engage in rigorous intellectual analysis, criticism and problem-solving;• Analyse subject matter and communicate the outcomes effectively;• Evaluate critically the current thinking and research within the subject matter and

its application to the school system;• Critique the concepts, theories and techniques relating to subject matter; • Evaluate and critically reflect upon current research, relevant scholarship and

professional practice related to the subject matter;• Demonstrate initiative and personal responsibility self-direction, autonomy and

originality in problem solving;• Generate informed judgements as a thinking professional and contribute to

educational and managerial effectiveness;• Apply initiative, adaptability and professional responsibility in the workplace and

371

rest of the school system;• Originate the necessary skills required for lifelong independent and reflective

learning (self-evaluation and problem solving);• Devise a comprehensive range of learning resources to demonstrate independence,

reflective learning and effective Continuing Professional Development; and • Combine complex data from a variety of sources, and use IT effectively in the

analysis of the data to inform managerial and professional decisions.

ArticulationThe Master in Public Policy and Management qualification grants admission to a Doctor of Philosophy in Public Policy and Management degree programme or any other related PhD qualifications or any qualification at NQF level 10.

Credit Transfer Holders of academic qualifications obtained from other educational institutions may be granted exemptions on the subjects sat for and passed. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been sat for and passed in one sitting and the qualification must have been obtained within the last five years. The subjects for which exemption is sought must have been studied and the qualification obtained at an NQA accredited institution or equivalent. Under no circumstance shall exemptions be awarded in excess of 50% credits.




A student who fails the project with a mark of less than 50% will be allowed one opportunity to re-submit the project three months after the publication of results. A student who fails a course with an overall mark of 39% and below will be required to repeat the same course until the course is passed. A student may not proceed from one

372

level to the next higher level carrying more than 50% of the courses or credits.

Dissertation WritingTaken in the last year of study, dissertation writing is meant to engage students in research with a faculty member designated by student and approved by the Post Graduate School in order to generate the research necessary to complete their Master Degree


Teaching Methods/StrategiesCourses will be delivered using blended learning modalities, including lectures, online tutorials, advanced business simulations, video and audio conferencing technologies. Candidates must have access to a computer and the Internet. The teaching methods adapted for this qualification are student-centred learning methods. Emphasis will be placed upon the need for a student to read extensively in each of the courses. Each student will be mentored to appreciate that one will be expected to be responsible for one’s own learning. The role of the lecturer, therefore, is to stimulate learning and to support and guide that process.

YEAR 1 (148 Credits)SEMESTER 1 (84 Credits)Course Title Course Code Hours NQF Level CreditsGood Governance and Compliance GGC90PS 160 9 16Systems Thinking and Strategic Development

SSD90PS 160 9 16

Innovations in Public Management INP90PS 160 9 16Technology and Economic Growth TEC90PS 160 9 16Research Methodology RME90PS 160 9 20

SEMESTER 2 (64 Credits)Course Title Course Code Hours NQF Level Credits

Systems Synthesis and Policy Analysis

SPA90PS 160 9 16

373

Fiscal Planning and Management Control Systems

FSM90PS 160 9 16

Policy, Strategy and Resources PSR90PS 160 9 16Ethics, Legal and Institutional Dynamics

ELI90PS 160 9 16

Year 2 (102 Credits)Semester 1 (32 Credits)Course Title Course Code Hours NQF Level Credits

Electives (chose any two)The State, Public Policy and Management

SPP90PS 160 9 16

Global Labour & Employment Law GLE90PS 160 9 16Corporate Governance & Social Responsibility

CGS90PS 160 9 16

Business Risk & Intelligence for Management

BRI90PS 160 9 16

Semester 2 (70 Credits)Course Title Course Code Hours NQF Level Credits

Dissertation XPM90PS 70

374

REGULATIONS FOR THE DEGREE OF MASTER

PGSM 1: Admission RequirementsIn order to be admitted to a postgraduate degree programme at the International University of Management (IUM), prospective students must meet the following minimum requirements:

• Have the relevant Bachelor Honours degree in the upper class division or equivalent from a reputable university, institution, or institute/organization OR have the requisite degree for the intended programme by the time they are matriculated.

• Must have obtained such professional qualifications or membership of professional institutions deemed equivalent to a diploma or first degree by the IUM Higher Degrees Committee and approved by the IUM Senate.

• Must have obtained an undergraduate degree in any discipline from IUM and/or from another recognised university or institution of Higher Learning.

• Additional qualifications and work experience may be required from all candidates.• 2.75 Or higher GPA on the last 60 semester credits or 65% pass rate.• 3 letters of recommendations from university senior lecturers/professors.• A two-page motivation write-up on why the candidate intends to join the Master`s

programme.• Departments may decide to have additional requirements.• Students with first Masters degrees will follow the standard admission requirements

stipulated in these regulations.• Admissions shall be once a year, in January.• Students may be required to sit for a Graduate English Examination (GEE) before

admission. The exam will be set, marked and administered by the School of Postgraduate Studies.

• Departments may have additional requirements. PGSM 2: Submission of Application• Paper-based forms: These forms are available from the Admissions Office. Potential

graduate students can come and collect the forms upon payment of a non-refundable application fee of N$200.

• Via Electronic forms: The application form may be downloaded from the IUM Website by prospective graduate students who wish to apply for the Master’s program or other postgraduate programmes.

PGSM 3 : Application DeadlinesThe application deadline shall be end of October of each year. While the deadline shall stand, IUM students may be exempted from the specific application deadline. As soon as an application is complete, a recommendation is made by the appropriate department to the Head of the School of Postgraduate studies, who with the Higher Degrees Committee, shall approve all admissions and report to Senate accordingly.

Official notification of acceptance or rejection will come from the Office of the Registrar.

375

PGSM 4: Full-Time StatusA full-time student must meet one of the following requirements:• Maintain graduate student record pass of more than 70%. If a graduate student fails

to score 70% twice, then the student will be put on academic probation for one semester; in which time a passing grade is expected.

• Register for one module with all required coursework completed and only the research component of the degree remaining.

• Register for at least one module during the semester of the final thesis/dissertation defence or, in a non-thesis degree programme.

PGSM 5: Part-Time Postgraduate StudentDuration of the course can be up to 4 years taking the required modules upon approval for an extension to do so.

PGSM 6: Graduate StudentsA postgraduate student is accepted by a department, with the concurrence of the Head of the School of Postgraduate Studies to an approved graduate degree programme and is enrolled at the University. The department in which the graduate student studies for the Master’s degree may require a graduate student to re-apply if the student stays out of the programme for one year. Although the requirements for the masters programme stand, the faculty, the department and the School of Postgraduate Studies can waive these requirements.

PGSM 7: Non-thesis OptionThis option will depend on departmental requirements where some Masters degrees may be earned without a thesis. Students in this category will take a comprehensive examination set by the School of Postgraduate Studies. A minimum of 3 specialization electives courses shall be taken by each student in conjunction with a course in Research Methodology in the respective discipline. Students will need to complete practicums, internships, or other experiences useful to the student`s future professional career. Registration in one course that requires a substantial paper involving significant independent study shall be considered.

PGSM 8: Thesis OptionThe minimum requirements for a thesis option for a Master’s degree programme are; submission of an acceptable thesis and the passing of an oral examination in defence of the thesis. A maximum of 12 courses plus a thesis shall be taken by each student in the respective discipline. A research proposal must be submitted in the last semester of the first year.

PGSM 9: Thesis SupervisorEach research student shall work under the guidance of a supervisor. The minimum academic requirement for a supervisor is a Master`s degree or PhD with a minimum of

376

three years lectureship experience of which at least two years must be at the postgraduate level or any other equivalent research contribution. The responsibilities of the supervisor are to:i. supervise the students in finalizing the research problemii. supervise the students in doing literature surveyiii. help the students in selecting research toolsiv. regularly monitor the research work of the studentsv. facilitate clarification of research queries by the studentsvi. supervise the students regarding writing and submission of the thesisvii. submit monthly reports regarding students progressviii.cooperate and collaborate with the Head of the Postgraduate Schoolix. ensure that students sign the Masters study agreement together with the guide and must be submitted to the Head of School of Postgraduate School before the commencement of the thesis.

PGSM 10: Conduct of ClassesAcademic staff of each discipline will arrange for the conduct of classes. They will submit course plans and a list of academic staff to the Head of the Postgraduate School before the beginning of each semester. The classes conducted and the attendance of students will be monitored by the HoD. The staff will conduct regular teaching, seminars, paper presentation, colloquia and compulsory end of semester examinations. Examinations will be centralized and controlled by the Chief Examinations Officer. Monthly academic reports are to be submitted, during the coursework period, by the HOD to the Head of the Postgraduate School .The students doing a Masters` degree will have to take 12 courses, including Research Methods which is a compulsory course at Masters level. Full-time students will do coursework in the first year and do research in their second year. Part-time students will take one year and half to do coursework and 6 months will be reserved for research.

PGSM 11: Assessment of Course workContinuous assessment will be based on;i. Continuous Assessment (CAs) of course work at 40/60 marks.ii.End Semester Examination – 70 marks.iii. Students are required to have a score of 70% on the final examination in order to pass the module.iv. After successful completion of all the 14 courses plus research methodology, a student will be admitted to the final stage of the programme which is thesis writing.v. The students must score an average of 60% on final thesis assessment and if they fall short of the required marks, they will have to re-do the weak areas in the thesis. The weak areas will be identified by the Higher Degrees Committee.vi. The non-thesis option students will be required to enrol in research methods courses and at the end of the courses, they will have to produce a research proposal.vii. The internal assessment should be done periodically and the CAs submitted to the

377

Chief Examinations Officer.viii. Students who fail to complete CAs requirements on the specified date may be given another chance to repeat the CA before the next CA, at the discretion of the lecturer with the consent of the Head of the School of Postgraduate Studies.ix. Maximum marks for each end semester examination will be 100, for the duration of 3 hours.x. Two sets of independent question papers for each subject, completely sealed, should be sent to the CEO through the Head of the School of Postgraduate Studies. The question papers should reach the CEO at least 15 days in advance.

PGSM 12: Submission of ThesisThe title page of the thesis, cover format, University logo, etc. should strictly conform to the format of presentation by the University and the thesis should carry a declaration by the candidate and certificate duly signed and issued by the Supervisor. The thesis should be hardbound in blue colour. All theses shall be written in English. Final submission of the thesis shall be 30 October of each year. In exceptional cases, candidates may be allowed extension of time to submit their dissertation on the payment of the prescribed fee subject to successful completion of applicable coursework. However, such extension shall be for a maximum period of one year only. All Masters dissertations shall not be accepted for assessment, unless the candidate has paid the prescribed fees fully. The candidate shall submit three- hard-bound copies and a soft copy (CD with word and Pdf files of his/her dissertation work) for assessment.

PGSM 13: Assessment of the Master’s ThesisThe thesis submitted by the candidate under the guidance of a supervisor will be assessed by two experts (One Internal and One External) recommended by the Higher Degrees Committee and approved by Senate. The candidates will also appear for final viva voce. The viva voce will be arranged by the Head of the School of Postgraduate Studies.

PGSM 14: Cancellation of Masters AdmissionThe admission of candidate will be cancelled under the following circumstances where a student;i. Fails to secure 80% attendanceii. Fails to submit the documents/requirements related to Course Assessmentiii.Does not pay the annual fee within the stipulated timeiv. Fails to submit the dissertation within the stipulated time.

378

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D) Degree in Business Administration (NQF Level 10)

Purpose of the Ph.D Qualifications:

The purpose of the doctorate degree In Business Administration is to provide opportunities for deserving students from IUM and other universities who have successfully completed Master’s degree programmes in the relevant and/or related fields, and who fulfill the requirements for admission to a doctorate (Ph.D.) programme in Business Administration..

Outcomes of the Ph.D Qualification in Business Administration:Holders of the Ph.D qualification in Business Administration are able to:• Demonstrate comprehensive, systematic and in-depth mastery of knowledge,

research and analytical skills used in the formulation of new, cutting-edge learning, practice principles or processes relevant to Business Administration.

• Demonstrate advanced knowledge of existing discourses on issues related to the area of research and the thesis.

• Exhibit knowledge of advanced research methods and methodology and techniques for data collection and analysis using qualitative, quantitative and/or mixed methods.

• Formulate and undertake research on new areas and generate new ideas that add value and new knowledge to the area of specialization.

• Contribute to development discourses and paradigms at national, regional and international level in the area of their thesis specializations;

• Apply the knowledge acquired to improve theory and practice in their specific area of specialization;

• Use research skills acquired to advance research in their areas of specialization after graduation; and

• Disseminate widely the research results through scholarly publications, analytical briefs and contributions to academic and policy platforms in Namibia and abroad.

Admission requirementsa. A Master’s Degree registered at NQF Level 9 in a relevant discipline. orb. Any qualification at NQF Level 8 in a related discipline plus either at least five years of work experience at a senior management or professional level plus the publication of a peer-reviewed paper(s) or other publication(s).

It is also a requirement that people entering into supervised learning leading to the award of this qualification have been recognized as having attained or shall undertake noncredit bearing courses at NQF Level 8 or above relating to:

•postgraduatereportwritingandacademicwritinginavarietyofgenreorstyles

379

• the proficient use of advanced qualitative research methods• the proficient use of advanced quantitative research methods and applications• the proficient use of information and communication technologies relevant to the

analysis and presentation of data• understandings of ethical practices in research• awareness of current research practices

Delivery requirementsThe attainment of this qualification requires significant levels of self-directed study and research actions that require access to specialized research resources and/or facilities. The availability of such resources and/or facilities shall be verified by the IUM Postgraduate Committee.Students preparing for the award of this qualification must be supervised by recognized experts in the field of study. At least one of these recognized experts must hold a PhD Degree, preferably in the field of study. Supervisors allocated to students shall be approved by the Postgraduate Committee and shall act in accordance with instructions issued by the Committee and approved by the Council.

• In preparation for field work students will be expected to sharpen their general conceptual analysis and research methodology in order to bring them up to date with new theoretical knowledge and advanced qualitative, quantitative and mixed methods of research approaches.

• Students must submit a draft research proposal on a topic selected in consultation with their supervisors.

• Preparation for the thesis work will begin during the general conceptual analysis and research methodology phase that will focus on broad education issues. The research methodology phase will also be used to provide guidance on proposal writing and supervisors will be appointed before the beginning of the phase.

• As the research methodology course proceeds students will be guided on the preparation of their research design starting with a concept paper stating the problem, its background, why it is important to undertake research on it and its relevance to the development of new knowledge that may address the problem in a specific area. The concept paper will be developed into a research proposal through various stages with the support of supervisors leading to the development of a draft research proposals and research design.

• The drafts will be presented for peer review by fellow students and comments by supervisors.

• After the first presentation students will incorporate comments from peers and supervisors and prepare the final draft research design and/or field research or data collection plan for submission to their supervisors.

• The final research design and plan will be approved by the higher degrees/postgraduate committee of senate on recommendations from supervisors and forwarded to Senate for noting only.

380

• During field work students will work independently but will remain in close contact with their supervisors.

• As the field work is completed supervisors will provide guidance, coaching, counselling and other support on how to prepare a thesis.

• First drafts of the theses will be presented for peer review and comments from supervisors and other persons at IUM interested in the area of study. Students can also invite colleagues from their places of work or interested persons from the places where research was conducted.

• After presentation students will incorporate comments and submit their theses for external and internal examination.

Assessment arrangementsThe award of this qualification first requires the presentation and defence of a research (dissertation) proposal that is accepted by the Higher Degrees/Postgraduate Committee of Senate. As a minimum, the dissertation proposal must comply with the format specified by the Committee and be inclusive of:

a. A review of literature relevant to the proposed area of research and which clearly establishes a conceptual framework upon which the research problem is based and provides insight into existing knowledge related to the problem.b. A clear outline of the purpose of the research study and the research questions, the relevant theoretical and/or conceptual framework on which the study shall be based, any delineations regarding the scope of the study, and defines terms specific to the study.c. A clear outline of the research design and procedures, data collection and analysis methods to be applied, and measures to ensure the research shall be ethical and, where relevant, cognisant of the need to protect the welfare and wellbeing of any persons who and/or environs that are the subject of the research.d. A proposed timeline for the completion of the research and the presentation of a thesis and/or associated innovative or creative works.

The award of this qualification shall ultimately depend on the recommendation made by a panel of independent experts to the Postgraduate Committee who, in applying current international standards, would consider that a thesis submitted to the panel and defended by the candidate:

a. Represents scholarly and/or innovative work significantly higher than a Master’s degree in that it represents comprehensive, systematic and in-depth mastery of knowledge, research and analysis techniques relevant to the field of study, andb. Contributes significantly and originally to the ideas, practices and current debates at the cutting edge of the field of study, andc. Warrants publication and/or presentation as a peer-reviewed work.

There shall be at least three examiners for each thesis. The examiners shall be experts/

381

specialists in the field of the study approved by Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Postgraduate Committee. At least one of the examiners shall not be an employee of the IUM and shall not have been one of the supervisors of the candidate being examined.

All the processes of the PhD programme shall be conducted under the oversight of the each faculty under the supervision and/or coordination of the Postgraduate Committee and normally all external examiners shall be senior academics at Senior Lecturer level and above with considerable experience in teaching and research at postgraduate studies level and at least three years after their PhD graduation.

Courses

Course Title Outcomes of Learning Level Credits

Conceptual Analysis & Research Methodology

Demonstrate highest level of skills for critical enquiry, theoretical and discourse analysis and apply in-depth mastery of advanced research methods and techniques for data collection and analysis in Business Administration.

10Non-Credit Bearing (NCB)

Full PhD Thesis(Dissertation)

Demonstrate a capacity to conduct independent research and make original contribution to the body of knowledge in Business Administration.

10 360

382

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D) Degree in Information and Communication Technology (Level 10)

Purpose of the Ph.D degree in Information and Communication TechnologyThe purpose of the doctorate degree in Information and Communication Technology is to provide opportunities for deserving students from IUM and other universities who have successfully completed Master’s degree programmes in the relevant and/or related fields, and who fulfil the requirements for admission to a doctorate (Ph.D.) programme in Information and Communication Technology.Outcomes of the Ph.D Qualification in Information and Communication TechnologyHolders of the Ph.D. degree in Information and Communication Technology are able to:• Demonstrate comprehensive, systematic and in-depth mastery of knowledge,

research and analytical skills used in the formulation of new, cutting-edge learning, practice principles or processes relevant to Information and Communication Technology.




• Contribute to development discourses and paradigms at national, regional and international level in the area of their thesis specializations.

• Apply the knowledge acquired to improve theory and practice in their specific area of specialization.



Admission requirementsA Master’s Degree registered at NQF Level 9 in a relevant discipline. orAny qualification at NQF Level 8 in a related discipline plus either at least five years of work experience at a senior management or professional level plus the publication of a peer-reviewed paper(s) or other publication(s).It is also a requirement that people entering into supervised learning leading to the award of this qualification have been recognized as having attained or shall undertake non-credit bearing courses at NQF Level 8 or above relating to:• postgraduatereportwritingandacademicwritinginavarietyofgenreorstyles• theproficientuseofadvancedqualitativeresearchmethods• theproficientuseofadvancedquantitativeresearchmethodsandapplications

383

• theproficientuseofinformationandcommunicationtechnologiesrelevanttothe analysis and presentation of data• understandingofethicalpracticesinresearch• awarenessofcurrentresearchpractices.

Delivery The attainment of this qualification requires significant levels of self-directed study and research action that requires access to specialized research resources and/or facilities. The availability of such resources and/or facilities will be verified by the IUM Postgraduate Committee.Students preparing for the award of this qualification must be supervised by recognized experts in the field of study. At least one of these recognized experts must hold a PhD Degree, preferably in the field of study. Supervisors allocated to students will be approved by the Postgraduate Committee and will act in accordance with instructions issued by the Committee and approved by the Council.• In preparation for field work students will be expected to sharpen their general

conceptual analysis and research methodology in order to bring them up to date with new theoretical knowledge and advanced qualitative, quantitative, and mixed methods research approaches.



• As the research methodology course proceeds, students will be guided on the preparation of their research design starting with a concept paper stating the problem, its background, why it is important to undertake research on it and its relevance to the development of new knowledge that may address the problem in a specific area. The concept paper will be developed into a research proposal through various stages with the support of supervisors leading to the development of a draft research proposal and research design.


• After the first presentation, students will incorporate comments from peers and supervisors and prepare the final draft research design and/or field research or data collection plan for submission to their supervisors.

• The final research design and plan will be approved by the higher degrees/postgraduate committee of senate on recommendations from supervisors and forwarded to Senate for noting.


• As the field work is completed, supervisors will provide guidance, coaching, counselling, and other support on how to prepare a thesis.

384


• After presentation, students will incorporate comments and submit their theses for external and internal examination

Assessment • The award of this qualification first requires the presentation and defence of a

research (dissertation) proposal that is accepted by the Higher Degrees/Postgraduate Committee of Senate. As a minimum, the dissertation proposal must comply with the format specified by the Committee and be inclusive of:

• A review of literature relevant to the proposed area of research and which clearly establishes a conceptual framework upon which the research problem is based and provides insight into existing knowledge related to the problem.

• A clear outline of the purpose of the research study and the research questions, the relevant theoretical and/or conceptual framework on which the study will be based, any delineations regarding the scope of the study, and definition of terms specific to the study.

• A clear outline of the research design and procedures, data collection and analysis methods to be applied, and measures to ensure the research will be ethical and, where relevant, cognisant of the need to protect the welfare and wellbeing of any persons who and/or environs that are the subject of the research.

• A proposed timeline for the completion of the research and the presentation of a thesis and/or associated innovative or creative work.

• The award of this qualification will ultimately depend on the recommendation made by a panel of independent experts to the Postgraduate Committee who, in applying current international standards, would consider that a thesis submitted to the panel and defended by the candidate:

• Represents scholarly and/or innovative work significantly higher than a Master’s degree in that it represents comprehensive, systematic, and in-depth mastery of knowledge, research and analysis techniques relevant to the field of study, and

• Contributes significantly and originally to the ideas, practices and current debates at the cutting edge of the field of study, and

• Warrants publication and/or presentation as a peer-reviewed work.

There will be at least three examiners for each thesis. The examiners will be experts/specialists in the field of the study approved by Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Postgraduate Committee. At least one of the examiners will not be an employee of the IUM and will not have been one of the supervisors of the candidate being examined.

All the processes of the PhD programme shall be conducted under the oversight of the each faculty under the supervision and/or coordination of the Postgraduate Committee and normally all external examiners shall be senior academics at Senior Lecturer level

385

and above with considerable experience in teaching and research at postgraduate studies level and at least three years after their PhD graduation.

Courses

Course Title Outcomes of Learning Level CreditsConceptual Analysis & Research Methodology

Demonstrate highest level of skills for critical enquiry, theoretical and discourse analysis and apply in-depth mastery of advanced research methods and techniques for data collection and analysis in Information and Communication Technology.

10 Non-Credit Bearing (NCB)


Demonstrate a capacity to conduct independent research and make original contribution to the body of knowledge in Information and Communication Technology.

10 360

386

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D) in Education (NQF Level: 10)

Purpose of the Ph.D Qualification in Education The purpose of this qualification is to provide opportunity to deserving students from IUM and other universities who have successfully completed Master’s degree programmes in various fields of Education and related fields, and who fulfill the requirements for admission to the degree of Doctor of Philosophy in Education.

Outcomes of the Ph.D Qualification in Education:Holders of this qualification are able to:• Demonstrate comprehensive, systematic and in-depth mastery of knowledge,

research and analytical skills used in the formulation of new, cutting-edge learning, practice principles or processes relevant to education.








Admission requirements• A Master’s Degree registered at NQF Level 9 in a relevant discipline. or• Any qualification at NQF Level 8 in a related discipline plus either at least five years

of work experience at a senior management or professional level plus the publication of a peer-reviewed paper(s) or other publication(s).

It is also a requirement that people entering into supervised learning leading to the award of this qualification have been recognized as having attained or will undertake non-credit bearing courses at NQF Level 8 or above relating to:

• postgraduate report writing and academic writing in a variety of genres or styles• the proficient use of advanced qualitative research methods• the proficient use of advanced quantitative research methods and applications• the proficient use of information and communication technologies relevant to the

387

analysis and presentation of data• understandings of ethical practices in research• awareness of current research practices

Delivery requirementsThe attainment of this qualification requires significant levels of self-directed study and research actions that require access to specialized research resources and/or facilities. The availability of such resources and/or facilities will be verified by the IUM Postgraduate Committee.Students preparing for the award of this qualification must be supervised by recognized experts in the field of study. At least one of these recognized experts must hold a PhD Degree, preferably in the field of study. Supervisors allocated to students will be approved by the Postgraduate Committee and will act in accordance with instructions issued by the Committee and approved by IUM Council.• In preparation for field work students will be expected to sharpen their general

conceptual analysis and research methodology in order to bring them up to date with new theoretical knowledge and advanced qualitative, quantitative and mixed methods research approaches.



• As the research methodology course proceeds, students will be guided on the preparation of their research design starting with a concept paper stating the problem, its background, why it is important to undertake research on it, and its relevance to the development of new knowledge that may address the problem in a specific area. The concept paper will be developed into a research proposal through various stages with the support of supervisors leading to the development of a draft research proposal and research design.



• The final research design and plan will be approved by the higher degrees/postgraduate committee of senate on recommendations from supervisors and forwarded to Senate for noting only.



• First drafts of the theses will be presented for peer review and comments from

388

supervisors and other persons at IUM interested in the area of study. Students can also invite colleagues from their places of work or interested persons from the places where research was conducted.


Assessment arrangementsThe award of this qualification first requires the presentation and defence of a research (thesis/dissertation) proposal that is accepted by the Higher Degrees/Postgraduate Committee of Senate. As a minimum, the dissertation proposal must comply with the format specified by the Committee and be inclusive of:


• A clear outline of the purpose of the research study and the research questions, the relevant theoretical and/or conceptual framework on which the study will be based, any delineations regarding the scope of the study, and definition of terms specific to the study.


• A proposed timeline for the completion of the research and the presentation of a thesis and/or associated innovative or creative works.

The award of this qualification will ultimately depend on the recommendation made by a panel of independent experts to the Postgraduate Committee who, in applying current international standards, would consider that a thesis submitted to the panel and defended by the candidate:

• Represents scholarly and/or innovative work significantly higher than a Master’s degree in that it represents comprehensive, systematic and in-depth mastery of knowledge, research and analysis techniques relevant to the field of study, and


. Warrants publication and/or presentation as a peer-reviewed work.


All the processes of the PhD programme shall be conducted under the oversight of the

389

each faculty under the supervision and/or coordination of the Postgraduate Committee and normally all external examiners shall be senior academics at Senior Lecturer level and above with considerable experience in teaching and research at postgraduate studies level and at least three years after their PhD graduation.

Courses

Course Title Outcomes of Learning Level Credits

Conceptual Analysis & Research Methodology

Demonstrate highest level of skills for critical enquiry, theoretical and discourse analysis and apply in-depth mastery of advanced research methods and techniques for data collection and analysis in Education.



Demonstrate a capacity to conduct independent research and make original contribution to the body of knowledge in Education.

10 360

390

Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D) Degree in Tourism and Hospitality (NQF Level 10)

Purpose of the Ph.D. degree in Tourism and Hospitality:

The purpose of the doctorate degree in Tourism and Hospitality is to provide oppor-tunities for deserving students from IUM and other universities who have successfully completed Master’s degree programmes in the relevant and/or related fields, and who fulfil the requirements for admission to a doctorate (Ph.D) programme in Tourism and Hospitality.

Outcomes of the Ph.D Qualifications:

Holders of the Ph.D qualifications are able to:• Demonstrate comprehensive, systematic and in-depth mastery of knowledge,

research and analytical skills used in the formulation of new, cutting-edge learning, practice principles or processes relevant to tourism and hospitality.








Admission requirements

A Master’s Degree registered at NQF Level 9 in a relevant discipline. orAny qualification at NQF Level 8 in a related discipline plus either at least five years of work experience at a senior management or professional level plus the publication of a peer-reviewed paper(s) or other publication(s).It is also a requirement that people entering into the supervised learning leading to the award of this qualification have been recognized as having attained or shall undertake non-credit bearing courses at NQF Level 8 or above relating to:postgraduate report writing and academic writing in a variety of genre or stylesthe proficient use of advanced qualitative research methods

391

the proficient use of advanced quantitative research methods and applicationsthe proficient use of information and communication technologies relevant to the analysis and presentation of dataunderstandings of ethical practices in researchawareness of current research practices.

Delivery requirementsThe attainment of this qualification requires significant levels of self-directed study and research actions that require access to specialized research resources and/or facilities. The availability of such resources and/or facilities will be verified by the IUM Postgraduate Committee.Students preparing for the award of this qualification must be supervised by recognized experts in the field of study. At least one of these recognized experts must hold a PhD Degree, preferably in the field of study. Supervisors allocated to students will be approved by the Postgraduate Committee and will act in accordance with instructions issued by the Committee and approved by the Council.

• In preparation for field work students will be expected to sharpen their general conceptual analysis and research methodology in order to bring them up to date with new theoretical knowledge and advanced qualitative, quantitative and mixed methods research approaches.



• As the research methodology course proceeds students will be guided on the preparation of their research design starting with a concept paper stating the problem, its background, why it is important to undertake research on it and its relevance to the development of new knowledge that may address the problem in a specific area. The concept paper will be developed into a research proposal through various stages with the support of supervisors leading to the development of a draft research proposals and research design.



• The final research design and plan will be approved by the higher degrees/postgraduate committee of senate on recommendations from supervisors and forwarded to Senate for noting.


392




Assessment arrangementsThe award of this qualification first requires the presentation and defence of a research (dissertation) proposal that is accepted by the Higher Degrees/Postgraduate Committee of Senate. As a minimum, the dissertation proposal must comply with the format speci-fied by the Committee and be inclusive of:


• A clear outline of the purpose of the research study and the research questions, the relevant theoretical and/or conceptual framework on which the study will be based, any delineations regarding the scope of the study, and definion of terms specific to the study.


• A proposed timeline for the completion of the research and the presentation of a thesis and/or associated innovative or creative works.

• The award of this qualification will ultimately depend on the recommendation made by a panel of independent experts to the Postgraduate Committee who, in applying current international standards, would consider that a thesis submitted to the panel and defended by the candidate:

• Represents scholarly and/or innovative work significantly higher than a Master’s degree in that it represents comprehensive, systematic and in-depth mastery of knowledge, research and analysis techniques relevant to the field of study, and


• Warrants publication and/or presentation as a peer-reviewed work.


393

All the processes of the PhD programme will be conducted under the oversight of each faculty under the supervision and/or coordination of the Postgraduate Committee and normally all external examiners will be senior academics at Senior Lecturer level and above with considerable experience in teaching and research at postgraduate studies level and at least three years after their PhD graduation. Courses

Course Title Outcomes of Learning Level CreditsConceptual Analysis & Research Methodology

Demonstrate highest level of skills for critical enquiry, theoretical and discourse analysis and apply in-depth mastery of advanced research methods and techniques for data collection and analysis in Tourism.


Full Thesis/Dissertation

Demonstrate a capacity to conduct independent research and make original contribution to the body of knowledge in Tourism.

10 360

394

REGULATIONS FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY (PhD)

PHD RESEARCH AND THESIS PROGRAMME

PGSD 1 : Policy

The PhD programme is by research and full Thesis. The Faculty level requirements will normally include offering compulsory, but non-credit bearing courses which must be taken by students to the satisfaction of the Postgraduate Studies Committee (PSC).

Except with the permission of Senate, no PhD candidate shall be admitted or registeredconcurrently for more than one programme of study.

A full-time PhD candidate may, at the same time, lecture at IUM, provided that the maximumload of teaching shall not exceed eight (8) contact hours per week.

PGSD 2 : PhD ProgrammePGSD 2.1: Programme coverageApart from higher degrees at Master’s level, the School of Postgraduate Studies currently offers studies leading to the following awards:

•PhDinBusinessAdministration•PhDinInformationandCommunicationTechnology•PhDinEducation•PhDinTourismandHospitality

PGSD 2.2: Admission requirementsA Master’s Degree registered at NQF Level 9 in a relevant discipline. orAny qualification at NQF Level 8 in a related discipline plus either at least five years of work experience at a senior management or professional level plus the publication of a peer-reviewed paper(s) or other publication(s).orTransfer from a PhD by coursework, research and Thesis programme in a reputable university or institution, provided that all Coursework requirements have been successfully completed, subject to evidence by means of a transcript and confirmation of this status by the university’/institution’s Registrar or delegated authority.

Applicants with qualifications higher than Masters but below PhD (MPhil, MD, etc.) or professional degrees may be considered for admission into the PhD programme on a case-by-case basis.

395

It is also a requirement that people entering into supervised learning leading to the award of a PhD qualification have been recognized as having attained or shall undertake non-credit bearing courses at NQF Level 8 or above relating to:

•postgraduatereportwritingandacademicwritinginavarietyofgenreorstyles•theproficientuseofadvancedqualitativeresearchmethods•theproficientuseofadvancedquantitativeresearchmethodsandapplications• the proficient use of information and communication technologies relevant to theanalysis and presentation of data•understandingsofethicalpracticesinresearch•awarenessofcurrentresearchpractices

PGSD 2.3: Delivery requirementsThe attainment of this qualification requires significant levels of self-directed study and research actions that require access to specialized research resources and/or facilities. The availability of such resources and/or facilities shall be verified by the IUM Postgraduate Committee.

Students preparing for the award of this qualification must be supervised by recognized experts in the field of study. At least one of these recognized experts must hold a PhD Degree, preferably in the field of study. Supervisors allocated to students shall be approved by the Postgraduate Studies Committee and shall act in accordance with instructions issued by the Committee and approved by Council.• In preparation for field work students will be expected to sharpen their general

conceptual analysis and research methodology in order to bring them up to date with new theoretical knowledge and advanced qualitative, quantitative and mixed methods of research approaches.



• As the research methodology course proceeds, students will be guided on the preparation of their research design starting with a concept paper stating the problem, its background, why it is important to undertake research on it and its relevance to the development of new knowledge that may address the problem in a specific area. The concept paper will be developed into a research proposal through various stages with the support of supervisors leading to the development of a draft research proposal and research design.


396


• The final research design and plan will be approved by the Postgraduate Studies Committee (PSC) of senate on recommendations from supervisors and forwarded to Senate for noting only.





PGSD 3: ProcessPGSD 3.1: Postgraduate Studies CommitteeThe higher degree programme at IUM will be managed by the Postgraduate Studies Committee (PSC), a Committee of the Senate, charged with the responsibility of considering recommendations from the Faculty Committees on matters relating to the pursuit of higher degrees at the university.

The Postgraduate Studies Committee will operate within the existing university regulations in monitoring the supervision of postgraduate students and ultimately the award of respective PhD Degrees upon satisfactory completion of their requirements.

PGSD 3.2: Composition The composition of the Postgraduate Studies Committee shall be as follows:•Pro-ViceChancellor,Academic&Research•Director,PostgraduateSchool•Dean,FacultyofBusinessAdministration•Dean,FacultyofStrategicManagement•Dean,FacultyofEducationalAdministrationandManagement•Dean,FacultyofHealthSciences•Dean,FacultyofInformationandCommunicationTechnology•Dean,FacultyofTourismandHospitality•Registrar

PGSD 3.3: Terms of Reference:•TheChairoftheCommitteewillbeanexperiencedProfessorfromtheuniversitystaff.•TheCommitteewillmeetregularly,atleastonceamonth,asstipulatedintheuniversitycalendar.•TheCommitteewill be served by a Secretary, to keep records of itsmeetings and

397

decisions.•TheCommitteewillreporttotheUniversitySenate.

PGSD 3.4: Faculty Postgraduate CommitteeEach Faculty will have a Faculty Postgraduate Committee for the purpose of coordinating the processing of student admission, teaching and supervision, in accordance with the directive of the Postgraduate Studies Committee.

Faculty Postgraduate Committees will report to the university Postgraduate Studies Committee, which will make final decisions on admission, teaching, supervision and award of postgraduate degrees.

PGSD 3.5: Faculty inductionUpon admission into the PhD programme students will normally be taken through a general orientation programme by the Management. Postgraduate students will be expected to go through an induction process individually, led by the Dean and in collaboration with prospective Supervisor.

The process will also involve familiarisation with Faculty resources for research, the current staff situation in relation to areas of specialization, and procedure for academic progression from the time of entry through to graduation.

The Dean will inform students about their duties and Faculty expectations regarding choice of research topic, courses that must be taken and passed, research proposal writing, participation in Faculty Seminars, and related management processes.

PGSD 4: Teaching and SupervisionPostgraduate academic staff members are based in the University Faculties and their inputs into the decision-making processes of the Postgraduate School are made through their respective Deans of Faculties, and Heads of Departments who are the Chief Examiners of departmental postgraduate examinations.

PGSD 4.1: TeachingTeaching of postgraduate courses can only be done by the following categories of staff:

a) Lecturers of the rank of Lecturer and above who are not pursuing higher degree studies under supervision;b) Lecturers who have at least one year’s post-doctoral university teaching experience.c) In special circumstances, other categories of academic staff approved by the Postgraduate Studies Committee on the recommendation of the appropriate Faculty Postgraduate Committee. PGSD 4.2: Supervision

398

Only the following categories of staff may supervise postgraduate students:

a) Lecturers who have MPH, MBA, MD or PhD degrees in the relevant discipline can supervise candidates at Master levels.b) Lecturers who have a minimum of 3 years post-doctoral research/teaching experience can supervise candidates for PhD.c) A candidate for the degree of MBA, MA or PhD shall have one lead supervisor and one or two co-supervisors. d) A supervisor must have a minimum of three years of postdoctoral research/teaching experience, except that a lecturer without PhD or equivalent but of Professorial cadre shall be eligible to serve as supervisor provided that such a lecturer is not pursuing higher degree studies. Qualified staff of other universities or research institutions, from the relevant Department, as approved by the Postgraduate Studies Committee on the recommendation of the candidate’s Faculty Postgraduate Committee may also serve as supervisor.

The supervisor shall:a) Have primary academic responsibility for mentoring and coaching candidates.b) Provide research guidance and supervision in respect of all components of the specified PhD course of study.c) Design/develop, formulate and prescribe course activity for a duration of six months in consultation with the Head of the Postgraduate School.d) Conduct and monitor the prescribed course activity and report its progress to the Postgraduate School.e) Suggest and guide the candidate for participation and paper presentations in conferences, seminars and other colloquia of relevance.f) Regularly follow up and monitor progress made by the candidate.g) Enable/connect the PhD candidate to active research groups or networks of relevance within accessible contacts.h) Provide six monthly or yearly progress reports on each candidate to the Head of the Postgraduate School.i) Consult, cooperate and collaborate with the Postgraduate School in the best possible way so as to ensure quality and compliance.

PGSD 4.3: Capacity for supervisionThere shall be a limit on the number of students that can be supervised by a Lecturer or Professor: a) A Supervisor shall not have more than six full-time Research Students equivalent at MBA and MA level.b) For PhD, supervision, the Committee system will be in use; the chair of the committee will be the main supervisor; and the committee will have the Methodology Professor/Lecturer as a member. A main Supervisor may not serve as chair in more than three committees.

399

PGSD 5: Course work and Seminars The Faculty level requirements include:i) Undertaking the following compulsory non-credit bearing courses:

1st Year of study:•ResearchMethodology/Ethics•AdvancedStatistics•AcademicProposalWriting

2nd Year of study:•SeminarsshallserveasameansforpresentationofPhDresearchproposals•ParticipatingandmakingpresentationatConferences/Workshops•Publishingatleast2papersinreputableAcademicJournals/PeerReviewedBooks;atleast 1 publication should be done jointly with the Supervisor.

3rd Year of studyii) Preparation and presentation of a Full PhD Thesis (360 Credits).

PGSD 6: Research ProposalTowards the end of the 1st Year of study, each student will be expected to prepare his/her research proposal with the guidance of the Supervisor.

PGSD 6.1: PhD research proposal preparation – annotated outline

i. Introduction: an overview and description of the topic and its potential research significance; the study’s purpose, and its limitations; the time & geographic scope. [Avoid sensitive topics: human sexuality, the death penalty, secret society, earnings from illegal sources, etc.]ii.Literature Review: a thorough review of the literature on the research topic; how the research hopes to contribute to the intellectual knowledge available, how will this study be different (new insights, fresh evidence; resolution of apparently contradictory conclusions and findings; methodological refinement; or new techniques of data analysis)? iii. Theoretical basis for Research: theoretical traditions in previous research; an assessment of theory or framework and its relationship to the proposed research. iv. Research questions/hypotheses: the general and specific research questions to be addressed in the research; what are the issues for investigation and specific research questions? What are the implications of the investigation for broader areas of knowledge and practice (for example, theory, policy, practice)?v. Research Design: the overall approach and rationale for the design (qualitative or quantitative, or both); study population in relation to anticipated sample; the rationale for the choice of analytic strategy; data sources and limitations.vi. Research Methodology: a) Method of data collection and analysis: data sources and

400

limitations; time dimension; research site and method of data selection (sampling) ; b) Analytical Framework: Formulation of the framework; relevance of the framework to current research; how the framework will facilitate data collection, analysis and presentation of results; the definition of variables - dependent & independent; c) Data processing, analysis & consolidation: organizing data for computer operations; choice of statistical techniques for data analysis; computer applications for data processing; data consolidation with reference to the variables to be analysed (rates, ratios, etc); and Interpretation & presentation of results.vii. Structure of Presentation: 1) Introduction; 2) Literature review; 3) Methodology; 4) Analysis of data and findings; 5) Implications of the findings; 6) Conclusions.viii. Research Capacity and Resources: research experience and performance; quantitative/qualitative ability; computer applications and availability of packages to be used, e.g. SPSS; research budget and funding sources; expected duration of research from time proposal approval to the submission of final research report/thesis; anticipated constraints in the process of executing the research proposal, and a review of ethical and political considerations.

PGSD 6.2: Presentation of PhD research proposalPresentation of PhD proposal will be undertaken by each candidate at two levels; namely, i) Faculty and; ii) Postgraduate Studies Committee. At each level, management may decide to accommodate the presentation of proposal in a Seminar environment by inviting other qualified academics to participate.

Following the approval of the proposal at Faculty level, the same proposal or a modified version of it will be presented to the Postgraduate Studies Committee at which the project supervisors must be present.

Comments from the Committee will be considered in revising the proposal before finalization by the Faculty responsible.

PGSD 7: Candidacy and Thesis preparationPGSD 7.1: Candidacy for PhD thesis preparationBy the end of the first year of course work and mentoring, students should prepare their PhD research proposals in anticipation of seminar participation in the second year of study.

Each student will have a slot in the Faculty Seminar Time Table to make a presentation of his/her proposal.

Unless and until a student has satisfactorily completed the 1st Year Faculty requirements, he/she may not advance to the 2nd Year of the programme. Similarly, a student may not formally start to write his/her Thesis until the 2nd Year Faculty requirements have been satisfactorily completed, including satisfactory presentation of PhD research proposal.

401

PGSD 7.2: Duration of research and thesis preparationA full-time PhD student will normally be expected to complete the programme within 3 years.

Part-time students may extend their programme to a maximum of 6 years beyond which a special justification in the form of appeal must be made to the Postgraduate Studies Committee of the university. If the appeal is declined, such a student will be informed in writing to withdraw from the PhD programme.

PGSD 8: Research Ethics And ClearancePGSD 8.1: EthicsThe purpose of this statement is to ensure that no one is harmed physically, psychologically,culturally, or socially as a result of the intended research process.

If people/human beings are involved as research subjects, doctoral candidates shall berequired to include an ethics statement in the research proposal.

Such statement is normally an indication of the ethical considerations and agreement toconduct the research in accordance with established ethical principles and procedures as arefully elaborated in the IUM Research and Consultancy Policy.

PGSD 8.2: ClearanceUpon satisfactory completion of all the stipulated programme requirements every student, before graduation and formal award of certificates, must go through the university clearance procedure involving the following:

•Finance•Library•ComputerCentre•MinistryofHomeAffairs(forforeignstudents)

Following the completion of the clearance process, a certificate of ‘Satisfactory Clearance’ will be issued to the student by the Office of the Registrar. Inability to obtain the clearance certificate could cause delay in the actual date of graduation by a student.

PGSD 9: Progress reportBased on a standard university ‘Student Progress Report Form’, each student must go through periodic process of progress reporting. The reporting form will be in three parts:

a) Part 1: to be completed by Studentb) Part 2: to be completed by Supervisor

402

c) Part 3: to be completed by Dean of Faculty/Representative

Upon completion of the progress report form, the Dean’s representative will send the signed form with his/her recommendation and possible advice.

PGSD 10: Editorial SpecificationsThe following guidelines must be observed in the course of preparation of PhD Thesis:

1: Title Format:- Justified 2: Pagination Format:- Bottom and Centre of page - Roman numerals i, ii, iii - Arabic numerals 1,2,3 For Chapter 1-5, references and appendices

3: Font: Times New Roman

Font size: 4: Title 16 Abstract 12 •TheAbstractshouldnotexceed500words•Abstractshouldprovideabriefsummaryofkeyfindings,methods(sample)usedandmain conclusions and recommendation derived from the research work

- Table of Contents 12 - Paragraphs 12 •Paragraphsshouldbekeptreasonablyshorttoenhanceclarityofthoughts•Goodwriterssuggeststhataparagraphshouldnotexceedthreecompletesentences•K.I.S.S:keepitsimpleandstraight

- Chapters, References 12

10.1 Spacing: •1.5forproposalsandfinalthesis

10.2 Italics: •Notatallunlessitisinaquote,sentenceorwordthatyoustronglywanttoemphasize•Italicsshouldbenormallydiscouraged

10.3 No. of pages/ Number words guidelines- 4th Year- 8 000-10 000 words- Masters 20 000-25 000 words - PhD 54,000 – 80,000 pages, excluding references/bibliography, annexures. The length

403

of the PhD Thesis shall not normally exceed 300 type written pages on A4 paper.10.4 Book presentation of Final Dissertation- 4th Year project, bound book in blue colour- Masters: bound book in red colour - PhD: bound book in black colour

10.5 Title on cover- Centre aligned- Order- University name, Title of research, Name of Student, Student number, Year

Example:

INTERNATIONAL UNIVERSITY OF MANAGEMENT(IUM)

TITLE OF RESEARCHBY

NAME OF STUDENT

STUDENT NUMBER

A RESEARCH THESIS IN FULFILLMENT OF REQUIREMENTS FOR THE DEGREE OF

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

YEAR…………………………

10.6 Format and order of Final Dissertationi. First page blankii. Title page- Title of dissertationiii. Abstract iv. Declaration (see Annexure A) v. Copyright (see Annexure B) vi. Acknowledgementvii. Dedication viii.Table of Contents ix. List of Acronyms and abbreviations x. List of Tables and figures xi. Chapter 1-5 xii. References xiii. Appendices

404

DECLARATION

I _________do hereby declare that this research project is my own work. I also affirm that no part of this work was published before except those sources which have been dully acknowledged. The work has never been submitted, nor will it ever be submitted to any institution, or college, or university in awarding of degree.Student’s Name: ________________________________________Signature: ________________________________________Date: ________________________________________

Supervisor’s Name: ________________________________________Signature: ________________________________________Date: ________________________________________

COPYRIGHTAll rights reserved. No part of this dissertation may be reproduced, stored in any retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, and recording or otherwise from scholarly purpose without the prior written permission of the author or University on behalf of the author.

PGSD 11: PublicationsEach doctoral student shall be required to publish at least two (2) scholarly articles/papers inrefereed or professional journals before they submit their final thesis and themselves toexamination.

The articles/papers may be prepared independently by the candidate; but, at least, one should be jointly with the supervisor.

In the case of a joint publication, the percentage of the candidate’s contribution must beshown in the appropriate form. PGSD 12 : Submission and Examination of ThesisPGSD 12.1: Notice to submit ThesisNormally, three (3) months prior to the submission of the thesis, a candidate must submit a notice to that effect to the Registrar copied to the supervisor and Director of Postgraduate Studies and the Registrar, upon receipt and registering such notice, shall send it officially to the Postgraduate Studies Committee for consideration by the candidate’s supervisor.

Once the Supervisor is satisfied that the student’s thesis is ready and is of such standard as merits submission, s/he then grants his/her consent accordingly and returns it to the candidate through the Registrar.

405

If no consent is given by the supervisor, this position must also be communicated to the candidate through the Registrar. PGSD 12.2: Appointment of External ExaminersFor each PhD thesis, there shall be at least three examiners beside the candidate’s supervisors, i.e. one (1) Internal Examiner (from the University) and two (2) External Examiners (outside the University) appointed according to the university’s policy on this matter. The Internal Examiner, preferably, need not be the candidate’s supervisor.

Normally, the Postgraduate Studies Committee (PSC) identifies suitable candidates and asks them to submit their CVs to the university for consideration. After due consideration, PSC may recommend the Examiners to Senate for appointment as such.

PGSD 13 : Examination of ThesisPGSD 13.1: :The ThesisFor Examination purposes, candidates shall submit three (3) loose-leaf bound copies to the School of Postgraduate Studies which shall distribute them to the appointed Examiners.

Each such thesis shall be accompanied by Examiner’s Report Forms and other related forms. The examination of a doctoral thesis shall normally last anything from three (3) to six (6) months.

PGSD 13.2 :The viva voce/ Oral examination All PhD candidates shall defend their theses, normally in a period of two hours following the submission by Examiners, of their Reports. The examination shall be open to the university’s academic staff, students, and the public and the notice for the examination shall be so stipulated and shall be advertised as such.

While the audience is as varied as stated, only the examining committee and the student’s supervisor(s) appointed by the PSC shall conduct the examination.

Unanimous approval of the examining committee is required for passing. If the student does not perform satisfactorily, the committee may recommend to the PSC that the student take one re-examination under stated conditions and the candidate shall be informed as such by the Registrar.

For oral defence, at least 20 calendar days before the viva voce, a sufficient number of copies of the synopsis of the thesis, acceptable in form and substance, shall be submitted to the School of Postgraduate Studies (SPS) and shall be distributed to each member of the examining committee.

Following a successful defence, and after all changes and corrections have been made,

406

3 bound copies prepared in accordance with the university’s requirements/guidelines must be submitted to the Postgraduate Studies Committee. The colour of the thesis shall be black.Doctoral students must submit an additional abstract, not exceeding 350 words.

PGSD 14: Approval of ThesisFollowing successful defence of the PhD thesis, the PSC and/or the host faculty/Department shall accordingly communicate such successful completion of PhD research/studies to Senate for noting.

PGSD 15: Application for GraduationOnce Senate has noted the successful completion of PhD research/studies, it shall, through the Registrar, notify the candidate that s/he can apply to the Registrar to proceed to graduation.

PGSD 16: Withdrawal from the PhD programmeWithdrawal from the PhD programme shall occur under the following conditions:i. When a candidate fails to complete the coursework of the PhD in the relevant subject within one year of registration.ii. Failure to submit six monthly or yearly reports continuously.iii. Failure to pay the annual fee within the stipulated time.iv. Failure to submit the thesis within six years of the registration.v. Voluntarily by a candidate.

407

408

Date post:	11-Sep-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	3 times
Download:	1 times

2020 · 2020. 7. 31. · Bachelor of Marketing Management (NQF Level 7) 125 Bachelor in Human...

Documents